
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 



at |http : //books . google . com/ 



EducT 15 16. Ae>,inCy 




Harvard College 
Library 




By Exchange 



3 2044 102 851 904 



Sttncl) Sifttktn. 



NEW SYSTEM 



TEACHING FRENCH. 



EDWARD CHURCH. 

* 

PHILADELPHIA: 

PUBLISHED BT £. H. BUTLEB & CO. 

1848. 






Bnlered aooordiqg to Act of Ooiig:rHi, la te jetr 1844| 

Bt BDWABD CHtTRCH, 

Iq tho Cleik*! Office of Ihe District Court of the Diitrict of Uamdam/ltL 






>^--.-> 






■BBsani 



mgsggt 



PEEF ACB. 



Edward Church's JV^ncA System! 

How many people will say, seeing my name, ^^ITns French System comes 
from cm JSngUsh mtml^^ 

If they could hear me speak English, I should not be obliged to write 
a single line to prove that I am quite a Frenchman, although I must 
acknowledge my name has very little French about it This explains why 
I did not wish my English to be corrected; being certain that each line, 
each word of it, would speak for me, and assure my readers it really comes 
from a French pen. 

As for my System of teaching French, who will speak for it? I should 
like, very much, to do it myself; but every one would think I was partial, 
and I fear it would be the truth. 

I will, therefore, apply for recommendations to those who employ me, 
and also to Rev. E. N. Kirk, who was present at an examination at the 
Mount Holyoke Female Seminary, and will ask them the favor of pub- 
lishing their testimony. This being done, I hope the public will have 
confidence in this System, which I will endeavor to explain in my 
Introduction. 



EE COMMEND ATIONS. 



Bstnet torn a ItiMr of B«r. B. P. BOOBB8, of VotJhamfilon, Haw. 

I have been one of his (Mr. Cs) pn]M]0, and can recommend him as an able and racoessfol teacher. His system is 
peculiar, and, in my jadgment, far snperior to that generally adopted in this country. I would add that Mr. Church 
is muTerBaUy respected in Northampton, as an amiable and upright man. 

E. P. BOOERa 



During the two past years, Mr. Church has giTen lessons at different times in the French Language in the Mount 

Bblyoke Female Semhiary, with which I am connected. All the teachers in the Institution, with myself, have been 

faigUy gratified with his peculi^riy hi^py mode of giving Ittstruction. 

_ ., MABT LYON. 

South Hapixt, Not. 4» 1844. 



This system, for the aequidtion of the French Language, has been tested by its aaAor, the past year and a htH, In 
several dasses, in the school under my care. Its peculiar advantages, I think, are these;— it is interesting to the 
learner; it leads him to speak French ; *it makes him,' as the author says, 'spesJ^ French out of his own head;' and 
the progress of the pupil is sure, constant, and rapid. 

Although much of the profideney of his pupils should be ascribed, undoubtedly, to the peculiar talent and tact of 

Ifr. Church, as a teadier, I btUcTO his ' System* for 'iVendi Spol^en,' will be found not only origfaud and Ingenious, 

but one of intrinsic merit 

MABGABETTE DWI6HT. 
Gk>THio Sbxinabt, NosTHAMFTOir, Got. 31, 1844. 



Banaot from a ktiv of Bor. EDWABD K 

I have examined your system of Instruction in the manuscript, and find but one source of embazrsssment In re- 
commendmg it My name is already given in fiiTor of another system ; and to many it may seem that the reoom- 
mendatiott to one or both must ei&er be Insincere, or too hastily given. But that shaH not prevent me firom donig 
jostice to your indnstry, enthusiasm, and talent, as well as the admirable system you are about to publish. No one, 
indeed, can learn to use the French as a spoken language, merely by the aid of books. But your book is the best aid 
I have ever met with, in two departments,— which constitute a large part of the embarrassment in learning your lan- 
guage,— the pronunciation and the verbs. 

It gives me great pleasure to see my young friends spared the tedious and needlee^y painful boon -which other 
systems inflicted on me. 

With the most coidialwidies for your snooeit, and widimudi respect, . 

I am your ob't servant, E. N. EIBK. 

BoaTOK, Not., 1844. 



INTRODUCTION. 



To acquire the grammatical part of a Hving language, is not the 
greatest difficulty. A person who has the habit of studying, may do it 
without a teacher. Bul^ Ist, to understand the language spoken; 2dly, to 
speak it ako ; and, 3dly, to arrange the words according to the genm of the 
language; — what is to be done ? 

I answer: 

To understand the language when spoken, it is necessary to have 
heard the sounds a great many times. The method that I have the honor 
of offering to the public, begins from the first lesson, and continues until 
the last, to make the pupils hear the words from the mouth of the teacher. 
After a few lessons, they will be astonished at the facility they will find 
in rendering the sounds which have become familiar to their ear. This 
answers the first two questions, — to understand the language spoken^ and to 
q)eak it. 

As fbr the third, — to place the words accorcKng to the genius of the 
language J — it is easy to comprehend, thal^ being enabled to understand 
a language by hearing, the pupil must learn its idiom at the same 
time. 

SBSaBSfiiB^iSai^BiS^iB^Bi^^iBBSBaaHBBBBai^i^BiH^Ba^^aBSai^^Bi 



IHTBODUGTIOH. 



All this vhli be obtained by means of the Dictationfl^ spoken aloud; 
and the teacher will see plainly, that, in teaching the soimds to the ear, he 
teaches the tongue to speak. 



EXPLANATION OF THE SYSTEM. 

In public courses and schools, the Guide to the Pronunciation (page 12) 
ought to be painted on a large diagram, so that the pupils may look at it 
every time they are not sure of a sound 



, 



TABLE Na h Paqe 18. DICTATION No. 1, Pagb 19. 
FIBST LESSON. 

Pronunciation of consonants and vowels. Page 13. 

The Dictation is always composed of several of the words contained 
in a table which precedes i1^ and to which a grammatical rule is applied. 
All the words of the Vocabulary, on the same page with the Dictation, 
compose it also. 



6 


INTBODUGTION. ^ 11 


In the IMctatioii, the words written in bold type are those coming fix>ni the 


table. The teacher will begin to make the pui»l pronounce them, in ex- 


plaining the grammatical rule with which they are connected. Thucf, 




Le liTre, la leQon, I'amie, lea clmteaiiz. 




Le chlen, la fenetre, Fargenti lea chapeauz. 


The pronunciation of the words of this vocabulary ought also to be 


learned before the teacher dictatea 


VOCABULARY. 


All these woirds being well 
known, the teacher begins to dic- 


que, 


that 


a, 


has. 










tate the first sentence of the Dic- 


JX 


I have. 


lei, 


here. 


tation No. 1, as on the next page. 


est, 


is. 


depula. 


since. 




joli, 


pretty. 


hler, 


yesterday. 


Le Uvre qne fal eat jolL 


Tiaite, 


visited. 




he, it 


The pupil translates aloud,— 
7^ hook thai I have it preUy ; 


a^fouitLniui, 


to-day. 


entre. 


entered. 


then he writes, in French, on his 


tres, 


very. 


ce matin. 


thismomii^. 


writing-book, and so on to the end 


difflcUe, 
Je peiuie, 


difficult 
I think. 


par, 
dana, 


by. 
in. 


of the dictation. 


QUESTIONS. 


dc, 


of, frcMD. 


conunent, 


how. 


TKAcnB,l» Ftmuh, 


PunL,«i JVwmA 


ma, 


my. (p.) 


qui. 


wha 


Comment est le 

Hviw 1 


JUL 


cousine, 


cotiain. (p.) 


penaez-yons, 


t)iiiiV you. 


Comment est U 


VamB de ma oomim. 


qaandf 


when. 


ov, on, 


wherBi or. 


QniaTisit^Ieschi- 






* 




Depnxs qnand le 












duenest-iliGit..*- 


Dqndihier. 










Fftroiiest-ilentrd? 


Parlafenkn. 










QoBodl 


CemaHn, » 


• 








OhcstVargcnt?.- 





INTBODUOTXOK. 



Having gone through with the first Dictationi the teacher will proceed in 
like manner with others^ to the end of the book. 

At the dose of each lesson, the tutor should teach his pupils the pro- 
nunciation of the words contained in the nex^ in order that they may 
conmiit them to memory. 



COPY OP THE DICTATION No. 1, P^gb 19. 

liO Itvre que j'ai est jolL AjojaasShm la leqon est ttha difficile. Je pense que Famie 
de ma ooorine a yisM lea chateaux. La ohten est id depnis hier. B est entrf oe matin 
par la ftnetre. L'argent est dans le chapean.* 



QUESTIONS. 



Comment eat le llTre? JdL CJomment est la le«on? Difficile. Qui a Tlalte 



A 



lea diateamc penaez-Tona? L'amie de ma consine. Depuia qnand le chien eat-il 
id? Depois hier. Par on eaMl enbre? Par la ftntoe.. Qnand? Ce matan. On 
eat IVurgant? Dans le chapeao. 

• Ghapesa Mng in liie tingdnv te srtkts l« boomnss Xb^ and Um X is sa^^ 



^a 



^.^rr^^. ,J^,. ;,^ ^^fr 'H^^f^^ 



TABLE. OF CONTENTS. 



Guide to the Pronmiclatloii, 12 

Explanation of the Guide, 18 

Ponctoation and Orthographical Signs, ••••• 16 

Table No. 1. — Definite Article connected with SabBtantives, 18 

Guide to the (Conjugation of the Anziliarj Verb to haye, 26 

Table No. 2. — Indefinite Article, Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, 88 

^ No. 3. — Contraction of the Definite Article with the Preposition oi; 42 

Guide to Ihe Conjugation of the Auxiliarj Verb to be, ^2 

Tables No8.4 dt 5.— Contraction of the Definite Article with the Preposition to or at, 64^ 72 

AcUectiyea, • • • » . 78 

Guide to the First Conjugation in ER, (Begular Verbs,) 92 

Irregular Verba of the First Conjugation, 108, 110 

Tables Nos. 6 & 7. — Possessive Pronouns and Cardinal Numbers, 112, 118 

Guide to the Second Conjugation in Ht, (Begular Verbs,) 126 

Guide for the Irregular Verbs in Ir, 182 

Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation, 184 

Tables Nos. 8 dtO. — Possessive Pronouns, 146, 154 

Guide to the Third Conjugation in EVOIR, (Begular Verbs,) • 162 

Guide for the Irrcguhir Verbs in OIR, - 164 

Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation, (olr,) • 166 

Table No. 10. — Possessive Pronouns and Ordinal Numbers, 178 

" No. 11.— Demonstrative Pronouns, 184 

•* No. 12. — Personal Pronouns, - 186 



TABLE OF CONTEKTS. 9 

rAOB 

Table No. 13. -^Possessive Pronouns which agree with Nouns expressed,* • « 192 

Onide to the Fourth Conjugation in REy • 200 

Onide for the Irregular Verbs in re, ? 202 

Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, 204 

Table No. 14. — Reflected and Reciprocal Pronouns of the Third Person. Of EN and Y, 216 

^ No. 15. — Relative, Interrogative, and Absolute Pronouns, 222 

*^ No. 16. — Demonstrative Pronouns ; Indefinite Pronouns, 280 

^ No. 17.—- Indefinite Pronouns and Reflected Pronouns,- • • • • 284 

^ No. 18. — Prepositions, 288 

AdJeotlTes which change their meaning, being placed before or after the Substantive,* • • • 242 

Veibfl followed by Prepositions, ? . 242 

Guide for using or not using the Negatives me, ne pas, ne pdnty 243 

ReflectiTe V^rbs, • 246 

Of the Part Participle, 257 

TableNo. 19. — Adverbs, • : 260 

« No. 20.— Do. 266 

•* No. 21.— Do. and Conjunctions, 272 

** No. 22. — Conjunctions, continued, • 278 

Imi>er8onal Verbs, 286 

Table No. 23. — Inteijections, 296 

Nmneratioii, 298 

Multiplication, 299 



msssaaam 



^uitre 



TO TB|I 

PRONUNCIATION. 



2 



12 


VBSNOH SPOKE K. 




GUIDB TO TBB FRONnNOIA.TXON 


■ 


bay 

113 


•ay 


day 

l£) 


efl* 


jay 


ash 




kah 


far 

A 


fiir 


I¥ 


O 

o 


U 


ell 

IL 


emm 


on 

an, an 


txt 


hand 

in,im 


you 

OU 


hundred 

un,une 


enn 

S5f 


pay 

IP 


a 

ai 


a 

Er,El,6St 

et,ez,e8,ei 


e^hand 

ien 


wander 

on,om 


on 

uan 


kn 


air 

IB 


O 

an 


on 

En, em 


e,nr 

ieu 


wa,ur 
Oi,(BU 


ur 

ue 


ess 


tay 


am,alm 


o 

r.An 




yonr,we 

(mr,oui 


we 

ui 


▼ay 


eeks 




ur 

EU, euz 








zadc 













EDWARD OH-UBOH'b BTBTEM. 13 



EXPLANATION Of THE GUIDE. 

Thb object of the preceding Guide is to exhibit^ at one view, the sounds of all the French letters. 
The conaonants are written round the inner rule, which indudes the Yowels ; and bj prononndng, 
in English, the vowels and consonants written over them^ the sound of the IVencb letter will be 
obtained. 



VOWELS. 



a» 

an, am,.. 

al. 



BirOKIBB SOUITDS 

COBBXSFOHBZHO TO THB nUWOS. 

has the sound of a in far. 

have the sound of oilf with the mouth half opened. 

has the sound of a in fiate. 

has the sound of the English O. 

have the sound of an in hand. 



There are four kinds of this letter~-the mute, the 

fl 8 4 

dose, the open, and the long — e 6ht.^ 



* The accent oyer the doie € is called an acute accent; that on the open h a grave accent; and that on the long 6 
acBrqm/gcR. 



14 



VBSNOH 8P0KEK. 



e (mute) 
e (dose) 
e (open) 
e (long) 
er, 
el, 
est, 
et, 

el. 



I, 

iiiyini, 

ten, (dipdumg). 
len, (dipthong). 



BNOftlSB 80VND8 

00BBS8F0in>ZHa TO TBB FBKXCB. 

has the sotmd of m* in ftir. 
baa the sound of a infkte. criMmoatkaiiMiCduA) 
has the soond of a in fate, (tim month haVopoMd.) 
haatheaoundof ainfiate. TJXTfiyiSS^^ 



have the sotind of the dose 4 that is to saj, of a in 
fieUe. er sounds as otV in the middle of a word, 
and at the end of Merf merj etc The teacher 
will ea^lain the exceptions. 

eily em, have the sound of on in wonder. 

eau has the sound of the Eng^ o. 

en, eox, have the sound of nr in for. 



has the sound of e in me. 

have the sound of an in hand- 

has the sound of e in me, and of an in hand. 

has the sound of e in me, and of nr in ftu*. 



* et sounds a in 2ef, met, In, set, etc^ these words being InTsrisble: tmt ^en Uie t is added, to form the plnnl of a 
noantenninatedwithamntoeftliesoimdirdoosnotGhaage: JBfa&H^tetoUss. LeUvrtfUalwrm. In these examples 
tabU and book, sinn^alar or pfairal, hate the same soond. 

The teacher will carefolly explain the «3«qpthn$. When thej are only written, the pnpfl forgets them sooner than 
when examples are often spoken aloud. The ear does more than the mind in soch a matter. 



XDWABD OHtTBOH^B SYSTEM. 



15 



(f«n4.) 



a,.*.... 
OUf •••• 

out.... 
GBiiy ••;• 

OUTf ••• 



The name of this letter is i gno irhen Bpelt, bat 
employed as a word, or in a word, it has the sound 
of e in me* * 



BVOftXSB SOUNDS 

OOBirSSPOSBIIKI TO TBS VBXHOH. 

has the somid of the English O. 
has the sound of oo in jOH* 
hay e the soond of an in wander, 
has the somid of wa in water, 
has the somid of nr in ftir. 
lias the somid of our in jonr. 
has the soond of the word wa. 



The English language has no sound of the n* The 
only way to get it, as near as can be, is this — pro- 
nounoellie English IT, leave the lips placed forward 
as they aze» and utter the English E. ^ 



I a phrase -/jr mil, I go thither, t ^ioi has Uiciame somid: viBagms,' 



26 



FBBNOH 8POKBH. 



HBO, 

He,*. 

Hi,.- 



BirOKISH SOUITDS 

OOBBUFOXDZVO TO TBB tBBIGB. 

haa the Boand of on m hundred* 

has the sound of OIL 

has the sound of m* in far. 

has the sound of we. It sounds kee in the word 
qoL 



PUNCTUATION. 


OETHOGBAPHICAL SIGNS. 


fTlrgole, 


oomnuu 


e, accent alga. 


acute accent 


; polnt-Tlrgiile, 




e, accent grave, 


grave accent 


: deux polnto, 


colon* 


e, accent clrconfleze 




• pohit, 


period. 


l',apo«trqphe, 


apostrophe. 


? point Interrogatu; 


note of interrogation. 


CyC^dille, 


cedilla. 


! point ezolamatii; 


note of exdaznatunL 


1, tremaf 


dusresis. 






■ trait d'anlon, 


hyphen. 






Oparanth^e, 


parenthesiB. 



(/) The aeate accent is vMd on short syllableB. 

Is) The grwre accent IS used on long s^^lebles. 

(a) The cSxcoQiflex u used to distingiiish aa intermediate soimd between ^ 

( ' ) The apostrophe maiks the eUsion, that is to say, the snppression of a TOwel before another 

(») The cedilla u placed under the (9) before the TOwels a» o^ II, to giTe the e a soft sonnd. 

(..) The disBresis is used to dinde a diphthong into two syllflhles, as aSriaL 

(-) The hyphen is used to connect compoimd words. 

( ) The parenthesis is used to enclose some necessary remark. 

• Vk sonnd like a u in straeti nis. 



TOwelorAmutei 



tS^ailt ^0* t 



DEFINITE ARTICLE TREBLE, LA, L\* LES. 
DICTATIONS N<Mk 1,2,3,4,6,0. 



imnta. I 



• TlMa(KMtroiilie(')iiiaika the elidon, tbat it to ty, the tuptm ei ii on cf » Tgwd btfore wwHwr Towet or 
Tin* ran* tat U tarn, the ftiend; fhtrnt fw la hare, this noar. 



18 



FB£NOH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 1. 
OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE T H E — eomueUd with Suittmtitm. 



(the) 



Before a noun mascu' 
line singular. 



Uvre 


book 


cliien 


dog 


gargon* 


boy 


fllst 


son 


cbemin 


road 


<hero8t 
pidn 


hero 
bread 


coiudn 


cousin 


temps § 


weather 


conte 


tale 


pere 


father 


firere 


brother 


flmit 


fruit 


* The cedilla, 
under the 9, gives 
sound of an s. It 
placed before a, 0, 

t The / does i 
The $ is very bars 
a word ends with 
singular it does n 
in the pluraL 

fore the h shows 
rated. 
4 Pronounce tor 


which is 
it the soft 
is always 
u. 

lot sound. 

h. When 

a in the 

ot change 

omma be- 
lt is aspi- 

ng. 



(fiu>) 



Before a noun feminine 
singular. 



legon 

fenetre 

malson* 

demoiselle 

flUet 

femme 

me t 

votture 

riviere 

▼iande 

mere 

scBur § 

flenrD 



window 

house 

Miss 

daughter 
[wife 
woman, 

street 

carriage 

river 

meat 

mother 

sister 

flower 



* The $ sounds as soft 
as a 2. 

t The tt take the liquid 
articulation of ^/ in Bera^io, 

X ue sounds like u. 

\ Sound the r. 

jl Sound the r. 



L' (the) 



Before a noun beginning 
with a vowel or A mute, 
fem. or mas. 



(m) (f) 
ami,amie 

(m) 

argent* 
amitie 

(m) 

OBcle 

(m) 
esprit t 

imMie 

heure 

(m) 

homme 
homieiir t 
histoire 
herome § 
herbe 
imagination 



friend 

monej 

friendship 

unde 

wit 

imaoe 

hour 

man 

honor 

history 

heroine 

herb 

[tion 
imacma* 



* The ^sounds like aj, as 

inpleasure. 

t The t do^ not sound 
except before a voweL 

X The r sounds. 

^ Though the Ais 
ed in *A^n», it is silent in A6- 
rxXne. The dioeresis (tr^ma) 
over the t ( .• J is to divide 
0, t, in pronuncuition. 

II Fkonounoe imaginadon. 



(the) 



Before plural nouns of 
either gender. 



A (m) 

chateau 

{my 
chapean 

tableau 

(m) 

cnevoux 

(m) 

bijou 

Jm) 

Shaman 

/(\P) 
Jeu 

(?) 
Bjnmffux 

(m) 

feu 

(m) 
Y09U 

(m) 

chou 

(m) 

<hibou 
cailiou 



castles 

hat9 

pictures 

horses 

jewels 

hamlets 

games 



fires 

vrishes 

cabbages 

owls 

pebbles 



* The plural is general] j 
formed with the addition (tt 
an $ ; these nouns are iiregu- 
lar, and take x for thdr ^u- 
ral; their singular is formed 
cutting off the r, except 
txMx (hor8e8),and anunatia; 
(animals), which hare their 
singular 'm ai] Lb dieoal, the 
hoFse ; tin animai^ an animal. 



EDWABD OBD&Oh'S 8T8TS1C 10 11 


OF THE DEFINITE ABTICLB THE — 


LE, LA, L*, LES, 1 


Bulk. — JtiBiMe^defiwUta^dejhecam^itTe&antoh pardcolar person or thing; as in the 


foUowing dictation: la Uvr$ — thai is, some particolar book. 


The article 2s, /b, is subject to elision, that is, the omitting of the in /is, or the a in fa, before a 


noon beginning with a rowel or h mute; Famie instead of la antie; targent instead of b argerU ; 


fhmme for le homme; and tMum for la heure. 


VOCABULABY. 


DICTEfi No. 1. 
FBOM TABLE Ko. 1, Paox 18. 


qae, 


thai. 


a* 


has. 


fal, 


I have. 


id, 


here. 


LeliTrequej'aiestjoH. Au- 


em 


is. 


depniSf 


sinoe. 


jourdlmi la legoil est tres diffi- 


JaU,(m.)* 

* 


pretty. 


hier, 


yesterday. 


cile. Je pense que I'amle do ma 
oouaine a visits lea chateaux. 


ildte, 


▼iatted. 


II. 


he,it. 


Le otaien est id depois hier. H 


aqjourdlraiy 


to^y. 


entre, 


enterod. 


est entri, oe madn, par la fenatre, 


. ^ 








L'argent est dans le chapean. 


tres, 
diffloQe, 


very, 
difficult 


oematiiiy 
par, 


this morning 
by. 




QUESTIONS. 


Jepe&M, 


I think. 


danfly 


in. 


Ckmunent eat le llvre? JoIL 


de, 


0^ from. 


comment, 


how. 


Comment eat la lefion? Diffi- 
cile. Old a Tiaite lea cha- 


ma, 


my. 


qui. 


who, which. 


teamc penaez-vona? L'amio 


coii«tne9<C) 


ooosm. 


penaez-YOua, 


think you. 


de ma consine. DqpUia qoand 


qaandf 


when. 


Ottft 


where. 


le ctaien eat-11 Id ? Depuis hier. 
Par on eat-il entre? Par la 
fendtre. Qnand? Ce matin. 


* The adjective ames in gender 
and number mtii tho gnbetaDtiTO 


t There is another on without an 


accent oter it, which is the coiynno- 


irtuchU qualifies: the general rule, 


tion or. 


On eat I'argent? Dans le char 


tof<ffm the feminine, is the addition 


wliich way the accnte accent or the 




(^antf; andant toionatheplnral', 


peau 


thus— Zs Uvre ett jdLL Let lions 


eraye turns ; to remember it forerer 
fljcy only hare to cut by the middle 




ndjciia. LadmmiseUeestJolU. Le$ 






a cntnmiflex '|^ ; the half on the left 
is the acute, the other half is the 






grare. 





20 



FBEKCH 0POKSN. 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE THE — LE, LA« L', LE8. 



Rule. —In French, the article always agrees in gender and number with the noon to which it 
relates : lejUs^ la maisofiy le$ chevaux^ etc. 

The article is always repeated before every substantive. 

Ze piref la mire. Us frlres, les sceurs, et VoncU de man ami. 
The father, mother, brothers, sisters, and uncle of my friend. 



VOCABULARY. 



partlra, 
semaine, (f.) 
prochalne, (f.) 
qaelqaes (2g.) 
jomm, (m. p.) 
apres, 
loraqne, 
lis seront, 

arrives,* 

[verronth t 
nouavous en- 

mon, (m.) 

[(3d. p. s.) 
angmente, 



will start. 

week. 

next 

[raL 
a few, seve- 

days. 

after. 

when. 

they will be. 

arrived. 

[send, 
we you shall 

my. 

increases. 



• AnMSf takes it because It 
agrees in number with e^boxntf. See 
p. 257. 

t The mxmonn objectiTe is alwa^ 
placed betore the rerb, except in the 
imperatiYe affinnadTe ^ tans, en- 
votfez-nom. 



chaqaejour, 

ellea, 

tin (m.) une (f.) 

et, 

donzeana, 

quatorze, 

qogif 

qu'eat ce qui, 
[t*eUe7t 
comblen a- 

d'enftna, 

elleenadeuz, 

quel age ? 



each day. 

she has. 

a, or an. 

and. 

twelve years 

fourteen. 

what 

[that 
what is this 
[has she 
how many 

of children, 
[has two. 
she of them 

what age? 



DICT^E No. 2. 
FROM TABLE No. 1, Paob IS. 

Le flla de la maiaonpartira la 

semaine prochaine, Poncle quel- 
ques jours apr^ Lorsque lea 
cheyaux seront arrives nous tous 
enverrons lea tableaux. L'ami- 
tie de mon amie augmente chaqnc 
jour. Elleadeuzenfans: un gar^n 
et une fille. Le garson a douze 
ans, et la fllle quatorze. 



X In this word the f is employed 
only to prevent the connection of the 
two vowels, a e ; then it cannot be 
translated, being only there for the 
sake of euphony. 



QUESTIONS. 
Qui partira la aemalne pro- 
ctaaine? XiO fils de la maison. ; 
Qui partira qaelquea jonra 
aprea ? L'onc^e. Loraqae lea 
chevanz aeront arrivea, noua 
Toaa enverrona, quol? Les 
tableaux. Qa'eaUce qui ans* 
mente chaque jour? L'amiti^ 
de mon amie. Oomblen a-t^Ue 
d'enfiuoa? EUeenadeuz. Com- 
blen de gargona 7 Un. Com- 
Men de flllea 7 Une. Qnel f^e 
alegar90n7 Douze ans. Qael 
age a la fllle 7 Quatorze ans. 



r* 


EDWABD CHUBOH'8 BTSTEM. 21 | 


OF THE DEFINI 

Rule. — The French do nol 
a preceding noon. 


TE ARTICLE THE 


— LE, LA, L', LE8. 11 


* use the article before the substantives which express the quality of 1 


Le Due de Nemourty prince du tang^ JUs du roi de France. 1 
The Duke of Nemours, A prince of the blood, the son of the king of France. 1 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 8. 

FROM TABLE No. 1, Pao« 18. 


Tldte, 0««t P-) 


visited. 


noir,* 


blade. 


avant, 


before. 




eats(3dp.s.) 


J'ai visits, les ^hameaux avant 


ai-je, 


have I? 
of the. 


maire,(m.) 
eiift 


mayor, 
of it. 


I'hetire du diner. Le soir, j'ai lu 
votrelivre. Le^herosn'a pas 1*68- 
prit de lli^ome ; m^us lea Jeux 


dmer, (m.) 


dinner. 


vralmcnt, 


truly. 


des villageois, lenr repas dans la ruey 


le soir, (m.) 
In, (past p.> 


the evening. 
read. 


parfiiit, 
Lnndl, 


perfect, 
M(mday. 


le pain noir que la demoiselle 
mange, et lea bijoux de la fem- 
me du maire, I'image en est vrai- 


▼otre, 
n'apas. 


your, 
has not 
of the. 


Mardl, 

Mercredl, 

Jeudl, 


Tuesday, 

Wednesday. 

Thursday. 


ment parfaite. 


QUESTIONS. 


▼fllageolfl, (m) 
lenr, 


villagers, 
their. 


Vendredl, 
Samedl, 


Friday. 
Saturday. 


JPai visite quoi 7 Les 'hame- 
aux. Qnand? Avant Theure du 
diner. Qaand ai-je In voire 


repaa,(m.) 


repast, meaL 


Dbnanche, 


Sunday. 


livre? Le soir. Qui n'a paa 
reaprit de llierome? Le 'h^ros. 
Qu'eatpce qoi eat une image 
parfaite? Les jeux des viUngeois, 
leur repas dans 1^ rue, le pain noir 
que la demoiselle mange, et les bi- 
joux de la femme du maire. 






* The feminine gender is obtained 
by the addition of an e. Lb chien 
noir, la niaimm ncire. 

t En means of ^ and it means 
alsota. In the first place it is a pro- 
nonn; in the second it is a prepo« 
sition. 



22 


FBSKOH 8P0KEK. || 


OP THE DEPIN 
Bulk. — The French use 


ITE ABTICLE THE— LE, LA, L«, LEB. | 


fa, lOf f 9 fat, instead of a or an before nouns of measure, weight, 1 


purchase: — Ckmtim U hoisuau? Chmhiem la Uvref ConMenVaunef || 


How much a 


bushel? How much a pound? How much an ell? | 


When speaking of time, the French nse/Mir instead of a or on: — || 


ChmbimjHxr temaina ? 


Oinnhien prenez^iHnii de hf&Hi par mais f 2Ms par temaine. 1 


How much a week ? 


How many take you of lessons by month ? Three a week. 1 


VOCABULABY. 


DICTEE No. 4. 
FROM TABLK No. I, Tjlqm la 












n'Mtpas, 


is not. 




lafiibriqae,(f.) 


the building. 


Le OOfOSin n*est pas venu. I^e 




oome. 




remettra, 


win remit. 


temps est si froid, et le cbemin 


slftoid, 


so cold. 




leacomptea. 
Tlner, 


the accounts 
[lute. 


si manvais, que la TOitm^ met 
beanooup plus de temps It arriTcr. 


slmainraUs 


so bad. 




de Tons sa- 


of you to sar 


La rlTiere est gel^e. Lliomp 


met, (Sd p. 8.) 


pnts. 




quelle est, (f.) 


what is. 


me qui soigne les antmaQx et 


beaaoonp, 


mnch. 




derniere, 


kst. 


les fenz de la fabrique, reus re- 
mettra les comptes. J'ai Vboa^ 


plus, 
de temps. 


more, 
of time. 




phrase, 
cette, (f.) 


phrase, 
this 


neur de vous saluer. 


QUESTIONS. 




to, at 




dictee 




Qui n'est pas venu? Le oonsm. 


arriver, 


toanive 




▼oulez-Tons? 


win you? 


Qa'est-ceqiiiestSiih>id7 Le 


/ 










temps. Qn' est-ce qui est si 


gelee,* 


frozen. 




avez-Yoiis ? 


have you ? 


mauTais? Lechemin. Qa' esU 


soigne (Sd p. 8.) 


takes care of] 


etes-TOQS 7 


are you? 


ce qui met beaucoiqp pins de 












temps a arrlTer? Lavoiture. 












Qn' est-ce qol est gdee ? La 
riviere. Qni Tons remettra les 








« Gtf A takes double < becaiue It 






Agrees in gender with n'rt^, which 




comptes? Lliomme qui soigne 


is feminine. See p. 2^7. 






les animaux et les feux de la fabri- 
que. Qnelle est la derniere 
phrase de cette dictee ? J'ai 




^ 




rhonneur de vous saluer. 1 



EDWABD OBUBOH'B SYSTEM. 



23 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE THE— LE, LA., L', LE8. 



BtjLE.— The French never nse the article before the adverbs, more and less, when they are 
repeated to express a comparison :-— 

JPiui an travailkj ^us on est heureux* Pbu on vous eonnaCiy phu on vous aime. 
The more one works, the more one is happj* The more one jou kjaows, the more one you loves. 



VOCABULARY. 



void,* 

d'aqjoordliiii 

aTissiboiic]ii6, 

meilleiir-e, 

qae, 

adieo, 

toulMjoimy 

Jefilfl, 

pour, 

voire, 

•ante, 

flfiniti 



[there is. 
behold, or 

of to-day. 

as good as. 

better. 

than. 

[bye. 
adieu — good 

every, day. 

I do, or make 



your, 
health. 



[sary, 



It 18 neees- 



* Void IS always used for whi^ 
foDowB. 



prononceTy 
<haiit, 

tons, (m. p.) 

oe«, (2 g. p.) 
mota, (m. p.) 
en, Op^pO 
Fran9ai»-e,t 
leqiiel(m.) 
c'est^ 

fidtes-Tons? 

[(m.)^ 

lemeillear, 
lameillenre 



^ ^ [sary, 
IS it neoes- 

topronoonoe 

aloud. 

all — every. 

these, those. 

words. 

in. 

French. 

which* 

it is. 

doyondo^ 

the best 



t The feminine is fonned hj the 
addition of an e. 



DICT^E No. 5. 
FBOM TABLE Ka 1, Paos 18. 

Voici la le^on d'ai^ourdlmi. Le 
ccmte n'est pas si joli que lllls- 
totre.- Le i>ere n*est pas aussi 
foon que la mere. La vlande 

est meilleurQ que lea chonx. 
Adieu, tous les jours, je fais des 
Tflsnx pour votre sant^. H faut 
prononcer %uit, tous ces mots en 
Fran^ais. 



QUESTIONS. 

Voici qaoi? La le^on d'an- 
jourdliuL Lequel eat le plna 
joli, le conte, on lldatolre? 
Cest I'histoire. Quel eat le 
meilleur, le i>ere on la mere 7 
La m^re. Qn'eat-ce qoi eat le 
meillenr, la Tiaiide on lea 
chonx? Laviande. Qneihitea- 
Tona tona lea Jonra? Des 
voeux pour votre sant^. Qne 
fiint-11 prononcer hant? Tons 
ces mots en Fran^ais. 



8 



24 



FRENCH 8FOKBK. 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE THE— LB, LA., L% LEB. 



. BuLE. — When phu^ tnoins, and mieux express a comparison, the French use fc, fa, ^i before 
these adverbs : — 

De toutes ces dames, votre soeur 4tait la plus jolie. 

OfaU these ladies^ your sister was the most prettt/y or prettiest. * 



VOCABULARY. 



▼01IS9 

m'ayezv 

envoyes, t 

m'ont, 

fhlt, 

plaisir, 

[merole. 
je Yoiis en re- 

icl, 

Icpays, 

charmant, 

commence, 

a etre verte, 

Je me promene, 



700. 

me have. 

sent. 

to me have. 

made. 

pleasure. 

rthank 
I yon or them 

here. 

the country 

charming. 

begins. 

to be green- 
[walk 
I myself 



quelqaefbia, 

dans lesbols, 

avec, 

bote, 

me font penr, 

malanzpleda 

a-t-on? 

Tons dltesy 

ces choaea, 

Yona ont, 

[eUe. 
commence-t* 

[70118? 

vovB promenez- 



• When phiSf mocM, and mieitx be- 
gin the sentence, and are repeated, 
Sie article is not employed*. moin$ on 
traveaUe, the least one works ; moin» on 
veid traoodUer^ the least one is willing 
to woric. 

t See page 257. 



sometimes, 
in the woods 
with. 

landlord. 

[fear, 
to me make 

[feet- 
evil to the 

has one ? 

you isay. 

these things. 

to you have. 

begins it 

do you walk? 



DICT^E No. 6. 
FROM TABLE |7a 1, Page 18. 

Le fniit et la flenr que vous 
m'avoz envoy^ m'ont fait beancoup 
de plaisir ; je vous en remercie. Ici 
le pays est charmant; llierfoe 
commence k 6tre tr^s verte. Je me 
promene quelquefois dans lea bois 
avec le firere et la soenr de mon 
hdte, mais lea llibouz me font 
peur et lea caillouz mal anx pieds. 



QUESTIONS. 
One voua a-t-on envoye? 
Le fruit et la fleur. Votta ditea 
que ces chosea Toua ont fait 
beancoup de qnoi ? De plaisir. 
Comment est le paya ? Chai^ 
mant. Comment llierbe com^ 
mence-t-elle a etre? Tres 
verte. Ou Tona promenez- 
Yona quelqaefoia ? Dans lesbois. 
Arec qui? Avec le frere et la 
scBur de mon hdte. Qn' eat^e 
qui Tona ftit i>ear? Les 'hi- 
boux. Qn^est-ceqiiiTonafait 
mal anx pleds ? Les cailloux. 



iSmitit 



TO TBM 



CONJUGATION OF THE VEEB TO BAVE. 



AVOIR, 



sam 



26 FBENOH SPOKEN. || 


J* ai, 
to as, 
a a, 


MgaHvemenL 
Je n'ai pas. 
Tu n'as i>aa. 
B, elle n' a jmm. 


IfUerrogativemeTU, 
ai^e? 
as-tu? 
a-t^U? 


JbUerrog, S^ NigatwemenL 
n' ai-Je paa7 
n' as-Tu paa7 
n' trXril paa7 


nous avoxui. 


nous n'avonspaa. 


avons-noua 7 


n* avons-nouB paa 7 


YOUS avez, 
ils ont. 


YOUS n' avez paa. 
ils, elles n' ont pas. 


avez-voua 7 
ont-ils, eUea 7 


n' avez-Yous paa 7 
n' ont-ils paa7 




InfiniHf. 
avoir. 

to have. 


ParUcipe prig. 
ayant. 
having. 


Participe pas$6. 
eu« 
had. 




LidieaHf pre$enL 


ChndiiionneL 


IJ* al, T 
2ta aa, 
8il,elle a. 

1 nous avona, 

2 vous avez, 
8 ils, elles ont. 


I have, 
thou hast, 
^he, she has 
^we have, 
you have, 
they have. 


l<r aurala, 1 

2ta aurala, 

^11, elle auralt. Il should, would, 

1 nous aurlona, ( could, have, etc 

2 YOUS aurlez, 

8 lis, elles auralent.J 


M^HXTfctit* 


junpiraHfm 


1 J* avala, 

2 tn avals, 
8il,eUe, avalt. 

1 nous avlons, 

2 vous avlez, 

8 ils, elles avaient.. 


I did have, 
thou didst have, 
he, she did have, 
we did have, 
you did have, 
they did have. 


\m m • • • • • t • **** 

2 ale, 

{(• .•.....» .... 

l.......,..a7ona, 

2 ayez. 


have. 

'Let us have, 
have, etc 


JP^aMt iefinu 


SuhjimeUf Pr6seni. 


IJ* eoa, 
2tn eoa, 
8 11, elle eat, 

1 nous etaneu 

2 YOUS efttea, 
8 ils, elles eurent. 


Ihad, 
thouhadsi^ 
he had. 
"we had, 
you had, 
they had. 


que J* ale, 1 

que tn alea, 

qu'il -alt. That 1 may have, 

que nous ayona, 1 etc • 

que YOUS avez, 

qu' ils alent. J 


FiOur. 


Lr^KofaiL 


i<r aural, 
2tn auraa, 
811, elle aura. 
- 1 nous aurone, 
2 YOUS aurez, 
8 ils, eUes auront. 


I shall, or will have, 
thou shalt, "> 
he shall, «< 
[we shall, « 
you shall, ^ 
they shall, ^ 


que J* eusae, 
que tn euaaea, 

qu' il eAt 
que nous euaslona^ 
que vous euaslez, . 
qu' ils euaaent. 


That I might have, 
etc 



EDWARD CHT7RCR'8 SYSTEM. 



27 



CONJUGATION OP THE AUXTTJABY VERB TO HAVE, AVOIR.* 

INDICATIVB PBESENT. 



The indieaiive is the mood which affirms a thing. The preient marks that a thing is passing at 
the moment a person speaks. 



VOCABULARY. 



de mon flrere, 

t 

detasoBor, 
icheslni, 
demon i>ere, 
lea plus, 
beaux, 

de mon oncle, of my 
qoloufrti. 



[er. 
of my broth- 



la nte, 

dana, 

lenTf 



of thy sister. 
at his home, 
of my father, 
the most, 
fine. 

mide. 
which opens, 
on, upon, 
the street 
in. 
their. 



* The Texb to hare, avoir, marks 
the aclioiL B a commene i . The 
rerb to be, itrt, marks the state. II 
ert eommme£, Then all the neater 
Terbs shoold be oonjogated with to 
haTe, sinoe thejr express an action. 
Howerer, the fbUowmg are coigiiga- 
ted with to be: aUer, arriver^ diader 
Mdtre, momir, vadr, and the com' 
poondselso^dkeanr, 



chainbrey 

depaille, 

qa'al-Je? 

qa'aa-ta? 

qnia-t-U? 

qaVt^Ue? 

qa'avons-iiraB? 

qa'ayez-youa? 

qa'ont-Ua? 

qa'ont^nea ? 



chamber. 

of straw. 

whathavel? 
[thou? 
what hast 

[he? 
whom has 
[she 
what has 

[we? 
what have 
[you? 
what have 

[they? 
what haye 

they? 
what have 



t Negatitely : Je n'ai pas le Urre 
de mon ft^re.. Interrogatively: ai- 
je le liyre ? Negatively and inter- 
rofffttiTefy : n*ai-Je pas le livre 1 

This ought to be done at the end 
of each dictation. 

First of all, it is very important to 
make the papil pronoonoe, ooocr, 



DICt6e No. 1. 
FROM TO HAVE. Paob 2S. 

J* al le llTTe de mon frire. 
Taaala legonde ta soeur. n 
a, chez lui, rami de mon p^. 
Elle a lea cUateauz les plus 
beaux. Noua avona le chien 
de mon onde. Vona ayez la 
fenetre qui onvre sor la rue. Ha 
OntFargent dans leur chambre. 
Ellea oat lea chapeanz de 
paillct 



QUESTIONS. 
Qa'al-Je? Le livie de mon 
fr^re. Qu'aa-ta? La le^on de 
ma sceur. Qui apt-U ? L'ami de 
mon p^re. Qu'apt-elle? Les 
chAteanx les plus beaux. Qu'- 
aTOna-llOlia ? Le chien de mon 
onde. Qa'avez-YOlia? La fe- 
ndtre qui ouvre sur la rue. Qa'« 
ont-ila? L'argent dans leur cham- 
bre. QQ'ont-ellea? Les cha- 
peaux de paiUe. 



28 



FBENCH BPOKEK. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXniABT VERB TO RAV^—AYOISL 

IMFBHFECT.4» 



The itnpeffect expresdes the affirmation as present, with respect to something past 



VOCABULARY. 



paMer, 
ppeg, 



merite, 

[monde, 
de tout le 

termlne, ^ 

[denilere, 
lasemaine 

admeFf 

de Yotre and, 

leg mieuZi 

dreMes, 

prl», 

[Montalgu, 
Moiudeiir de 



seen. 

to pass. 

near. 

[served, 
merited, de- 
body, 
of evciy 

terminated, 
[last 
the week 

at dinner. 

[friend, 
of your 

the best 

trained. 

taken. 

[taigu. 
Mr. de Mon- 



* The teacher will explain, that 
ifhen Uie imperfect is followed bj a 
past participle, this tense becomes a 
plnpeifect Thus, in the beginning 
of this dictation: TavaU is the im- 
perfect of to have, but mi, which fol- 
lows it, changes it into a pluperfect 

t Negatively: Je n'ayais pas th le 
gar9on. IntenogatiTelj : ayais-je 
vn garqon 1 Negatirely and inter- 
rogatively: n'avais-je pas vn le 
gar^onl 



le plus long 

invite, 

delenr, 

maitrene, 

de pension, 

qui avals-Je 7 

qa'avaifl-ta? 

qa'avait-il? 

quiavait^Ile? 
[nous? 
qoi aTiona- 

qa' ayaia-Je ? 
[Us? 
qu* ayaient- 



the longest 

intited. 

of their. 

mistress. 

of school 

whomhadi? 
[thou? 
what hadst 

yhathadhe? 

[she 
whom had 

[we? 
whom had 

what had I? 
they? 
what had 



DICT^JS No. 2. 
FBOM TO HAVE. Pian 2S. 

T avals vu le gargon passer 
prds de la maison. Tn avais md- 
rit^l'amltie de tout le monde. H 
ayait tennind les tableaux la 
semaine demi^re. E31e avait vn 
le Ills et la demoiselle de Mon- 
sieur de Montaigu. Nons avioilS 
k diner I'oncle de votre ami. 
Vous aviez les chevanx 
les mieuz dress^ Us avai^t 
prislecheminle plus long. Elles 
avaient inyit^ la fllle de leur 
maStresse de pension, f 



QUESTIONS. 
Qui avals-Je vn? Le gar^on 
passer pr^s de la maison. Qu' avais-tu merite 7 L'amiti^ de 
tout le monde. Qn* avait-il termine? Les tableaux. Qoand ? 
La semaine demi^re. Qui avait-eUe VU 7 Le fils et la de- 
moiselle de Monsieur de Montaigu. Qui avions-nous a diner 7 
L'onde de yotre and. Qa* avais-Je 7 Les cheyanx les mieux 
dress^ Qu' avaient-ils pris 7 Le chemin le plus long. Qoi 
avaient-eUes invite 7 Lit fiUe de leur maitresse de pension. 



EDWARD GHUBOH's SJ8T£U. 29 11 


CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIAKY VERB TO SAVE — AlTOTtL II 




FBETEBTT DEFINITE. 




Thepreter^ dejmke maAs tliat a thing took place at a dme completely past It would be a 1 
great fault to say or write : J* eus hploMtr de voir vatre mere aujaurd^huu H 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTijE No. 8. 
FROM TO HAVE. Paob ^ 
J» ena I'eaprit de tn'en sordr. 
Tn ena lea bijonz de ta mke. 


m'en, 
jK>rtir, 


me of it 

to go out. 

[ther. 
of thy mo- 


en la voyant, 
de aa bonne. 


in her seeing 
of her good. 


detamere, 


d' aUer, 


of to go. 


11 eut le bonhenr d* dtre le li^roB 


le bonhenr, 

A 


[ness. 
the happi- 


oonaoler, 


to comfort 


de la Ate. Elle eat celui d' 6tre 
pr^ de la princesse, la ftmme la 


d'etre^ 


oftobe. 


pauTTea, 


poor. 


plus belle et la plus aimable que Ton 


fete, 


feast 


habitana. 


inhabitants. 


puisse tronver. Nona eninea, en 


cetoi. 


that one. 

[cess. 


de qnoi ftlre, 


ofwhattodo 


la Toyant, llmage par&ite de sa 
bonne m&re. Vona entea llion- 


de la irinoeBBey 


of the prin- 
[qomest 
theband- 


ena-Je? 


hadi? 


nenr d' aller ayeo elle visiter tous 


la ptns belle, 


ena-ta? 


hadstihou? 


lea ^lameanz, et de consoler les 


aimable, 
qnePonpolflse, 


[kind. 
amiable, 

[or may. 
that one can 


ei[t-U?ent-elIe7 
enmea-nous ? 


[she? 
had he, had 

had we? 


pauvres habitans. * 


<}UESTIONS. 
Jf eua Teaprit de qnirf fUre ? 


tromrery 


find. 


entea-vona 7 


had you? 


De m'en sortir. Quela bijaiiz, 






eorentFlIflielles? 


had they? 


eoa-tn? Les bijoux de ma m^re. 
Onel bonhenr ent-il? ly ^ixe^ 




le<h&rosde laftte. Quel bonlieiir ent-eUe? Celni d'etre 




pr^ de la pnnoesse* Ck>nunent eat la piinceaae? La femme 




la plus belle, la phis aimable que Ton puisse trouTer. Quelle 




Image enmea-noiia enla voyant ? L'image par&ite de sa 




bonne m&re. Quel honnenr eatea-Yona ? Celui d'aller avec 








• 


• TSfeaAreiji^Je n'aa poM Vetprit InteixogatiTely: — £iii-ja rfl^rdf 
Negatively and interrogatiyely:— iV^ eu^j^paaVuprUf 



30' 



F&EMOH 8FOKBK. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXIIJAET VERB TO HAVE, AVOIR. 
PEETEBIT DKPINITB CONTINUED. 



VOCABULARY. 



sans doute, 

repandu, 

ses bienfaits, 

parml, 

de leura, 

assure, 

pour long-temps, 

a V eglise, 

sonna, 

y snivit, 

8a Menfldtilcef 

paisemeef* 



[doubt, 
without 

spread. 

her benefits. 

amidst. 

of their. 

[cured, 
insur^ se- 

for long time 

to the church 



[ed. 
there foUow- 
[factress. 
one's bene- 

scal^red. 



* See page 257. 



pavolsees, 

aasortir, 

cosuneiicdrBnt) 

etait-eUe? 

da Tillage, 

ermitage» 

mon, (sing, zn.) 
ton, (sing, m.) 
son, (sing, m.) 
notre, (2g. s.) 
voire, (2 g. b.) 
Icur, (2 g. fl.) 



[flags, 
adorned with 
[getting out of. 
at the time of 



was she? 

of the Tillage 

hermitage. 

my. 

thj. 

his, her. 



our. 

your. 

their. 



DICTilE No. 4. 
FROM TO HAVE. Faob 86. 
La princesse a, sans doute, r^pan- 
du ses bienfaits parmi les villageois ? 
lis eurent tons le pain de leurs 
enfans assurd pour long-temps. I«' 
henre d' aller k r^glise sonna, tout 
le monde 7 suivit sa bienfaitrioe. 
La me dtait parsem^e de fieurs, 
les maisons paroisdes. Au sortir de 
Termitageles Jeuz comm^icerent 
etc t 



QUESTIONS. 
Parmi qui la princesse a^ 
t-elle repandn ses bienfidts ? j 
Parmi les villageois. Qu' eurent- 
ils d'assnre ponr long temps ? | 
Le pain de leurs enfans. Qn' est- , 
ce qui sonna? Llieure d'aUer h TEglise. QnlsniTitla prin- 
cesse al'EgUse? Tout le monde. Deqoi etait-ellelaUen- 
fidtrice ? De tout le monde du yilUige. Qn' est-ce qoi etait 
parsemee de flenrs ? La rue. Qn' est-ce qoi etait pa- 
volsees? Les maisons. Qoand les Jenz des villageois ont- 
ils commence ? An sortir de I'ermitage. i 



t At the end of each dictation, the teacher will make the pupil translate aload 
a few qnestions, negatiyely, interrog^tiyely, and intem>gatiyelj and neeatively — 
Thxa I La princesse n'a pas. La princesse a-t-eUef La princesse 9^04-6116 pas f 



BDWABD OHUBO'H'8 8T8TEM. 



81 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXHJABY VEBB TO SAVE— AYOUL 

FRETEBTT INDEFIKrTE. 



The prtterii indefinite maiks a time quite past or noty thus you may say: J*ai eu lephdsir de 
voir voire cousin ee matiny hiefj ou Vannie pauie. * 



VOCABULARY. 



leplalslrf 

Ilya, 

qaelqiiesjolm, 

ataporte, 

adizhenres, 

damatlii) 

qnidoity 



avant dejeu- 

deaaviaite, 

apreadineTy 



the pleasure. 

of to see* 

there is. 

a few days. 

at thy door. 

atteno^oek 

of the mom- 

who ought 

toselL 

[breakfast 
bdTore 

ofherTisit 

after dinner. 



* The oompodnd tenses an, as in 
Enfflish, made with one of the aud- 
lianes and the past partidple of the 
Teib connected -with it, Thos: Tai 
vuiU,feittmsiU^favai8vint£ There- 
fijreit is useless to write here all the 
compoimd tenses — I will only ex- 
plain their meaning : Tmu eihvmUy 

it c xp ressc a theaflbmationofanao- 
tk>nr wliich took place before another 
in a past time : quandfeiu d^jeun^Je 
partiM. Tlieplnperfe(^/aMiastMi<^, 
expresses a thing not only past in 
i tself, bat with respect to another. 



[tiflce, 
les feuz d'ar- 

qni ai-Je ea? 

a quelle heore 

aa-taeu? 

qai apt-lieu? 

oaa-t-eUeeu? 

qaelhomieiiif 
[en? 

arona-noua 
[en? 

qa' aTez-vous 

|noB,(p.2g.) 

[eUesea? 
qa' ont-Ue, 

▼oalettresy 



[works, 
thefire- 

[Ihad? 
whom have 
[hour? 
at what 

[had? 
hast thou 

he had? 
whom has 

[she had ? 
where has 
[or 
what hon- 

[had? 
have we 

you had? 
what have 

our. 

[they had? 
what have 

your letters. 



DICTiJE No. 5. 
FROM. TO HAVE. Paob 26. 

J'ai eu le plaisir devoir le cou- 
sin il y a quelques jours. Tn aa 
en la yoltnre h ta porte h dix 
heures du malin. D a en le temps 
de voir llionmie qui doit vendre 
leg animany. Elle a en.Ie 
temps d' aller a la riviere avant 
dejeuner. Nona aTons en Itioii- 
nenr de sa visite apr^s diner. 
Vons avez en le plaisir de voir 
les fenz d'artifice. Us ont eu vos 
lettres. EUes ont eu les livres. 



QUESTIONS. 
Qn' ai-Je en le plalalr de 
voir 11 7 a qnelqnesjonrs? 
Le cousin. A. quelle heure as- 



tu en la voitore a ta porta ? A. dix heures du matin. Qui ap 
t-U en le temps de voir? Lliomme qui doit vendre les ani« 
manz. On a-t^Ue en le temi>s d'aller avant dejeuner ? 
A la riviere. Apres^^ier quelliyoimeur avoas-nonsen? 
Llumneur de sa visite. Qn' ave2S-vons en le pUdslr dto 
voir? Les feux d'artiiice. Qu'ont-Useu? Vos lettres. Qn' 
ont-eUes en? Les livres. 



^^ 



FBSMCH SPOKEN. 

!■ ■ I - . ,■■.... . , . 11 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO HAVE, AVOIR. 

FxrruRB. 



The future expresses that an motion will take place in a time whidi does not yet exist: J^aurax 
hierUdt le conte que votu dinrez, * 



VOCABULARY. 



bientot, 

desirez, 

si in manges, 

da pain, 

avec, 

qu'il, 

me demande, 

fait, 

des voBuz, 

pom* voire, 

de Charles, 

arrivee, 

de Marie, 



soon, 
wish, 
ifthoueatest 
some bread, 
with, 
that he. 
me asks, 
made, done, 
some wishes. 
for your, 
of Charles, 
arrival, 
of Mary. 



ga^. [stood. 
pea comprls, ilitUe under* 



* The second future, or fatnre 
anterior, expresses that a thing will 
take place, after another shall have 
alreaay taken place, Thus : Taurai 
din^t quand vous viendrex. 



oUTrage, 

qu' aorai-Je 7 

qa'aoras-ta? 

qa* aara^t*il 7 
[eUe? 
qu' aora^t- 

[noas7 
qu' aorons- 

[vous? 
qa' aorez- 

[elles, 
qu' auront-Us 

[nous, 
qoiaurons- 

laflndumois, 

parle, 



notre, f s. 2 g.) our. 



work. 

[have 
what shall I 
[thou have 
what shaU 
[have 
what will he 
[she have ? 
what will 

[have 
what will we 
[you have ? 
what will 
they have ? 
what will 

[we have ? 
whom shall 
[the month, 
the end of 



spoken. 



t Je a'axurai pas, etc. 



DICTi:E No. 6. 
FROM rO HAVE. Paob 26- 

J'aurai bientot le conte que 
vous d^irez. Tu auras la viande 
si tu manges du pain avec. II aura 
lliistoirequ'il me demande. EUe 
aura fait des vcbuz pour votre 
bonheur. Nous aurons vu le 
pere de Charles avant la findu mob. 
Vous aurez parld a la mere de 
Marie avant notre arrivee. Us 
aoronty sans 'doute, pen compris, 
llierome de votre ouvrage. t 



QUESTIONS. 
Qu' aurai-je bientot? Le 
conte que vous d^sirez. Qu' auras- 
ta si tu manges du pain aveo ? 
Laviande. Qa'aiira-Ml7 L'his- 
toire qu' il me demande. Qu' aura- 1 
t-elle fUt 7 Des voeux pour votre 
bonheur. Qui auTons-nous tu 
avant la fin du mois 7 Lepere 
de Charles. A qui aurez-Tous 
parle avai^t notre arrivee 7 A 
la mfere de Marie. Qu'auront- 
Us peu compris 7 Lli^rolne de 
votre ouvrage. 



EDWARD OHUBOH'b SrSTBH. 



83 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO BAVE—AYOIEL 

CONDITIONAIi. 



The conditional mood marks an action on conditions. The present tense expresses that a thing 
would take place on certain conditions: La tceur de man amie auraU icrity maU dh etatt malade. » 



VOCABULARY, 



da bonhenr, 
a les volTy 
sotnrmty 
mieaz, 
deserter, 
I a la penrton, 
deLaure, 
a plQa, 
deraiflOD, 
quetol, 
agiaizisl, 
de Julie, 
ellea. 



I (m.) 

leux, 



[ness. 
some happi- 
[see. 
to them to 

often. 

bettcr,(adv.) 

of to stay. 

at BchooL 

of Laura. 

has more. 

of reason. 

than .thou. 

acted thus. 

of Julia. 

(ra.) •(£) 

them, them. 



ecrit, 

etait malade, 

a Yoiis Toir, 

toiMicl, 

mala, 

plustard, 

duchagrlii, 

d'avoir, 

perdu, 

quanta, 

V08 parental 



[son, 
sanscetterai- 



written, 
was sick, 
you to see. 
aU h^e. 
but 

more late*, 
some sorrow 
of to have, 
lost 
asfinr. 
jourparentQ 



yon to seek, 
[reason 
without thisi 



DICT^E No. 7. 
FROM TO HAVE. Paob 26. 
J'anraifl du bonheur k les voir 
souvent Ta anrais mieux fait 
de rester k la pension. Le firere 
de Laure a plus de ndson que toi, 
11 anralt agi ainsL La bobut de 
Julie anrait ^crit, mais elle ^tait 
malade. Nona anriona du bon- 
heui: ^ Tous voir tous ici, mais plus 
tard, Yona anriez du chagrin 
d'ayoir perdu votre temps. . Quant 

Immi 

k Tos parents, 11a anraient ^t^ 
vous chercher sans cette raison. t 



QUESTIONS. 
Qid anraia-Je dn Ixmbenr 
a voir? Eux on elles. On an- 
rais-tn mleux fldt de rester? 

k la pension. Qnl anralt agl alnsl? Le fr^re de Laure. 

Qnl anrait ecrit ? La soeur de Jtdie, mais elle ^tait malade. 

Qnl anriona-nona dn bonhenr avoir lei? Nous tous. 

Qn' anriez-voiui dn chagrin d^avoir perdn ? Notre temps. 

Qnlanraientete vona chercher sans cette ralaon? Nos 

parents. 



* The pest of the conditional, expresses that an action wcmld haxe taken place 
at a time which is elapsed, dependent on certain conditions — Thns: J^aurauArit 
St vous auiez commence; or feutae €crii si^etc. t Je n' aorais pas, etc. 



{4 VBBNOH SPOKEN. | 


OONJnGATION OF THE AUXILIABT VERB TO HAVE, AVOHL | 


The imperatiTe is the 


IMFEBATIVE. 




,.^,»«k,.™^.d»»,.«»u,„..,™.. 1 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICTilE No. 8. 






1 


leMin, 
de m'ecrlref 


the care. 

[write, 
of me to 


leaobjeta, 
donty 


theolgecte. 
of which. 


TrnXyiLTOHAVB. PaosSS. 
Ma ch%re fflle, ale le soin de 


plus somreiit, 


more often. 


]e vwm parte, 


I yon speak. 


m'^crire plus sonvent. Ayons 


lapreoaaUon, 
dene pas, 


[lion, 
of not 


ansal, 

la complUdfl- 


also. 

the kindness 


tonjoars la prdcaation de ne pas don- 
ner d'inqni^tude k oeux qui sont 
lorn de nous. Mon cher ami, ayez 


d'inqoletade, 


of uneasiness 


de Toir, 


of to see. 


la bont^ de m'enyoyer soua qnelqnes 


aoenz, 


to those. 


de me dire, 


of me to say. 
[cairies, does. 


jours les ohjets dont je voos parle. 
Ayez anssi la oomplaisanoe de yoir 


qaisoiit, 
loin de nowi 


who are. 

farfiomns. 

my dear. 

[kindness, 
the goodness 


Useporte^ 
dequoiftlre? 
oe, oetycette, 
oea. 


he himself 

[do? 
of what to 

this. 

these, those. 


mon fils, et de me dire c(»nment il 
seporte. 


mon cher(e), 
labontot 


QUESTIONS. 
. Ma chere fllle ale le aoln 


dem'enyoyery 


of me to send 


donner, 


to give. 


de qool ftire ? ' De m'toire plus 


sons, 


under. 


tonjoars, always. 


souvent Ayona tonjonra la 
precaution de qool ftire? De 
ne pas donner d*mqui^tade k ceux 
qui sont loin de nous. Mon oher 
and, ayez la bonie de m'en- 


• To emeaB an izgnnction tobaye 
a thing done before anotheri the 
oomponnd Impeiative may be used 
— l%ns: Ayotts din€ hnqt^Ss vim- 
dnnL Ayezfiu ootuA dimr. 








Toyer qnol 7 Les objets dont je 






voos parle. Ayez anasl la com- 






plaisance de fUre quel? De 






voir mon fib, etde me dire comment 




• 


il se porte. 



BDWABD OHUBCH'S 8T8TE1L 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO BAVE—AYOISL 

8UBJX3KCTIVB PBESENT. 



85 



The iuhfunctive is the mood which expresses a subordination to what precedes. It is used after 
a Terb which marks will, command, doubt, desire, or fear. * 



VOCABULARY. 



nyeat, 
Jfezlge, 
Je douie, 
n desire, 
JQcraint, 



Je ne citna 
Je ne penae 
croyez-Yous ? 
plus d'ordre, 
plus de eoln, 
finlt nudntsnuit 
salettredemaln 



[he wishes, 
he requires, 

I require. 

I doubt 

[wishes, 
he desires, 

he fears, 

pieve. 
I do not be- 

[think. 
I do not 

believe you? 

[der. 

more of or- 

moreofcare. 

finished, now 

[morrow. 

his letter to- 



qaeyeut*!!? 

[vous? 
qa' ezigez- 

doutez-voiui ? 

, [11? 
que desire-t- 

qaecraint*!!? 

[-yous pas ? 
que ne croyez 

[-Yons i>as ? 
quenepensez 
qooi? 
croyez-vons 

trop a fUre, 

raison, 

torty 

ecrit, 



* The snbjiuictiTe is used also 
after the fonowine impersonal yert)8: 
// €ti itfftfe gve, • • • it is useful that 
// Beinble que,' • • 'it seems that 

IltuffUque, it suffices that 

I /ieoRouitf^iiei^^-itiBOonTciiientthat 
I //etf apropos ^ne, it is proper that 
llfittdque^ it is necessary that 



[wish? 
what does he 
[require, 
whi^ do you 

doubt you ? 
, [he 
what desires 
[fear? 
what does he 
[not believe? 
what do you 
[not think ? 
what do you 
[what? 
believe you 
[do. 
too much to 

reason* 

wrong. 

written. 



The following impersonal verbs 
take the indicative mood : 

II im suit, it follows. 

7/ya, there is. 

// parait, -it seems. 

// r^uUe, it resnlts. 

// est certain^ it is certiun. 

// est vraiy it is true. 

Tl me aemhle, it seems to me. 

7/ ertsfir, it is sure. 

The sabjonctive is also used after a 
negative verb, and after an interro- 
gation, except when it is an oratory 
torn: OubUez^vousquPUatnumpiref 



DICTi:E No. 9. 

FBOH TO HAVE, Faob 2S. 

H veut qne J'aie plus d'ordre. 
cTezige qne tn ales plus de soin. 
Je doute qnll ait fiui maiatenant. 
U desire qn^eUe ait sa lettre de- 
main. H craint qne nons n* ay- 
ons trop k f aire. Je ne crois pas 
qne vons ayez raison. Je ne 
pense pas qn^ils aient tort 
Croyez-vous qn'eUes aient ^crit 



QUESTIONa 

Qne yent*il? Que j*aie plus 
d'ordre. Qn' ezlgez-vons? Que 
tu aies plus de soin. De qnoi 
dontez-vons? Qu' il ait fini 
mamtenant Qne des!re-t^iI7 
Qu'elle ait sa lettre demain.. Qne 
craint*il? Que nous n'ayons trop 
k faire. . Qiv ne croyez-Yons 
pan? Que vous ayez raison. Qne 
ne pensez-vons pas? Qn'ils 
aient tort. Croyez-vons qnoi? 
Qu' ellcs aient ^crit 



36 



FBENCH SPOKE K. 



CONJUGATION OP THE AUXILIARY VERB TO 2L4Kfe— AVOIR. 

IMPEBFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIYE. * 



When the first rerb is in the present, the present of the subjunctive is employed. When the 
first verb b in the past, the subjunctive is in the past also, being always dependent on the first verb. 



VOCABULARY. 



n Importait, 
B etalt utile, 
n semblait, 
nrafllMity 
n conveiiait, 
netaitapropoBi 
Ilfallait, 
▼nyotre, 
ecrit avanty 
deimrtir, 
penrdeveolr, 
de sa mere, 
qn'lmportalt-U? 



[tant. 
itwasimpor- 
[ful. 
it was use- 



it 

[cient 

it was suffi- 

[per, 

it was pro- 

[per, 

it was pro- 

[sary. 

it was necGs- 

seen your. 

[fore, 
written be- 

of to start 

come, 
fear of to 
^fherV 



his S 
[portant ? 
what was im 



* The rabjunctive mode has two 
other tenses : the pnst rpw fate en ; 
the plnperfert que f tune attendu^ J^ft^t 
r^wndxh pr^vfnu^ as in the foar Inst 
lines of this dirtntion. 



qa'etait-UaUle? 

qoesemblalt-il? 

qoesnffiflait-ll? 

[deftire? 

qaeconvenalt-U 

^[P08? 

qn'etalt-lla pro- 
que fiOlait-U? 
attendii, lettrei 
payc, 
repondu, 
preyenUf 
lean parents, 
partir, 



[useful? 
what was 

[it? 
what seemed 

[fficient? 
whfdwassu- 
[proper to do! 
wiiat was 
[proper to dot 
what was 

[cessary ? 
what was ne- 
[ter, 
waited, let- 
paid. 

answered, 
foretold, 
their parents 
to start 



DICTiiE No- 10. 
FROM TO BAVE. Page 26. 
II importait qne j'eUBSe voire 
lettre. II £tait utile que tu 
enases mon livre avant de partir. 
II sembkit qa'll eat peur de venir 
ici. H suffisait qa^eUe eut la 
lettre de sa mere. H conyenait que 
nous eOSSiona attcndu. n ^tait 
a propos que voiia eusaiez paye. 
II fallait quHla eussent n^pondu. 
U fallait qa'eUea eussent pr^ 
venu leurs parents. 



QUESTIONS. 
Qa'importait-il? Quej'eusse 
vu votre pere. Qu' etalt-il Utile ? 
Que tu eusses ^rit avant de partir. 
Que 8emblait*ll? Qu^il eut 
peur <le venir id. Que sufSsait- 
117 Qu'elle eOt la lettre de sa mere. 
Que convenait-il de fidre? 
Que nous eussions attcndu. Qu' 
etalt-il a propoa? Que vou£ 
cussicz payd. Que fallait-il? 
Qu'ils eussent rdpondu. Que fal- 
lait^il ? Qu'elles eussent prcvcuu 
leurs parents. 



88 



FfiENCH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 2. 
INDEFIIOTE ABTICLE, AND PREPOSITIONS TO, AT, OP, AND FROBL 



niT, (a or an) 

Before a noon xnasca' 
line fiingular. 



en&nt, 
jour, 

salon, 

dolgt,* 

gant, 

nez, 

coHf 

flront, 

marl, 

aoir, 

membre, 

champ. 



day. 

coimtiy. 

parlour. 

finger. 

glove. 

nose. 

neck. 

forehead 

husband 

evening. 

Hmb. 

field. 



ly (a or an) 



Before a noun feminine 
singular. 



•Pronoiizioe dmu 



bete,t 

claaae, 

penaion, 

ecole, 

promenade, 

chambre, 

tante, 

conalne, 

montre, 

vffle, 

soiree, 

lettre, 

▼olx. 



beasty 

class. 

schooL 

schooL 

walk.' 

room. 

aunt 

cousin. 

watch. 

town. 

evening. 

letter. 

voice. 



A| (to or at) 

Cardinal numbers. 



t The first syllable Ib long. 



deux, t 

trols, 

qoatre, 

ciiiiq,^ 

8lx,t 

sept,§ 

hiiit,S 

neui^l 

dix,t 

onze,T 

donze, 

trelze. 



one. 

two. 

three. 

four. 

five. 

six. 

seven. 



nme. 

ten. 

eleven. 

twelve. 

thirteen. 



l| (of or fiom) 
Ordinal numbers. 



le premier-e 

seconddnodteM 

trolsleme, 

qnateleme, 

clnqnleme, 

sizleme, 

septieme, 

hnltieme, 

neuTieme, 

dlzieme. 



t When alone, deuz is pro- 
nounced de; aii^ pronoonoe 

■e ; dix« pronoance dine; 
before a vowel, or h silent, 
pronoance the z as a x; be- 
fore a consonant, or h aspi- 
rated, prondnnce dey wU dL 

§ When alone, cinq is pro- 
nounced dnqne 9 septf pro- 
nounced ceite ; hnltf pro- 
nounced hnite; before a 
yowel, or h silent, pronounce 
the same ; before a consonant, 



donzleme, 
trelzieme. 



first 
second, 
third, 
fourth- 
fifth, 
sixth, 
seventh, 
eighth. 

tenth, 
eleventh 
twelfth, 
thirteenth 



or h aspirated^ pronounce 
diif flOf vL 

il Sound the f when this 
word is alone. This f has the 
sound of v» before a vowel 
or a silent li. If eofi sounds 
before a consonant or h 
aspirated. 

^ The word OBse does not 
take the elision of the article : 
le ouMf dnonseiMiann, 
henrvs* 



BDWABD OHUBCH's SrSTEM. 



89 



OF THE INDEFINITE ABTICLE A OB AN. UN, UNE. 



Bulk. — It is called indefinite artide in Englisii; in French there is hat one artide; the 
definite. Dhj une^ are adjectives, the first masculme and the second feminine. 

In English, a is put after the pronoun, which expresses admiration. What a fine tree I hut in 
French the tut is omitted : Quel M arbrel 



VOCABULABY. 



Jen'almepas, 

qui plenrey 

■ouvent, 

fiyrt,* 

agreable, 

c'estf 

bean, 

■e pramciicrf 

fodleMllelieto 
[sloiif 
qaeHeJoUe pen- 
petit, petite, 
c'eftmiedaiBe, 



[or love. 
Ido not like, 

who cries. 

often. 

very. 

agreeable. 

it is. 

fine. 

[walk. 
one's self, to 

magnificent. 

[beast 
what a fine 

[sdiooL 
whatapretty 

Httle. 

it is a dass. 









de demolflelleSi 
Je le penee, t 
la baa, 

iiya, 

degarQona, 

a'almez-veas 

eat-ce? 

yUaln-e, 

pourqooifldie? 

qa'yapt-U? 

noOf 

oul. 



[dii 
of young Isr 

I it think. 

yonder. 

there is. 

of boys. 

love you not. 

is it? 

ugly. 

[d6? 
for what to 

what is there 

na 

yes. 



iJelipmm. The word & beini; 
the objectire coae, is plaofed before 
thererb. 



DICTiSE No. 1. 
FROM THE TABLE Ka S. Faob 38. 
Je n*aime pas un enfiuit qui 
plenre souvent Cost nn paya 
fort agr^ble. Cest un beau Jour 
pour se promener. C'estun aaion 
magnifique. Quelle belle bete ! 
Quelle jolie penaion! Quelle 
charmante petite claaae! Cest 
une claaae de demoiselles? Je 
le pense. lA bas il y a une ecole 
de gardens. 



QUESTIONS. 

Que n'a]iiie2S-y 6iia paa ? Un 
enfant qui pleure souvent. BSat-ce 

ft Jcdi pajra ? Oui fortagr^able. 
EatK)e un vHaln jour? Non 
c'est un bean jour. Pour quoi 
fidre ? Pour se promener. Eat- 
ceunbeauaalon? Magnifique. 
Eat*oe une Jolie bete? Tr^ 
belle. Eat-ceune Jolie penaion? 
Oui tres jolie. Comment eat la 
claaae? Charmante. Eat-ce 
une claaae dedemoiaeUea? Je 
le pense. Qu' J apt*U £a baa 7 
Une ^oole de gar9on8. 



40 


FRBNOH BPOKXK. || 


OF THE INDEP] 

Bulb.— ^ or on, is not ez 
is not restricted bj a particalai 

Being restricted it takes un or 


[NITE ABTICLE A 


OB AN, UN, UNE. 11 


pressed in French after the verb to b$ {Stre), when the snboiaiitiye 
'idea: — Je su£s soldatf 

I am a soldier, 
tme: — JenMunioldat nudheureMX. 

I am a soldier unhappy or unfortunate. 


VOCABULABY. 


DICTEE No. 2. 










pas, (subst) 


Step. 


ete, attelntea, 


been, struck, 
[dreadful 


FROM THE TABLE No. S. Faob 38. 


compte, (p. p.) 


counted. 


afiteux-ae, t 


firightful, 


Apr^ avoir compt^ on, deoz, 


Jetlre, 


Ifire. 


Jonmee, (f.) 


day. 

r3 o 


trola, qoatre pas; je tire: Le 


ftat, 
bleaae,* 


was. 
wounded. 


qaafldtes-voiifl? 
et cette. 


[do? 
what do you 

and this. 


premier, f ut bleaae an nez ; le 
aeco]id,au doigt; le trolaieme, 
au coa ; le qoatrleme au firont 


an, 


to the. 


■nrntfa^uppftn*! 


now. 


Quel malheur! Une taate, one 


malhenr, 

preaqae, 

vie, 

car, 

ellea 


almost 
life, 
for. 
they, (f.) 


Uaez, (imp.) 

apreaent, 

tradnlaez, 

yapt-U, 

deperaonnea, 


read. 

at present 
translate, 
is there, 
of persons. 


COOalne presque sans vie ; car dies 
aussi, ont it6 a^intes. Quelle af- 
freuse journal 


QUESTIONS. 

Aprea ayolr compte qaol ? 

Un, deux, troisi quatre pas. Qae 


auaal, Qnt, 
prononcer 

♦ Pronoimodtheti 

t In the adjectire 

cfaAngcd into te to for 


also^ have. 

to pronounce 

vonvcry harsh. 
affreux, the x is 
m the feminine. 


parlez nn pea. 


speak alitde 
distinctly. 


fidtea-Tooa? Jetire. Le pre- 
mier fM bleaae oa ? Aa nez. 
Etleaeeond? Andoict Etle 


trolaieme 7 Au cou. Et le qnatrleme ? Au front Qui 
eat preaqae aana vie 7 TTne tante, une couone. 


TUTOB. 






Maintenant Uaez cette dlctee en Franfiala ; a prMent 






tradolaez. Ckimblen y apt-il de peraonnea bleaaeea? 






parlez on pea plaa'haat, et prononcez dlatlnctement. 



EDWABD OHUBOH'S SYSTEM. 



41 



OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE A, AN. UN, UNE. 



When the Terb to be (iire) is preceded bj the demonstratiYe ee^tmixt tme is always pat beforo 
the sttbstantiTe : 

O'ett un malheur. O^ett une horme idle. 0*est un$ heOe promenade. 
It is a misfortime* It is a good idea. It is a fine walk. 



VOCABULARY. 



payesB-Tons 7 

Jepaie, 

piastre, 

demie,* 

cheive, 

trop, 

Jecrolfl, 

c'estassez, 

esi-II, 

qaart, 

robe, 

etoiflfe, 

payef 



[you pay? 
pay you ? do 

I pay. 

doQaxv 

ha]£ 

dear. 

[too many, 
too^toomndi 

I believe. 

it is enough. 

is he, is it 

quarter. 

dress. 



paid. 



• When JMsiB placed aftertlie 
sobstinthe, it agrees with it ia gen- 
der. When placed before the sab- 
stantrre it does not agree: unepiaaire 
etdame;imeknn€laemi$;vti€dem' 
^kutn; aae dad-hatn. ^e ad- 
jeetbe mi fdlom the same nde. 
i^fi»4A^ fA»«iie— baxe-headed. 

t 2? bemg placed before a Tetb, 11 



I See page 867. 



I'aime, 

Jene sals pas, 
■aivant, (a4].) 

ra,t 

donnee, | 

comptez(mip.) 

Jnaqa'a, 

dltea, (imp^r.) 

nombre-a, 

ordlml-aiiz^ 

cardDiuI-aiiZi 

qae vent dire, 

•nbatantifra, 



theelL 

[know. 
I do not 

following. 

it has. 

given. 

count 

[as. 
until, as far 

say, telL 

number. 

ordinal 

cardinal. 

what means. 

substantive. 



DICTiiE No. 8. 

FROM THE TABLE Na 2. Pagb 88. 

C*est une jolie Tille. Combien 
payez-vous par semaine poor votre 
pension et votre chambre? Je 
paie cinq piastres et demie ; eslrce 
cher ? Pas trop, mais je crois que 
c'est assez. Quelle heure est-fl? 
Six heures et un quart Quelle 
jolie robe vous avezl Cest une 
^toffe Fran9aise. Combien avez-vous 
pay^ Taune ? Je ne sais pas, c^est 
mon fir^ qui mel'a donn^ 



TUTOR. 
Comptez depnia tm, juaqa' 
a donze; ditea lea nombrea 
ordiiiaiix depnia le premier 
Jiiaqa' an dotudeine, que yent dire watoh! Que vent 
dire Trice! Que yent dire letter! Tradniaez en Fran- 
Qala lea anbatantUb aniyanta: an enning, (f.) a hubaDd, an 
eTening, (m.) a Umb, a field* Ck>nunent tradniaez-yona lea 
prepoaitiona of, fhmii to, at, en Fran^aia. 



42 



TBBNOH BFOKXN. 



TABLE No. S. 



SOME, OF THE, FROM THE. 



DU. 

Before a noun mas. sin., 
beginning with a conso- 
nant or h aspirated. 



veni;* 
▼Isage, 
▼olfliii, t 
paytan, 

caractere, 

polBBon, X 

poi80D,§ 

rhmnei 

bUlet, 

canU; 

Monsieur, 

monde, 



widower. 

face. 

neigfabonr 

peasant. 

mill. 

temper. 

fish. 

poison. , 

cold. 

billet 

penknife. 
[muL 
gentle- 

[people. 
world, 



♦ Sound the/ 
t Sound the #88 soft as a & 
i Fh>noimce the m very 
hanh. 
j The f is pronounoed Tery 



Before a noun feminine 
singular. 



▼euTe, 

flgurei 

▼olfline, 

paysanne 

JeuneMey 

TertOf 

plante, 

joumee, 

campagne, 

•alle, 

bouche, 
tete,| 



widow. 

face. 

nei^^iboiir 

peasant 

youths 

virtue. 

plant 

daj. 

oountry. 

halL 

hand. 

mouth. 

head. 



In fete the first syllable 
is long. 



DBI.'. 

Before a noun feminine 
or masculine, beginning 
with a vowel or A mute. 



arbre, (m.) 
(bU, (m.) T 
etraiiger(m) 
etoUe, (f.) 
egUae, (f.) 
autear, (m.) 
amertomO} (f*) 
incoiimi(nL) 
olaeau, (m.) 
air, (m.) 
ete, (m.) 
humeiir, (f.) 
aimee, (f.) 



tree. 

eye. 

stranger. 

star. 

church. 

author. 



unknown. 

bird. 

air. 

summer 
[humor, 
temper, 

year. 



T ^ pronounce ya^jgwr. 



Before any noun in the 
pluraL 



cheyeu-z,* 
yenz^ (m.) 
morceaiiZiCm) 
oiaeaaz, (m.) 
ndfl8eaia[,(m) 
bateaux, (m.) 
▼al88eaiiz(m) 
emaus^ (m.) 
soiipiiaiiz,(m) 
coraus^ (m.) 
bala, (m.) 

(BQfil, (m.) 

bopqfli, (m.) 



hair. 

eyes. 

pieces. 

birds. 

brooks. 

boats. 

vessels. 

enamels 

air-holes 

corals. 

balls. 



oxen. 



^ PjTonounoe ehurour. 



EDWARD church's STSTEM. 



43 



CONTRACTION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, WITH THE FBEFOSITION OF OB XSOM. 



Bulb.— ^Ze, fe«y cannot bave the preposition de^ ofy before them.*; DelojdeV^ can have it. 
Then dele, of the, make <ltf in the singular ; deles^ of the, make des in the pluraL : 

. Je pas/ie du Uvr€j det Iwres^ de la fernmey de ramie, de Vhomme. 
I speak of the bool^ of the books, of the woman, of the friend, of the man. 



VOCABULARY. 



dont, de qui, 

Jeparle, 

Yoaflparlez, 

liagaTds, 

▼if-TiTe, 

gal-e, 

Uplenre, 

prea^aiqires, t 

aa contralre, 

ftait, 

endrolt, 

leplufly 

triflte, 



of whom. 
I speak, 
joa speak, 
fierce, 
quick, 
merry, gay. 
he weeps. 

near. 

[trary. 
on the con- 

[from, 
runs . away 

place. 

most. 

sad. 



Inflnitif;, 

[present 
participe 

paiticipe passe, 

Indlca. piBsea^ 

Imparfait, 

pietMltdeftDL 

ftatur. 

condltlonnel, 

tanperatijQ 

nillJeiiCi pEBsent 
[•ubj. 
imparfidt du 
[plnriel, 
•InguUer, 



plenre-t-ll? 



^ When £e, Ief» are pronouns in- 

I stead of artideai the prepontkm may 

precede them : Jt pane de le faire 

voir. Le means M: I speak d 

Atm to make come. 

t /Vbgiveaanlde&ofprozimitf; 
axpi^ If naed for assidni^ : jon are 
nearfprb^ the tablej jroo are happy 
near (fliq'rdi^ your 



infinitive. 

[ticiple. 

present par- 

[ciple. 

past paili- 

[present. 

indicative 

imperfect 

[finite. 
pretent de- 
future. 
oonditionaL 

imperative. 

[present. 

subjunctive 

[the subj. 

imperfect of 

[ral. 

smgalar,plu- 

cries he? 



DICTjfeE No. 1. 
FROM THE TABLE Ka 8. Paob 4S. 

La flgore du yenf dont je 
parle est plus triste que le Tisage 
de la TeUTe de qui vous parlez. 
II a lea yeux ^agards; die a 
I'ceil vif et gai. H pleure chaque 
jour pres de I'arbre oh vous Tayez 
vu ; elle, au contraire, fuit cet en- 
droit 



QUESTIONS. 
Qui a. le visage le plus 
triate? Le veuf. Qui a lee 
yeux Regards 7 Leveu£ Com- 
ment eat I'cBll de la veuTe? 
Vif et gai. Qui pleure chaque 
Jour? Leveuf. Ou pleure-4- 
il chaque jour ? Pres de Taibre 



oh vous Tavez vu. Qui fkiit cet endroit 7 La veuve. 



TUTOJl. 
Quel8soiitleaJounidelaaemaliie7 Gommoitdites- 
JTous: Will yim! IniTe 70a! Traduiaez en Frangaias an 
7oafliemoaMflro(tkNdiildnB! Que yeut dire premiere per- 
aonne du aingulier 7 Seconde peraonne du pluriel7 



u 



FBEKCH SPOKEN. 



CONTRACTION OF THE DBKOTTB ARTICLB, WITH THE PREPOSITION OP OR F&OBS. 



Bulb— i>i«,&fa, €fer,cfe,mean ofthejJr(mth€,md the partitive jome, expressed or understood: 
Du painy de la reconnaui 
Some bread, some gratitude, 



^. ?^h *_^ recannausance, de VamiHe, des tcdenU, jai des Jieurs. 

some friendship, some talents, I have some flowers. 



VOCABULARY. 



Toici, 
berger-e, 
promonoz-voiiSf 
loin, 
prairie, 
dejenner, * 
noiiB aTong, 
gateaux, [ 
pochesi 
lea, t 
flUe, 
yiennexit. 



[behold, 
there is, 

shepherd. 

walk, (imp.) 

far* 

meadow. 

breakfast. 

we have* 

cakes. 

pockets. 

them. 

girL 

come. 



* Dfjeuner is written the same, 
whether verb or siibstantiye. 

t Let means them ivten connected 
with a rerb ; it means the connected 
with a sobstantiTe. 

t Svr, without a drcnmflex accent, 
is a preposition; it means on, ttpcn, 
SAr (m.), sAre (fern.), are adjectiyes, 
and moan siau 



nommez-voiUf 
repas, 
repondent, 
leur, 

alle2S-Toiu, 
qnevovlez-voiu 
que dltefl-voiU| 
que Usec-voiUi 
aur, anr-e, t 
qael tempa, 
fidt-U 
maintenant, 



nameyoa 
repast, meal, 
answer, 
to them. 

go you. 

[you? 
what wish 

[you? 
what say 

[you? 
what read 

[sure, 
on, upon, 

[ther. 
what wea- 

makesit 

now. 



DICXilE No. 2. 
FROM THE TABLE No. «. Pack 42. 

Voici dea cheTeux de tons 
mes enfans. Voici des fruits dn 
▼olain, et desfleurs de la Toi* 
aine* VoidhimaisondiipayaazL 
Voici les chevauix de I'etranger. 
Void Fetoile du berger. Enfans 
promenez-vous lorn dea ruiaae- 
auz de la prairie. Avez-vous d^ | 
jeun^ ? Nous avons dea inoiv | 
ceauz de g^Ueaux dans nos poches. 
Qui vous les a donnas ? La petite 
fille de la payaanne. 



QUESTIONS. 
QaeUe eat la premiere 
phraae de cette dictee ? DV>a 
▼lennent lea flmita? Et lea 
Ifleura ? Voici la maiaon de 



qui 7 Void lea chevaux de qui ? Comment nommez- 
vona cette etoile? Enfiuia promenez-vona loin de 
qool? Ayez-^onafidtqaelrepaa? Que repondent lea 
enfima ? Qui leu* a donne cea morceanx de gateaux 7 



^ TUTOR. 
OnaHezTona7 QaeToi]le2S-Tona7 Que ditea-Tona ? 
Que liae2B-Toua7 Yfr-t-ll dea fruita aur lea arbrea? 
IQuel tempa fldt*il maintenant 7 



EDWARD CHUBCH'B SYSTEM. 
CONTBACTION 01* THE DEFINITE ABTICLE, WITH THE FBBPOSITION OF OB 



45 
(Bfi). 



Rule. — When the pardtive duy dei^ is followed by an fi^jective, it only takes the prepositioxK 
de ;' the article Uj /ef,is not expressed : 

Ikmnez^nun de ban pain, Avez-vous de heOee Jhunl J*ai d^excdUntes eanfituree. 
Gire me sQme good bread. Have jou some fine flowers ? I have some excellent sweatmeats. 



VOCABULARY. 



chez molf 

ilya, 

rnDles, 

papier, 

yf* 

IMiurtractioii, 

celni-ol, 

recompensef 
[rona? 
que penaez- 

Jepense, 

qu'Q a, 

detestable, 

uuvragea, 



at home. 

[are. 
there iS| or 

miles. 

paper. 

thane. 

[tion. 
the instruo- 

thlsone. 

reward. 

[your 
what think 

I think. 

that he has. 

hatefiiL 

works. 



* When y means to it, it i9 a pro- 
noan : J'jfpente; I to it think. 

t The t cannot be translated, it is 
plared between the two vowels for 
the sake of caphony. 



canatAmment 
Immeurf 
qa'aTez-Tona? 
chez Tona, 
diatance, 
ya^t-iljt 
y vapt-on, 
ecrita, 

intltnlea, (m.) 
toujonra, (ad.) 
almable, (adj.) 
complaiaante 
aUer. 



constantly. 

humour. 

[you? 
what have 

[home, 
at your 

distance. 

[there, 
is there, are 

[they! 
there go 

written. 

titles. 

always. 

amiable. 

complaisant 

to go. 



DICXtB No. 8. 
FROM THE TABLE Na 8. Faq« 42. 

J'ai de beaux olaeaux chez 
moi. De I'egliae k la pension il 
y a deux milles ; et du moulin it 
papier combien y a-t-il? Trois 
milles. II y a de JoUa bateaux 
pour y aller. Quel est ce livre ? 
L'instruction de la Jetmeaae ; et 
celui-ci? La recompense de la 
Tertu. Que pensez-vous de Mon- 
sieur B. Tauteur de ces onvrages ? 
Je pense qu'il a un caractere de- 
testable, il est oonstamment de man- 
vaise humeur. 



QUESTIONS. 
Qu' avez-Toua chez voua? 
Qaelle est la distance de 
I'egliae^a lapenalon? Combien y a-t-il de miUes de la 
pension an monlin a papier 7 CTomment y va^t-on ? 
Ck>mbien y a^i^il de livrea ecrita par M. B. ? Quels 
en sont les intitules 7 Quel est le caractere de I'auteur 
de ces onvrages? Est-il toujours gai, aimable, com- 
plaisant 7 



46 



FBENCH SPOKEN. 



CONTRACTION 07 THE DEFINITB ABTIGLB, WITH THE PBEFOSmON OF (DB). 



The French do not express the article before a common noon, when it is governed bj a coUectiYe 
noun or an adverb of quantitj : 

Une multitude d*ofy'ets Jurent vendus. Beaucom de tnonde y itaU. 

When the common noun is restricted bv any particular idea, the article is expressed. 

Dhe multitude dee objete en tvotre. JoecnUooup du mande que vaue aviez chez votc#. 



VOCABULARY. 



non, 

7 avait-il, 

oni, 

abord 

grand-e, 

qaantitef 

pourquol, 

tant, 

ce Bont, 

utUe, 

gueriaon, 

nne multitudei 

maladies, 



no. 

there had it 

yes. 

onboard. 

great. 

quantity. 

why. 

so many.' 

these are. 

usefuL 

cure, healing 
[great many, 
a multitude, 

diseases. 



* This past participle being pre- 
ceded bj its nominative maOSunux^ 
it agrees in number with it See 
page 257. 



demande, 

ilya, 

malhenreuz-ie, 
echappea, * 
anx flammea, 
Tillage, 
voiain, (adj.) 
loraqa'on, 

•If 

on a pria, 

qaerepond-oa? 

qn'yavalMl? 



ask. 

[there is. 
there are, 

unhappy. 

escaped. 

[flames, 
from the 

village. 

neighboring, 
[when one. 
when people 
[or yes. 
if, whether, 
[taken, 
one has 

[swers one. 
what an- 

[hadit 
what there 



DICTi:E No. 4. 
FROM THE TABLE No. 8. Paob 42. 
Avez-vous pris beauooup de 
poiaaona? Non. Y avait-il 
beaucottp de vaiaaeauz 7 Ooi. 
H y avait k bord une grande quan* 
tit^ d'emaiiz^ et de poiaona. 
Pourquoi tant de poiaona 7 Ce 
sont dea poiaona utiles pour la 
gu^xisou dea maladiea. Une 
multitude d'lncomma vous de- 
mandent H y a beauooup dea mal- 
heurenz ^chapp^ aux flammes. 
n y a une grande quantity d'en- 
fana! Ce sont dea enfima du 
village voisin. 



QUESTIONS. 
Lorsqa'on demande ai on 
a pria beaucoup de poissona, qae repond-on 7 Lora- 
que I'on demande a'il y avail beaucoup de vaiaaeaux, 
que reix>nd-on 7 Qu' y avait-il abord des yaiaaeaux 7 
Que repond-on a la question, pourquoi tant de poi- 
aona 7 Qui Toua demande 7 Qui a echappe aux 
flammes 7 U y a une grande quantite de quoi7 D'ou 
aontceaenfiaia7 



EDWARD CHUROH'S STSTEH. 



47 



CONTRACTION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE^ WITH THE PBEPOSITION OF (DK* 



Bulb. — The French say with die ardde ; and the English without : 

La filupaH des hommes ; lien d^pays. 
Most part of men} many countrieB* 



VOCABULARY. 



dangerenx-se, 

fiiute de, 

prodenoCf 

soixiSy 

rare, 

passees, * 

inuUlexneiit, 

ilyaTBit, 

aes paroles, 

c'eat vral, 

jiyalremarqiiei 

ondity 

dentelles, 



dangerous. 

for want of. 

prudence. 

cares. 

scarce, rare, 

passed. 

uselessly. 

there had. 

his words. 

it is true. 

[noticed. 
I there have 

they say. 

lace. 



• See page 257. 

t The d alwHjrs Mrands like a t 

before a YoweL Jnrononnce r€ponton. 



alacampagne 

Yoxm Toyez, 

■ortent, 

soupiraiiz^ 

Get olaeau, 

nocturne, 

8ont-il0, 

sorte, 

qa'y avait-il 7 

oudit-on? 

repond-on?t 



[try. 
to the ooun- 

you see. 

go out. 

air-holes. 

this bird. 

nocturnal. 

are they. 

kind. 

[had it? 
what there 

[they? 
where say 

answerthey? 



DICT^E No. 5. 
FROM THE TABLE Na 3. Paqb 42. 

La plnpart des rhnmes sont 
dangereuz faute de pmdence et 
de soins. J*ai beaucoup de plantea 
rares; Bien des jonniees sont 
pass^es inutilement H y avait bien 
de ramertume dans ses paroles ; 
c'cst vrai j'y ai remarqud beau- 

coop d'amertnme. On dit que 
la plupart des dentelles sont 
faites k la campagne. La plupart 
des olseanx que tous voyez sor- 
tent de ces soupiraux. Quel est cet 
oiseau ? C'est I'oiseau noctui^ie. 



QUESTIONS. 
Pourqaoi la plupart des 
rhumes sont-ils dangereuz ? 
Quelles sortes de plantes avez-vous 7 Comment bien 
desjoumees sont-ellespassees? Qu^yavait^il dans ses 
paroles ? Ou dit-on que la plupart des dentelles sont 
faites 7 l)'ou sortent les oiseaux que tous Toyez 7 
Lorsque tous demandez quelle est cette sorte d'oi- 
seau, que tous repond-on 7 



148 



FRBNCn SPOKEN. 



CONTHACTION OF THE DEFIN ITE ARTICLE, WITH TH E PREPOSITION OP (DX8). 

Rule.— Tho French do not express the article before a common noon when it is governed by a transitive verb, 
connected with a negative : 

Jene feraipas de plmntes, Jene donne pasd'avis, 

I shall not make any complaints. I do not give any advice. 

Bat if the common noon be followed by an adjective, or a reUtive prononn, which deteiHunes its signification, the artide 
is expressed : • 

Jene feraipas da phinie8exag&^e$. Je ne donne pas dea ami qu^on ne puiue ndtfre. 

^ I shall not make extravagant complaints. I do not give advices Aat one cannot follow. 



VOCABULARY. 



pierreries, 
ezcepte (prep.) 
donnez-TouB? 
je n'ai pas, 
ITiiver, 
n'ecrivez pas. 
yoQM prenez, 
lemiexi? 
levoyez-vons? 
fidtes-Inl slgne* 
Je ne veuz pas, 
luifalre, 
reprochesy 



[stones, 
precious 

except. 

give you ? 

I have not. 

the winter. 

write not. 

you take. 

mine. 

him see you? 
[sign, 
make him a 

I will not. 

[or do. 
to him to make 

reproaches, 



* Lui means to him, or to her. 

t L\ iKjin^ before tlie verb to have, 
means him, her, or it 
I X L\ being connected with the 
sabstantive summer, means the. 

§ The t is there only for euphony, 
it cannot be translated. 

I 



inutile, 

quel air txiste ! 

Ua, 

Jenel'aipaBYiit 

ainsi, 

I'ete,} 

[mande, 
on Tons de- 

salle a manger, 

qu'est-ceqai? 

seraient, 

apt-il?§ 

si I'on Toit, 

qaelqa'on, 



useless. 

what air sad! 

he has. 
[have seen. 
I not him 

thus. 

the summer. 

they you ask 

dining-room, 
[that? 
what is this 



would be. 
has he? 
if one sees, 
somebody. 



DICXilE No. 6. 
FBOM THE TABLE Ko. 8. Faob 42. 
Quelles pierreries avez-vous ? ; 
Toutes sortes, except^ des coraaz 
Donnez-vous des ball? Je n'ai 
pas donn^ de bala depuis lliiver 
dernier. N'^crivez pas de billets. 
Vous n'avez done pas de canii^ 
que vous prenez le mien? Le voyez- 
vous de la saUe 7 Oui. Faites-lui 
signe de la main. Non. Je no 
veux pas lui ffure de reproches. 
Ce seraient dea reproches in- 
utiles. Quel air triste il a. Je ne Fai 
pas vu ainsi de I'^t^. 



QUESTIONS. 
Lorsqu'on Tona demande 
qaellea aont lea pierreries 
qae vona avez, qae dites- 
vons 7 Loraqu'oifi Tona demande ai Tons donnez des 
bals que repondez-vona 7 N'ecrivez pas qaoi 7 Vons 
n'avez done pas qaoi 7 Que repond-on lorsqu'on 
demande si I'on voit qnelqn'un de la salle a manger 7 
Je ne veuz pas Ini faire quoi 7 Qu'est-ce qui seraient 
inutiles 7 Qnel air a-t-il 7 Depnis qoand ne I'aTez-Tons 
yuainsi7 



XDWABD GHUBCH'S SYSTEM. 

1 . 



49 1 



Hetaptmlatton of all tl)e JpreceMng Hules. 



VOCABULABY. 



Doe, 


Duke. 


lemieox^ 


the best. 


Xemonnii 


Nemonn. 


malhenr^ 


misfortone. 


prince, 


prince. 


bon, bonne. 


good. 


dnnnff. 


of the blood. 


ui^ 


Idea. 


It* 


king. 




gntitade. 


Aance, 


F»noe. 

dunrmniy. 

how mnch, 


▼endn, 
iTOive, 


sold, 
ivofy. 


botaeao. 


busheL 


•yiM, 


had. 


Uwte^it) 


pound. 


plalBte% 


comph&ints. 


aime. 


elL 


•'^r , 


advice. 


"^ [yaiUo, 


month, 
the mora 


ezagere* 


exaggerated 
that one. 


■oldat, 


soldier. 


nepntoe, 


cannot. 


olgetB, 


objectB. 


ooivre, 


follow. 


fiDrant, 


wera. 


paroemaiDe, 


by week. 


tont,(m.) 


all. 




takeyoa? 


teM,(in.p.) 


all. 


hearonx^ 


happy. 


iOIKto,(f.) 


aD. 


^nlKjwiwaw^^ 


nubappy. 


tomes, (f. p.) 


alL 


lifui^y, belleNi 


fine. 


ce%(p.2g.) 


these. 


«alent% 


talents. 


daoBMh 


kdies. 




give me. 


le^lo^ 


the more. 


chesTono, 


at yonr 


leiBflini, 


the less. 


JenefiMmlpas, 


I shall not 



BEMABE OJSl THE BULE PAGE 24. 

X«, iOfUiMn employed before the adverbs ; UphUf U moins^ 
le mimtXj to express a comparison. J)€ tautes^ Iss pensiantuUres 
majaU eti la fUu inttnatg. In this case the article agrees in 
ffBoder and number with the substantive to which it refers; 
but is never changes when employed to express a quality in the 
highest degree, without an. idea of comparison ; and when it 
refers to a verb or an adverb : eettc demoisdU n§ at plaint pas 
fuoi gu*§Ue wufff U phu. 



DICTEfe No. 7- 

FBOM TABLES Kos. 1, 2, & 3. Fao£S 18,38, 42. 
PAoa. ^ 

18 lie Uvre, la leeoo, l^miep lee chateaux. 

19 Xi^irgentyl'espritf l^ommef IThoniieiir. 

20 lie pere, la mere, lee Irexes ot lee eceiinb 

21 lie Doc de Nemoaro, prince dn sang, file dn 

roi de France. 

22 Oombien le boiasean ? Oombien la livre ? 

OomblenlViaDe? Combien par aemaine ? 
Oombien proneB^vooo de lecons par 
mois? Trois par semaine. 

23 Plos cm traTraille ploa cm est henieoz. Fins 

on Tons connalt plus cm vons aime. 

24 Be tootee ces dames Totro soenr etait la 

plosjoUe. 

38 Uh enfimt, aneclswse (a) <de) 1, 2, 3« etc 
42 On Twa^ de la Tonve, de I'arbre, dee cho- 



39 QnelbelarbreX QnelleJoUe pension X 

M Jo snis soldat. Je sois nn soldat maU 
benxenz. 

41 Cest nn malhenr. C^est nne bonne idoe. 

CTost nne belle promenade* 
43 Je parle dn livre, deslivres, de la fomme, 

de l^amiOf de 11iomme« 

4A Bn pain, de la reriwinaissance, de IVunitie 

des talents, j'ai des fienrs. 
49 Donnes-moi de bcm pain. Aven-^vons de 

belles fienrs. 

46 Vne multitude d'otjets Ibrent wendns. 

Beancocipde monde y etait. Vne midtic 
tnde des oljots en ivoire. Seaooonp dn 
monde que Tons avioz chex voos. 

47 Zia plnpart des bommes. Bien des pays. 

40 Jo ne f erai pas de plaintes. Jo no donne 

pas d'avis. Jo ne feral pas des plaintes 

eza^erees. Je no donne pas des avis 
qn'on ne pnisse snivre. 



€ruilie 



TO THB 

CONJUGATION OF THE VEEB TO BE. 



tTRE. 



52 



FBENOH SPOKEN. 



AffirmativemenL 

Je suifl, 

tu es, 

il, elle est, 

D0U8 somines, 

Yous SteSy 

Us, eiies mmli 



NegaHvement. 

Je ne suis pas. 
Tu n' es pas. 
H, elle n' est pas. 
nooB ne sommes pas. 
YOUS n' ^tes pcui. 
lis, elles ne sont pas. 



ItUerrogativement, 
suia-Je? 
es-ta? 
e8t-ll,elle? 
sommes-nons 7 
6tes-Tons7 
sont-ils,elles7 



Interrog, Sf NigaHvemenL 



ne suis-Je 
n' es-Tu 
n' estrily elle 
ne sommes-nouB 
n' etes-vous 
ne soni-ils 



pCM? 
pCM? 
pCM? 

pcui? 

pCM? 

pas? 



InJmiHf, 

etre. 

to be. 



Participe pres. 

etant. 

being. 



JkdicaJtif present. 



1 Je snis, 

2 tu es, 

3 il, elle est. 

1 nous sommes, 

2 YOUS dtes, 

3 lis, elles sont. 



I am, 
thou art, 
he, she is. 
we are, 
you are, 
they are. 



ImparfaiU 



IJ* ^tais, 

2tu £tais, 

3il,eUe, Malt. 

1 nous 4tions, 

2 YOUS ^tiezy 

3 ils, elles ^talent. 



I was, 
thou wast, 
he, she was. 
we were, 
you were, 
they were. 



1 Je 

2tu fiis, 

3 0, elle fiit. 

1 nous flimes, 

2 YOUS ffttes, 

3 ils, elles ftirent. 



Pretirit definu 
fllS, 



ISaur. 



1 Je serai, 
2tu seras, 
3 il, elle sera. 

1 nous serons, 

2 YOUS serez, 

3 ils, elles seront. 



lahallbe. 
a 



Partictpe passe, 

ete. 

been. 



1 Je 
2ta 
3 0, elle 

1 nous 

2 YOUS 

3 ils, eUes 



1. 
2. 
3* 
1. 
2. 
3. 



CandMohneL 

serais, 

serais, 

serait. 

serions, 

seriez, 

seraient. 

Ingpirdif, 
•sols. 



I should, oould, 
or would be. 



•soyons, 
•soyez, 



be. 

'Let us be, 
be. 



SubfancHf PrisenL 

1 que Je sols, 

2 que tu sois, 

3 qu'il,qu'eOe soit. 

1 que nous soyons, 

2 que YOUS sovez, 

3 qu'08,qu'eUes soient. 



I 



That I may be. 
a 



a 
u 



Imparfait, 

1 qneJe ftisse, 

2 que tu ftisses, 

3 qu' 0, qu' eUe fftt. 

1 que nous ftassions, 

2 qnoYona ftissiez, 

3 qu'ils,qu' elles ftissent. 



That I might 
be. 



BDWABD OHUBOH'S SYSTEM. 



OONJUOATIOK OF THE AUXnJABT YEBB TO BE, ibllE. * 



53 



HiBICAxAYJS FBSSEKIT. 



VOCABULARY. 



nestyral, 
cherperey 
leooBur 

d'lllly 

VClMl,(pp.) 

dans, 
dierifl, 
delamorty 
soiq;>ley 

OODUHOf 

depulsbieri 

arrhreefl, 

cematiii. 



it is trae. 

dear father. 

the heart 

of a. 

oome. (pp.) 

in. 

cherish. 

of the death, 
[humble, 
flexible, 

[day, 
since yester- 

arrived. 

this morning 



• Before all, it is neoessaiy to 
mftke the papQ pnmoanoe perfectly. 
Eitrt^ikxnt,H£, The teacher will also 
make a few phrase* with the present 
participle of to haeot^ connected with 
the past participle of fo ht\ Urns: 
AjtiaA0imaiadt,^Ui. With the pre- 
sent participle of to k: 0mA a 2b 
etc. 



rai«-Je7 
qui? 

quel, qneUey 
quandy 
es-ta? 
esUU, eDe 7 
? 



etes-Toiui? 
sont-ils? 
sont-elles 7 
distance. 



il? 
who^whom. 
'hat> which, 
when, 
art then? 
is he, she? 
are we? 
are yon? 
are ihey?onO 
are they? (C) 
distance. 



tN^mtiyely: J^ m siar pot tsi 
famL InterrogatiYely: Sas-Jeunm- 
fcoA. InterrogatiTely ana Nega 
tiyely: Ntmat-jtpaAvnEi^uiX^ 



DICTiSE No. 1. 
FBOM TO BE. Paob 69. 

Je sols nn enfiuit, il est viai, 
cher p&rei mais j'ai le coBur d'nn 
homme. Tu en yenu nn jonr de 
la semaine deniidre. II eat dajns 
on pays que je ch^ris. EUe eat 
dans tm aalon du chAteau. Nona 
aommea k on doigt de la mort 
Vona etea souple oomme nn 
gant. Ha aont ici depuis hier. 
Ellea aont aniv^ ce matin, f 



QUESTIONS. 
Qui ania-Je? Un 
Mala qoel corar ai-Je cher 
pere? Le ooour d'on homme. 
Qnand ea-ta vena? Un jour de 
la semaine demi^. On eat^il 7 
Dans un pays que je ch^ris. On 
eat-elle? Bans un salon du cha- 
teau. A qnelle diatance de la 
mortaonunea-nona? Aun doigt 
Comment etea-Tona aonple? 
Comme un gant Depnia qnand 
aont-llalcl7 Depuishier. Qnand 
aont-ellea anlTeea 7 Ce matin. 



54 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AITXILIABY YEBB TO BE, ^TTRE 



IMPEBFECT, 



VOCABULARY. 



dans la classe, 

a la pension, 

a I'ecole, 

Upromaoade, 

[cbambre, 

dans noire 

chezvotzetante 
conslne, 
Chez Totre 

dans la viUe, * 

hier solr, 

on etais-Je ? 

I onetals-tu? 

lonetait-il? 

onetalt-elle? 



in the class, 

at the school 

at the school 

at the walk. 

inoarchambre 
[aunt's 
at your 

[cousin's 
at jour 

in the town, 
[evening, 
yesterdaj 

wjierewasi? 
[thou? 
where wast 
[he* 
where was 

[she? 
where was 



on ettoDfl-noiis 7 
onetlez-vosfl? 



on 



ouetalent^llei? 



• En vUU, is often used. 



[we? 

where were 

[you? 

where were 

[they? 

etaienMls?|where were 

[they? 

where were 



ma, t (f. ^) 
ta, (f. B.) 
sa, (f. e.) 
noire, (2 g. s.) 
▼otre, (2 g. 8.) 
lenr, (2 g. s.) 
lenrs, (2g.p.) 



my. 

thy. 

his, her. 

our. 

your. 

thdr. 

their. 



DICTilE No. 2. 
PBOM: to be. Faox 52. 

JTeiaisdanslaclasse. Tneiais 
lit la pension. II eiait k F^cole. 
Elle eiait k la promenade. Nous I 
eiions dans notre chamhre. Vons 
eiiez chez votre tante. Us 
eiaieni chez votre cousine. EBes 
eiaieni dans la ville hier soir. 



t In English, the ponessiTe pio- 
nonn rofen to the perBon ifho pos- 
sesEOs: hU mxUr^ his mother, is said, 
speakine of the mother and sister of 
a mascmine penon. 

In French, the possessxre pronoim 
refers to the person or thmg pos- 
sessed: Thus, mother and sister 
must have as before them, thongh it 
is a masculine person who possesses. 



QUESTIONS. 

On etais-Je ? Dans k dasse. 

On etais-tu 7 A la pension. 

Oaeiait-U7 Ir^le. 

On eiait-elle 7 A la promenade. 

Onetions-nons7 Dans notre 
chambre. 

On etiez-TOns 7 Chez ma tante. 

On etaient-ils 7 Chez notre cou- 
sine. 

On eiaient-dles bier soir 7 
Dans la ville. 



EDWABD GHUBCn'S SYSTEM. 



55 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO -Bff— isTRE. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



VOCABULARY. 



le premieTi 
leaecand)* 

le troisleme, 
la quatiieniey 
les cinquieme 
et sixieinCy 
les deniien, 
les septieme, 
ethuiUeiiiey' 
les neiivieme, 
et diztomei 
▼olla. 



the first 

theseocmd. 

the second. 

the third. 

the fourth, 

the fifth. 

aiid sixth. 

the hist 

the seventh. 

and eighUi. 

the ninth. 

and tenth. 

behold, 
there is, or 



* Ia deuxiime is also used. 

Speaking of the dato, the SVeiich 
do not use the ordinal 'numbers: 
C^ett k deux, le troisj etc^ except the 
fbrtu of Ae month, for which tne or- 
dinal nnmber is like the English: 
(?€at aujowd^hm le premier du mois. 



I'ordre, 

denos, 

classes, 

qaefus-Je? 

que ftas-ta? 

qaefiit-a? 

qaefat-elle? 

goefluiiM-iioiu? 

qiie ffiteB-vons 

qaefkmiiMls? 

qaefliraiitrelles? 



the order. 

of our. 

classes, 

what was I ? 
thou? 
what wast 

[he? 
what was 

[she 
wha^was 

[we? 

what.we]:e 

[you 

what were 

[they 

what were 

[they? 
whai were 



t Voilh is always used for what 
precedes; and tmct for what follows. 



DICT^E No. 3. 

FROM TO BE. Faox 52. 

Je ftas le premier. Tu tOB le 
second de ta dasse. II fiat le troi- 
si^me. EUe Alt la quatrieme. 
Nous fiimes les cinquieme et 
sixi^me. VOUS fiates les demiers. 
lis fiirent les septieme et hui- 
ti^me. Elles fiirent les neu- 
▼ieme et dixi^me. Yoilk I'ordre de 
nos classes.! 



QUESTIONS. 
Que flis-je ? Le premier. 

C^e fiis-tn? Le second de ta 

classe. 

Que fllt-il 7 Le troisi^me. 
Que fllt-elle ? La quatrieme. 

Que fiimes-noiis ? Les dn- 

quieme et sixieme. 
Que flltes-TOUS ? Les demiers. 
Que ftirent-ils 7 Les septieme et 

huiti^me. 
Que fiirent-elles7 Les neu- 

vicme et dixifeme. 



56 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO BE, ^TRE. 



PBEISfirr INDEFINITE. 



VOCABULARY. 



a Paris, 

enAxigleterre 

en Italle, 

enAllemagne 

tons absents, 

malade, 

bien portant, 

passer, 

les vacances, 

chez, 

qui demenre, 

avlngtiiiilles, 

diet, 



Paris, 
toy or at 

in England. 

in Italy. 

inOermanj. 

all absent 

sick. 

well (Inbeiafh.) 

[pass. 
to spend, to 

the vacation, 
[of. 
at the home 
[dwells, 
who lives, 

[miles, 
at twenty 

hence. 



tout (e), 

tons, 

tontes, 

oa ai-je ete ? 

ouas-tuete? 

on &-t-il ete 7 

oaa-t-elleete? 

^ ete? 

oa avons-noiu 

vonsete? 
comment avez- 

Us ete? 
comment ont- 

oaon^eIle8ete? 



alL 



[I been ? 
where have 
[thou been ? 
where hast 

[been? 

where has he 

[she been ? 

where has 

[we been ? 
where have 

[you been ? 
how have 



[they 
how have 
[th^ybeen? 
where have 



DICTjfcE No. 4. 
FROM ro BE. Pao« 52. 

J'ai ete a Fans. Tu as ete 
en Angletorre. II a ete en Italie. 
EUe a ete en Allemagne. Nous 
avons ete tons absents. Vous i 
avez ete mahide. lis <mt ete 
tr^s bien portants. Elles ont ete 
passer les vacances chez leur onde 
qui demeure k vingt milles d'icL * 



QUESTIONS. 

Oual-jeete? A Paris. 

Ou as-tu ete ? En Angleterre. 

Ou &-t-il ete? En ItaHe. 

Ou &-t-elle ete ? En Allemagne. 

Ou aTons-nous ete? Je ne 

sais, vous ^tiez tons absents. 

Comment avez-Toiis ete ? 

Tr^ malade. 

Comment ont-lls ete? Trte 

bien portants. 

Ou ont-elles ete passer les 
▼acances ? Chez leur onde 
qui demeure k vingt milles d'id. 



* Je n*ai pas ^ k Paris, etc 



EDWARD CHUBCH'S "SYSTEM. 



67 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO BE, £tRE. 



rDTURE. 



VOCABULARY. 



lemoisjrochaln 
le Jour de Pan, 
dans une lienre, 
de retour, 
nne demi-heurei 
a pen pres, 
un quart d'henxB 
paitlfl, arrives, 
aminult, 
amidl, 
a enviroxif 
deux henres, 
qoandy 



[month, 
the next 
[year's day. 
the new 

in an hour. 

of return. 

half an hour. 

pretty near, 
[an hour. 
a quarter of 
[ved. 
started, arri- 

at midnight. 

at noon, 

at about. 

two o'clock, 

when. 



Berai-Je ? 
seras-ta? 
sera-t-U? 
8era-t-elle? 
a quelle heure 7 
serons-noaa ? 
serez-Tous ? 
seront-lls ? 
seront-eUes ? 
combleiii * 
de temps, 



shall I be? 

[be? 
shalt thou 

will he be ? 

will she be ? 

at what hour? 

shall we be? 

will you be ? 

will they be? 

will they be ? 

how much ? 

of time. 



* Cbm&ien means )wio much or htno 
many. 
t Je no serai pas, etc 



DICt6e No. 5. 

FROM TO BE. Paok 52. 

Je serai t de retour le moia pro- 
chain. Tu seras ^ Boston le jour 
de Tan. II sera id dans une heure. 
Elle sera de retour dans une demi- 
heure. Nous serons k peu pr^ 
un quart d'heure ^^crire cette lettre. 
Vous serez partis k minuit Us 
seront arrives k midi. .Elles 
Seront ici k environ deux heures. 



QUESTIONS. 
Quand serai-Je de retour? 
Le mois prochain. Quand seras- 
tu a Boston? Le jour de Fan. 
Quand sera-t-il ici ? Dans une 
heure. Quand sera-t-elle de 
retour? Dans une demi-heure. 
Combien de temps serons- 
nous a ecrire ? A peu pr^s un 
quart dlieure. A quelle heure 
serez-Tous partis ? A minuit 
A quelle heure seront-lls 
arrives? A midl. A quelle 
heure seront-elles ici? A 
environ deux heurea. 



58 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OP THE AUXILIABT VERB TO jB^— iSTRE. 



C01in)inONAL MOOD. 



VOCABULARY. 



moiiifl triste, 

mlemcportantO] 

eomiaaiiiiol,tol, 

d ta flonffiraifl) 

antant, 

pluBheureiiz, 

dans son pajB 

charmee, * 

de vons xevolr, 

tres inquiets, [very uneasy, 
[write. 

almable d'ecrfie|kmd of to 

[oftener. 
pins sonventy more often. 

plnsinstmits, more learned 



less sad. 

[healtli. 
better in 

asy me, thee, 
[fered. 
if thou suf- 

as much. 

[happier, 
more happy, 
try. 
in his coun- 

enchanted. 

[again, 
of you to see 



sHls, 

pares8eiix(8e) 
bien aimable, 
de venir, 

I'ete, 

avecnons, 

de quoly 

yenaient, 

serais-je? 

serais-tn? 

serait-a? 



• See page 257. 



if they. 

lazy. 

veiyaimable 

of to come. 

the summer. 

with us. 

of what 

come. 

ehould I be ? 

[be 
wouldst thou 



would he be? 



DICTilE No. 6. 

PBOM TO BE. PxoB 5S. 

Je serais moins triste si j'^tais 
mieuz portante. Tu serais com- 
me moi si tu souffrais autant H 
serait plus heureuz dans Bon. pays. 
EUe serait charm^ de tous re- 
voir. Nous serions trha inquiets. 
Voos seriez aimable d*^crire plus 
souvent Us seraient phis m- 
struits, s'ils ^taient moins pares- 
seux. EUes seraient bien aim- 
ables de venir passer I'^t^ avec nou8.t 



QUESTIONS. 

Comment serais-je si fetais 
mienz portante 7 Moins triste. 
Comment serais-tn si tn 
sonflA:tds antant? Comme toL 
On serait-il plus henrenz ? Dans son pays. De qnoi ^ 
serait-elle charmee ? De vous revoir. Comment se« 
rions-nons? Tr^ mquiets. Comment seriez-Tons en 
ecrivant plus souvent? Aimable. Comment seraient- 
lis s'ils etfident moins paresseux ? Plus instruits. Com- 
ment seraient-elles, si elles venaient passer Tete avec 
nous ? Bien aimables. 



t Je ne serais pas, etc 



BDWABD OHUSOH'S StSTEM. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXTTJABY TEBB TO BEy fSTRE. 



59 



IMFEBAtlVE MOOD. 



VOCABULABY. 



6COI10III6f 

maifl redonte, 

encore phuh 

que, 

la pEod%a]ite, 

charttablea, 

bmnatiiif 

Meaaleimi 

mes neTeuZy 

certain (e), 
[perai, i_ " 
Je ne m'occu- 



eoonomical. 
[dread? 
but fear, 

oovetousneas 

8tiH more. 

than. 

pro&gajiijr. 

charitable. 

humane. 

gentlemen. 

my nephews. 

certain. 



I shall not 
oocnpyornied' 
die any more. 



reateZf 

encore, * 

[tempi, 
aoasl long« 

sans m'ecrlre 

danannmois, 

rind, 

vons chercheri 

restent, 

qnefera, 

UneB'occnpera, 

pins d'enzy 

vlendra-t-on? 



• Eneon means, 09061, itiD, Mor«, 
and yet 



Stay. 

again. 

as long. 

[to write, 
without me 

in a month. 

I shall go. 

70U to seek. 

stay. 

what will do? 
[meddle, 
he will not 

[them. 

any more of 

will they 

[come? 



DICTIjE No. 7. 

FJtOM TO BE. PiiOS 52, 

Sola ^conomci mon ami, mats 
redonte Tavarice encore plus que 
la prodigality Soyona chari- 
tables, humains. £t vou% Mesneurs 
mes nevenzi aoyez certains que 
je ne m'occuperai plus de tous si 
Yous restez oicore anssi long-temps 
sans m'ecrire. Dans un mols j'irai 
vous chercher tous. t 



QUESTIONS. 

Sola comment? Eoonome. 
Redonte qnoi ? L'avarice. 
Flna qne qnoi ? La prodigality. 
Soyona comment ? Charitablesi 
humains. 81 lea nerenx rea- 
tent long-tempa aana ecrire, 
qne fera lenr oncle? II ne 
s*occupera plus d'eux. Danacom- 
blen de tempa Ttendra^t^n 
Tona chercher ? Dans un mois. 



t Ne iois pas, ete. 



60 



FRENCH BPOKB] 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIABY VERB TO BE, &TRE. 



SUBJUNCnVB PKBSENT. 



VOCABULARY. 



pret (e), 

plii8pnident(6), 

franc (he), 

trojnpes, * 

en France, 

malade, 

cinq henrea, t 

que vent-il ? 

qa*ezige-t-il 

deqaol, 

doute-t-il? 

qae desire-je? 
[nons? 

que CIBlffAOllB- 



readj. 

[dent 
more pni- 

frank. 

deceived. 

in France. 

sick. 

fiye hours. 

[wish ? 

what does he 

[require ? 

what does he 

of what 
[doubt 

does he 
[desire? 

what do I 
[fear? 

what do we 



pensez-Tons ? 

[vouspafl? 

que no cioyez- 

qnene emMl 



think? 
do 70U 
[not believe? 
what do you 
[not believe? 
what does he 



• See page 257. 
t The h of heures being silent, pro- 
nounce aonfaflrr. 



t n ne yent pas. 
n ne doate pas, etc. 



DICT^E No. 8. 

EBOM TO BE, FXob 5S. 

II veut que je sols pr6t k cinq 
heures. II exige que tu sois i^us 
prudent H doute quMl 80it franc 
Je d^ire qn'elle SOit id diman- 
che. Je crains que noos ne soy- 
ons tromp^. Fensez-vous que 
vaOB soyez le premier? Je ne 
crois pas qu'ils BOlent en France, 
n ne croit pas qn'elles soient 
malades-t 



B n'ezige pas. 



QUESTIONS. 
Que veut-il 7 Que je sois pr§t 
pour cinq heures. Qn'ezige«t- 
&? Qu tu sois plus prudent De 
qnol doute-t-a? Qu'il soit 
franc Que desire-je ? Qu'eUe 
soit ici dimanchc Que craig- 
nons-nous ? Que nous ne SQjons 
tromp^s. Pensez-TOOB quoi? 
Que vous sojez le premier. Que 
ne croyez-Toos pas? Qu*ils 
soient en France. Que ne crolt- 
il pas 7 Qu'eUea soient malades. 



EDWABD OHXTROH's SYSTEM. 



61 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB TO BE, £tRE 



IMFEBFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTTVE. 



VOCABULARY. 



! n Tonbdt, 
Ilexigeaity 
JedoDtais, 
Jedesirals, 
n importait, 
n etait utile, 
nsemblatt, 
nflufflsait, 
present, (a4j.) 
prefleiite,(a4j.) 
chezlul, 
foas, 
qaavoDlalt-fl? 



he wished* 
he leqidred. 

I doabted. 

[wished. 
I desired, or 

[portant 
it was im- 

itwasosefuL 

it seemed. 

cient 
it was suffi- 

present (m.) 

present (f.) 

at his home. 

crazy. 

[he? 
what wished 



qu'ezlgealMl? 
doutais-Je? 
que defliral8-Je7 
qa'importal^fl? 
qu'6tal^Uutfle? 
quesemblalMl? 
que sofflsaiMl ? 
arrlvea,* 
a la peudoiiy 



[edhe? 
what requir- 

did I doubt? 
[wish? 
what did I 

[portant? 
what was im- 
[useful ? 
what was 

[it? 

what seemed 

[sufficient? 

what was 

arriyed. 

at the school 



* See page 257. 
t II ne Tonlait pas. H n'exigeait 
pas, etc. 



DICTjfcE No. 9. 

FROM TO BE. Faob 53. 

Byoulaitqae Je Aisaeici Lundi 
dernier. H ezigeait que tn AUH 
sea chez lui le Dimanche, le Lundi 
et le MardL Je doutais qa'il fiat 
k la pension, Mercredi et JeudL Je 
d^sirais qd'elle ftit ici le Vendredi 
et le SamedL II importait que 
nous fioaaiona arriy^s. H Halt 
utile que Toua fluialez presents. 
II semblait qu'ila Aiaaent fous. 
n suffisait qa'ellea Aiaaent prd- 
sentes. t 



QUESTIONS. 
Que TOUlait^U ? Qae je fusse 
id Lundi. Qu'ezigeait-U 7 Que 
tu fusses chez lui. De qaol dou- 
tala-Je 7 Qu'il fat 2t la pension. 
Quedealraia-je? Qu'ellefAtid. 
Qulmportait U 7 Que nous fus- 
sions arriy&9. Qu'etalt-il Utile 7 
Que yous fussiez presents. Que 
aemblait-il 7 Qu'ils fussent fous. 
Que ati£Baait-il 7 Qu'elles fus- 
sent pr^entes. 



64 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 4* 
conthagtion of thb definite abticle, with the pbeposition to OB AT. (A.) 



An,loMalll)e,fQrak* 



Before a noon masculine, 

beginning with a conso- 

nant or h aspirated. 



A ZiAyiokoTBlliie. 

Before a noun feminine 
singular. 



profeBsenr, 

rol, 

prlnoe, 

mal, 

moroean, 

travail, 

trone, 

bail, 

bonheur, 

canal, 

mot, 

discoim, 



chagrin, grief. 



teacher. 

king. 

prince. 

eyiL 

piece. 

work. 

throne. 

lease. 

happiness 

canaL 

word. 

disooune. 



* Au IB used for h It, 
When 2e is a pronoan instead 
of an article, the preposition 
^ ma J precede it^- llras : 
«raim«2k U voir, 
I like to him see. 
£eis a prononn ivhcn con< 
nected with a reib ; and 18 an 
article connected with a snb- 
stantire. 



maitresse, 

relne, 

princesse, 

nuit,t 

romance, 

verdnre, 

conronne, 

pendnle, 

fln, 

faim, t 
parole, 
▼ie, 
mort,S 



mistress, 
queen, 
princess 
night. 



verdure. 

crown. 

clock. 

end. 

hunger. 

word. 

life. 

death. 



t The t does not sonnd; 

{)iononnce nui^ onlets the fol- 
owing word b^^ with a 
vowel. 

X Faim is pronounced as 
Jin. 

f The t does not sonnd 
nxdess before a TOweL 



AL^iokoraltliCL 



Before any noun begin- 
ning with ayowel or A 
mute. 



encrier, (m.) 
ecrttoire,(f.) 
empire, (m.) 
achat, (m.) I 
age,(m.) 
encre, (£) 
ongle, (m.) 
horloge, (f.) 
hopitali (m.) 
avi»,(m.)ir 
aven, (m) 
aatre, (m.) 
ardenr, (f.) 



inkstand, 
inkstand, 
empire, 
porcfaase. 
age- 
ink. 
naiL 
dock, 
hospital, 
advice, 
confession 
planet 
ardor. 



R Pronoonoo uc&a. 
^ Fh>nonnoe ovi. 



fe 



AUZbHttoratlkk^ 



Before any noun in the 
pluraL 



goOTemalls, 
verrous,(m.) 
ouvrageSy (m) 
manz,(m.) 
cienz, (m.) 
txavaui (m.) 
clela, (m.) 
banx, (m.) 
hopllaux, (m.) 
cananz, (m.) 
gouts, (m.) 
dbcoun, (m.) 

(m.) 

InoiiillaidB, 



helms. 

bolts. 

works. 

evils. 

heavena. 

works. 

skies. 

leases. 



canals, 
tastes, 
disooorses 



^ Aux is nsed for h la. 
Lei follows the same mlc as 
U; when connected with a 
verb it becomes a personal 
pronoan instead of oeing an 
article. 



EDWASD GHUBGH's 8T8TEM. 65 11 


CONTRACTION OF THI 

^Au pxtrfesseor, au rtif ih 


S DEFINITE ARTICLE 1 


riTH THE PREPOSITION A. 
Ml, aux goayeraails, aux vezxons, 


I reine, d la maitresae de peiii^< 




d f encrier.f 




] VOCABULARY. 


DICTIjE Na. 1. 
ITBOM TABLE Na 4. Pioa 64. 


. mem Cher, (e) 


mjdear. 


a qui, 


to whom. 


1 remettreZf 


will remit 


ai-Je? 


have I? 


Men cher ami, 


. college, 


college. 






Yens remettrez cette lettre au 


ditea, 

1 


say. 


J aFt^il 


how long 
since. 


professeur du college. Dites lui 
de la faire parvenir an rol ou a la 


; parrenlr. 


arrive. 


de-tempa,J 


Cttey? 
what say 


reine. J'aiparl^alamaitreMe 


quant a,aiu, 


asyfor. 


que ditKm? 


de pension de votre fille, il y a quel- 










ques semaines. Quant aux gOU- 


Prie, 


pray. 


d'enTojeri 


rftosend. 


vemalla et aux Terrous, je 


aiiBsi, 


abo. 


bateau, (x; 


boat 


YOtts prie de les envoyer par le pre- 


1 dnSmelley 

1 


of Emfly. 


a quol. 


to what 


mier batean. Pensez aossi a I'en- 
crier d'Emdlie. 


i eiD!voi<^t"Oiif 


send they. 

. fry? 
isitneoessa- 


demande-i-on 


ask they. 
i£ 




firat-U? 


•1, 


QUESTIONS. 


quil, 


thathe. 


Poo, 


they. 


X qui enTole-t^m une let- 
tre? An professenr du coUdge. 


la fiuMe, 


it make. 


penM, 


think. 


k qui firatJl quMl la fiwae 


1 ^When le, Im wn pronoima in- 
gtead of ttlidea, tiie preposition iii«y 


t Th« teacher ifiD expUin, Ijcfora 
he dictMes,tliat CM b employed for 


panrenir? A qui ai-Je parte? 


precede them: Je twit k U Jain 
ckaiga' d'kUe^^la pemudar. 


kte, ma fori lei, tie. 


Combien j artrU de temps? 
Que dit-on d'enTCjer par le 

mande-t-on si I'on pense? 


N. B. It is better, for enphonv, to wy: 












e< on, on on, si on, 9ii*on, etc. 






9 







66 FRBNOB SPOKBN 


» 


CONTRACTION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE M 


riTH THE PREPOSITION A. 

igesi for d le$ oayrages; d fempire, 
to. 


Au mal, fordb mal; au prince^ for d U prince; ouo? ouyrs 

for d h empire; d fachat, e 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTilE No. 2. 
FROM TABLE No. 4. Paob 64. 


Je suis, 


lam. 


reflectalssezif 


think. 


aUe, 


gone. 






JesuisalUanjardin. Nepensez 


fecrlral, 


I shall write. 






pasaumaL J'^crirai a la prin- 


envoye, 
demiere, 


senL 
last. 






oeaae. J'ai enroj^ mie lettre an 
prince. Je pense a la nnit der- 
ni&re. Penses anz on^rages ' 


Je reflechis, 


I think. 






que TOU8 ares Ins. Je r^^chia a 


mer,* 
reflecUrez, 


sea. 

will think. 






I'emplre de la mer. Yoos r^M- ' 
tion. R4fl^chissez anz manz des 


lnun&iBBf 
a qnif 


human. 
to whom. 






n^yyi l^ififl^ 








a qaol, 


to what 


••.••• 




QUESTIONS. 


de qui, 


of whom. 






Je snia aUe on? Ne pen- 


de qiiol. 


of what 






aez pas a qaol? fecrlral a 
qui? X qni ai-Je envoye nne 
lettre? Aqnolpenaez-Tons? 


• FtoBonnoe like win (mo&er). 








Penaez a qaol? A qaol re- 






fleclilsaez-Tona? Vona re- 






flechirez a qaol? Reflech- 






lasez a qnol? 
-m-™ 



j SDWABD OHUBOH'B BT8TEH. 67 1 


CONTRACTION OP THE DEFINITB ABMCLE Y 


ITH THE PREPOSITION A. 
oeaoy etc. 


Au 


morceaiiy instead ol d le mor 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTEE No. 8- 
FBOM TABLE Na 4. Fioa 64. 


ftitea, 


do^make. 


cmn'ettpae, 


one la not 


miudqaey 


muaic. 


toujoim, 


alwajB. 


Faites attention dn morceau 


. prenez garde» 
sliabttiier, 


take care. 

[to 
to get used 


Mlgnenz (m) 
fimllimi^iULf 


carefoL 

[wretches, 
mmappj . 


demnsique eta la romance. Pre- 
nez garde a I'encre. Habituez- 
vous an travaiL H faut veiller 


.haUtne^vmii, 


get used to. 

. [ry- 
itisnecessa- 


lever, 


torise. 


anx travanx du pare; quant a la 


'flfirat, 


lerenty 


rise. 


▼erdnre ne marchez pas dessns.. 


▼effler, 


to watch. 


■onTenty 


often. 


A l^e de qainze ans, on n'est pas 


pare* 


p»L 


leeyenzit 


the eyes. 


toujours tres soigneux. Les mal- 
henreox levent soarent les yeux 


aiiMl, 


also. 

- - * 


qtuant a. 


as for. 


anx denz. 


Imarcherv 


towalL 






' 


nemaiehexpas, 


do not walk. 






QUESTIONS. 


detMiMf 


upon H* 
fifteen jean. 






ndtes , attention a qooi? 
Prenez garde a qnoi? Ila- 
Utnez-Tona a qnoi ? A qooi 
fiint-fl Teffler? Ne niarchez 


• Tba c k M hanh 9a hh 


tPkonoaooe2e«MK. 






pas snr qnoi? k qnel age 






n'est-on paa toqjoim tres 






soignenx ? On les malheniv 






enz levent-ils sonyent les 


. 




yens? 



68 


FBENCH SPOKEN 


• 


CONTBACnC 


)N OF THJ 


S DEFINITE ARTICLE T 


FTTH THE PREPOSITION A. 

1% etc 


Au tr5ne, instead of & fa tr6i 


VOCABULABT. 


DICTfJE No. 4. 1 










o'est, 


iti& 


peinture,* 


painting. 

fchurch. 
of the 


FROM TABLE No. 4. Page 64. 


l6 plus bean, 
diif 


tlie finest 
of the. 


de I'egUse, 


Faites attention an trone et a 
la conronne sor le tr5ne ; c'est 


Toyez-TOQS, 


see you. 






le plus beau du tableau. Vojez- 


Tolr, 


to see. 






Tou3rheurealai>endnle7 Non. 


nonpliis, 


no more. 

[matter? 
what is the 






Et a Fhorloge de r^glise? Non . 
plus. Qu*aTez-Tous ? J'ai mal a , 


qn'avez-voiu? 






PoBgle. Avez-vous pens^ an 


fai mal, 
signer, 


I have eviL 
to sign. 






bail? J'ai sign^ les deux bans. , 
Regardez cette pemture, faites air 
tention anx beanz oiels. 


•Igne, 


signed. 








les devx, 


thetwOyboth. 




♦ ,,,,,. 




regardez, 


lookal 






• 


cette, (f.) 


this. 












* Pern sonnds as pm. 




•• 









EDWARD CHUBOH'S SYSTEM. 



69 



CONTRACTION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE WITH THE PREPOSITION A. 



Au bonheor, instead of d h bonheur; au canal, etc 



VOCABULARY. 



a quo!, 

aller, 

d'aDer, 

mes, (p.) 

parents, 

oaaUez-Tous, 

on en, 

etes-vons, 

cet,* 

ouTrage, 

reflechiftsez, 

qa'avait, 

iiialhenreii86, 



to what 

toga 

of to go. 

my. 

parents. 

[you? 
where go 

* 

where of it 

are you. 

this. 

work. 

think. 

that had. 

wretch. 



OH, 

est-elle, t 

a-t-elle, t 

fidt, 

Inl, (pra) 

a qol, 

est ce, 

Ilnge, 

condnire, 

condniflez-voiUy 

ces bols, 



where. 

is she. 

has she. 

made. 

[himJ 
to her, to 

whose. 

is this. 

linen. 

to lead. 

lead you. 

tlkese woods. 



DICT^E No. 5. 
imOU TABLE No. 4. Pagb 64. 

A. quoi pensez-Yous ? An bon- 
heur d'aller voir mes parents. Oh 
allez-TOus? Au canal. Oh en 
Stes-Yous de cet ouYrage? A la 
fln. A quoi r^fldchissez-YOus? A 
la fiadm qu'aYait cette malheureuse. 
Oh est-eUe maintenant? A llio- 
pitaL A-t^Ue fait attention a 
I'avis que Yous lui aycz donn^ ? 

A qui est ce linge ? Anx hopl- 
tanz. Oh conduisez-YOus ces hois? 
anx cananz. 



*Celvi used instead of oe, because 
the following word begins with a 
Towel; the i soimds as if it were 



t Pkx)noimoo deBe, 
I Frononnoe aUUe, 



1,0 


FBSNCH SPOKE K. I| 


CONTRACTIC 


)N OF THJ 


3 DEFINITE ARTICLE WITH THE PREPOSITION A. 


4u mot| ott disconrs, ou chagrini etc 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICT^E No. 6. j 
FROM TABLE Ka 4. Paqb 64. 


▼enir, 


tooome. 


proffereri 


to utter. 


▼enez, 


come. 


presmnerf 


to presume. 


A quoi pensez-Yous? Au mot 


refle<>lilr, 


tOtlUDk. 


]e presmiief 


1 presume. 


que vous vene« de prononoer. A 


de cett« 


of this. 


qu'a, 


thanto. 


qnm z^fl^ehiases-Tons? An die- , 
OOOrs de cet orateur. Que &nt-il 


oratein^ 


orator, 
[ceasary. 






faiie? . Porter remMe aa chagrin j 


que fitut-Of 


wlu^isltno- 






de cette personne. A la parole j 


fUre, 


todo. 






qu'elle Tient de profi^rer, je presume 


porter, 








qn'eUe pense pins a lamort qu* a , 
la Tie. 


renicdei 


remedy. 






r 


de oette, 


ofthifl. 








personne, 


person. 






i 


qu'elle, 


that she. 








▼lent, 


comes. 








• Cblisnsedbefon 
Dlag with a vowel o 


) a noon begin- 
r silent h: Get 
msM^ this man. 







SDWAKD OHXTBOH'S 8T8TSH. 71 || 


CONTRACTION OF THl 
A faTen, i f ardenr, 


S DEFINITE ARTICLE WITH THE PREPOSITION X 


mtx go^iSf aux disooursi (mux brouillardsi instead of What? 




VOCABULAEY, 




DICTEE No. 7. 
FROM TABLE Ka 4. Pagb 64. 


croire, 


to believe. 


trayailler, 


to work 


cToyez, 


believe jou. 


soleU,! 


sun. 


Croyez-vous a 1' aveu que cette 


pas troiH 


not too much 




to distiiunush. 


femme vous a fait?. Pas trop. Oil 


' porter, 


to. cany. 


disUngoeK, 


distinguish. 


portez-vous vos regards ? Sur V as- 
tre de la nuit. Ces pauvres gens 


portes-YCMis, 


carry you. 


eapeoea, 


kind, species 


sont forces de travailler a 1' ardeUT 


▼<>«,♦ 


your. 




different. 


du soleO. Comment distinguez-vors 


regardsit 


looks. 


qu'ils ont, 


[have, 
that they 


lesespboesde fruits? Aux goats 
diff^rents quails ont k quoi ftutril 






* 




ices, 


these, those. 


evlter, 


to avoid. 


que je donne toute mon attention? 


pauTres, 


poor. 


rastre, (m.) 


the star. 


Aux discours de cet homme. 


g«M,1 


people. 






n faut ^viter de vous promener 


jaont, 

1 


are. 








Ibrcer, 


to force. 






\ 


ifivroes,! 


forced. 








• The « only so 


nnds before a 


IThe/isHqmd: 


itfloniidsasin 
tHanL 




Towel or a Bilent h. 




tho English word M 




tTheifdoesnoti 


onnd. 








1 The i onlT loiin^ 
, darABfleiitL 


B before a Yow- 
















1 f8€epageS57. 


•^ 









72 



rSKMOn 8P0KKH. 



TABLE No. 5. 



OF A OB FROM A. 



D'UN. 

Before a noun mascu- 
line. 



bote, 

Jardln, 

ronuuif 

palais, 

balcon, 

•oir, 

chat,* 

tapiSi 

tresor, 

moncholr, 

clocher, 

devoir, 

medecin, 



wood. 

garden. 

romance 

palace. 

balconj. 

eyening. 

cat. 

carpet 

treasure 
[chief, 
handker- 

steeple. 

duty. 

doctor. 



♦ The t only 
fore a yowcL 



soiincU be- 



D'UmL 



Before a noun feminine. 



fbret, 

iiiilt,t 

table, 

chaise, 

▼ue, 

dame, 

ame, 

montagne, 

affaire, 

orpheline, 

IMurente, 

promesae, 

abbaye, X 



forest 

night^ 

table. 

chair. 

sight 

lady. 

soul. 

business 

orphan. 

relation. 

promise. 

abbey. 



t The t only sonndB be- 
fore a vowel. 

X Abbai-^. The ye haa 
the English pionnndation. 



TO 



AUN. 



Before a noun mascu- 
line. 



marchand, § 
camte, 

etre, 

gendre, 

hote, 

peintre, 

penple, 

oavrier, 

protectenr, 

Dien, 

ange, 

heritier. 



mercfaaat 

earL 

husband 

being. 

Jlaw. 
son-m- 

landlord 

painter. 

people. 

worknum. 

protector. 

God. 

angel. 

heir. 



^ Do notionnd thetf; it 
soondi as a C before a vowel 
or silent h. 



AUMB. 



Before a noun feminine. 



marchande, 

omnteaae, 

epoiise,! 

et0iirdle« 

beUe-flllei, 

hotesae, 

puiaaanoe, 

populatioii, 

onvriere, 

protectrice, 

vierge, 

JeuneflUe, 

heritiere^ 



merchant 



comtm. 

wife. 

peas. 

thoughts 

[in-law. 

daoghter- 

landlady. 
power. 

[tiOIL 

popula- 
[woman. 
work- 

[ress. 
protect- 

virgin. 

[girl. 
young 

heiress. 



D The s sonnds as a a. 



SDWABP CHDBOH'S 8TSTBX. 



78 



TO, OF, OB FROM, PRECEDING THE INDEFimTE ARTICLE. 



27 tm b^ <f «iM fiirOt, tTim jardm, iTtoM nuit, i vn maichand, etc. 



II VOCABULARY. ( 


DICXiE No. 1. 


^ 


[whence. 






d'on. 


firom wbere^ 


sort, (verb) 


goes out 


FROM TABLE No. 5. Paob 72. 


▼enez-Tous? 


comejou? 


tirolr, 


drawer. 


jy oh venez-Tous ? D' un bols, 


a qui. 


to whom. 


bagne, 


ring. 


d'uneforet. Aquiparliec-vous? 


paiUez, 


spoke. 


m'aYez, 


me have. 


A un marchand et a une ma]> 
Chande. De quoi parliez-vous? 


Ide quoi, 


of what 


vn. 


seen. 


lyunjardinetd'unennit. A 


.a qui est, 


to whom is. 


peiUI6Z"T01UI, 


think 70U. 


qui appartient cette habitation ? A 


appartenlr, 


to belong. 


qui, 


whom 


on comte. Et ce chftteau? A 
one comtease. D' oh vient cette 


apparUent, 


belongs. 


m'eat, 


me is. 


gravure? B'Un roman. I^oh 


haUtatton, 


residence. 


oher (e), 


dear. 


sortcetiroir? D* nne table do la 


▼enir, 


to come. 


parlez-T<ms, 


speak 70U. 


pension. A qui est cette montre? 
A nn ei>oiix. A qui est cette 










vicat,* 


comes. 






bague? A nne epouae. D'oh 


sraTvre, 


engraving. 




. . • .,• . 


m'aTez-Yous Yu? DubalcondHm 


aorUr, 


to go out 






palala. A qui pensez-vous? A 
on etre qui m*est cher. A qui 

paflez-Yous? X une etonrdle. 


• The f flODiids 
▼oweL 


only before a 





10 



74 




FBBNOH 


BPOKBN. II 


TO, OF, OB FR( 

DvsM chai 


UNL, PBECEDINO THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 1 


Wy d*uM dame) tf * wm yue. 


htm gendre, etc 


VOCABULARY. 


DICtIiE No. 2. 










baton, 


stick. 


montagna, 




FBOM TABLE No. ft. Faos 72. 


rego, 


reoeived. 


parfhltameiKt, 


perfectly. 


IVotl Tient ce MLton? D^ime 


oadeau (z). 


gift. 


ae ranieler, 


to recollect 


Clialae. De qui aTeas-vons re9a oe 


comme, 


as, like. 


J" aw la|P|lUUv| 


I recollect 


cadeau? D' ime dame. Qoe 
pensez-TouB d'mie Tae comme 


oelle-d. 


this one. 


avaaU 


also. 


celle-d? Eiie est admirable. 1 


propriete, 


property. 


oliailtable. 


charitable. 


qui est cette propri^t^? A im 


Madame, 


Mistress. 


qui noua a, 


[has. 
Who to us 


gendre de Madame W. et oelle-ci? 
A. mie bdle flUe de Monsieiir L. 










Monaienr, 


IGster. 

[ber. 


reoneflUa, 


received. 


VbuB soavenes-Yons d'ui aolr oh 


ae aouTenir, 


toremem- 


reoueOlir, 


to receive. 


nous sommes allds k la montagne? 


[▼008? 
TOU flOUVSIIBS- 


[member? 
do yoa re- 


oflMr, 


tooflfer. 


Ooi, parfaitement Je me rappelle 
anssi d'mie ame charitable qui 


nona aommea 


weare. 


oOBrtvt 


offered. 


noos a recneillis et offert nn abri 


aUea,* 


gone. 


un abrl, 


a shelter. 


poor la nnit Pensez-Tons qudqne- 


\ , 








fois a mi hole et a vcdb ho- 


ala, 


totlie. 


comme oenz, 


as those. 


teaae, comme ceoz de la semaine 
demi^? 


•Scej«gc 


S57. 


tThe t onlytonnds bcforaaTOWiel 
ornlentb. 



1 ^ XDWABD church's SYSTEM. 75 


1 TO, OP, OR FROM, PRECEDING THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 




I/tin chat, iTtm tas^ etc^ 1 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 8. 










Je veuz. 


IwilL 


tradniaez, 


translate. 


IfBOH TABLE Ka 6. Faob 12. 


Jeoeveupafl, 


I^rillnot. 


en Anglais, 


in English. 


Je ne veux pas d' un ohat si md- 


si mechant, 


so wicked. 


Mesdames, 


Ladies. 


chant H a ddchir6 la moitid d'nn 


a a dechir^ 
dechirer, 


hehaatom. 
to tear. 


Messienrs,t 


^jrentl^^^y^- 


tapis, et dgradgnd tout le monde de 
la maison. Maintenant Mesdames, 






Mesdemoiselles, ou Messieurs, pour 


lamoitte, 


thebaic 






finir ce tobleaa tradnisez en Anglais : 


egraUgne, 
egratlgiiar. 


scratched, 
to scratch. 






d'nn tresor, d'lm moncholr, 
d'nn clocher, d'lm devoir, 
d'nn mededn; d^ime affidre. 


toat le monde, 


ererjbodj. 






d'nne oxpheline, d'one pa^ 


poor flnlr, 


joimg ladies 
fortoftnish. 






rente, dHme promesse, d'one 
abbaye; a un pdntre, a un 
peuple, a un cnnrrler, a un 


ce tableau, 

1 


this table, or 
diagram. 






proteoteur, a un Dleu, a un 
ange, a un heritier; a une 
puissance, a une pcqpulatlon, 
a une ouvriere, a une pro- 
tectrice, a une Tierge, a une 


* The teadwrwffl make the pu- 
pils pronoanoe, on the Table No. 6, 
an the fohftantiYea which end thit 
i Dictation. Thus, (ftmtrAor, etc. 


t The ff flonods only bcfoie a 
ToweL 


1 

1 




Jeune fllle, a une heritiere. 


1 







78 F BEN OH 


8P0ESK. 


1 


ADJECTIVES. 






[•e,* 








* 




aimable, 


amiable* 


honteox- 


|y^Ti(yn<^l- 


bean, 


fine. 


Tnrc-qae, 


Turkish. 


/ 




[•e, 












agreable, 


agreeable. 


▼extaeuz- 


yirtuoofl. 


bel*le, 


u 


loBg-ue, 
maUn-Kiiei 


long. 


pradent-e, 


prudent. 


jaloQx-se, 


jealous. 


nouTeau, 


new. 




/ 




[•c, 








t 




•ense-e, 


senaible. 


mentea]> 


lying. 


iioaTel*le 


U 


fituz-aae, 


false. 
[tle,nuld. 


poU-c, 


polite. 


trompeur- 


deceitful 
[ress. 


▼ieuXf 


old. 


doux-ce, 


sweety gen- 


tortu-e, 


crooked. 


actenr-ilce, 

[rice, 

admixateiir- 


actor, act- 


vlell^le, 


u 


&Tori-te, 

1 
jmneau-na, 

dl8CIe^•te^ 


fiiYorite. 


instmit-ef 


learned. 


admirer. 


foii,folMe, 


crazy. 


twin. 


cmel-le, 


cnieL 




low. 




soft. 


discreet 


pareU-le, 


alike. 


gras-se, 


fat 


mol«le, 


tt 


Inqdet-etei 


'^^^fulLl 


ancien-ne, 


ancient 


laa-se, 


tired. 


blano-hei 


white. 


con^let-eta 


complete, 


bon-ne, 


good. 


epaia-se, 


thick. 


flrano-hef 


frank. 


pret-e, 


ready. 


bref-ve,» 


short 


groa-ae, 


big. 


flraaa-che,t 


fresh. 


disptM, 


active. 
[siUyfbp. 
coxcomb. 


actlf-ve, 


active. 


aoMe, 


bSHj. 


aec-he, 


dry. 


&t, 




[new. 














nenf-ve, 


ingenuous, 


aol-le, 


none. 


Orec-qae, 


Greek. 


blette, 


soft 


• In these adjectiTas, end- 
ing in / the / ifl duuDged 


* To fonn the feminine 


^Bd^fioiufiiytuHMmol; 


* Chang, the e into qm. 


of the a4jectiTe8 endmg in 


these fire mascoline a^Jec^ 


t " " n ' ate. 


into ve, to form the feminine. 


X, the X is changed into m. 
Those ending in aw change 


tires are placed before a vow- 


■ WW Jfww*^ 

t " « X • lie: 
i « •• X « ce. 




el or a silent A, and make 
their feminfhe by adding 2e, 




ornos. 


thus, bdh, nowelle, vieOle, 


1 * - «« BSL 






t Chance the t into Me, to 
Rwm theieminine. 


T - « K « ite. 









EDWARD CHUBCH'b 8TSTBX. 79 || 




OF THE ADJECTIVE.* | 


The adjecdve agrees in gender and number witli the Bubstantive to which it relates. 


FoBXATiON OF THS FsMiNnns. — The adjeetives terminated in the singolar in e mute, are of 


both genders : Un homme otmaMf, unefemme atmaMf, agriailU. When e mute does not end the 


adjectiye, it ou^ to be added to form its feminine : Un homme prudent^ une femme prudewU. f 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTEE No. 1. 
VRO}£ THE ADJECnVSS. Page 78. 


▼enes, 


come. 


aOMlit 


also. 


1 sreo nolf 


with me. 


dlODfl, 


let us go. 


Venez avec moi vous serez bien 


Ibiemibrt, 


very. 


mas enfiouh 


my children. 


aimable; nous ferons nne prome-' 


noQM feroDfl, 


[make, 
we diall 


partes, 


start 


nade fort agreable. Monamisois 
pmdientinevaspastropvite; Em- 


ime iproiMikade, 


a walk. 


MHViBOS-VraSi 


remember. 


^lie ne toormente pas ton cheval, sois 


■oto, 


be. 


doltt 


ought. 


prudente anssL AUons mes en- 


neTu pas, 


do not go. 


arrlver, 


to arrive. 


fans partez et sonvenez-vous que 






^ 


[o'ckKsk. 


votre tante doit arriver k dnq 


trapvite, 

In 


too fast. 
Bniily. 


adnqkem 
narmuinitefi 


at five 

do not make 


heores. Ne voos fiutes pas attendre 
poor diner. 


[pas, 










110 tonrmeiite 


do not tease. 


attendre, 


to wait. 




ton cheral, 


thy horse. 


poiir dinaTf 


fordmner. 


^ 


* The phml in the feminiiie ad- 


X jftonoonce the m Jtrj hanh. 




jecdTM is alwajs formed by the 






addition of an a. This rnle has no 






1 ezeepiion as to the femininoi bat the 






j masmlinf? has the following. The 






adjectifeB ending in s or «, as ^rot, 






onif, dana^ AeareKr, do not cfaimge 
! their tennuiation in the plnnL 






tInIVench,the a^jectareisahnost 
ahvnTB plaeed after the snbstantiTe. 






See page S4S, for the exceptions. 




- 



30 FBBNCH SPOKEN. || 




OF THE ADJECTIVE 


• 


Bulk to fobm thb Fbhihikb.— Whenever e mnte does not end the adjective, it ought to 


be added to form its femiimie: Un honune sen««, une femme Beasee; po&*, pofc>; toifti, toiiM; 


instrui^, instrui/e. «• 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 2. 


la penonne, 


the person. 


baton, 


Stick. 


^ROUTER ADJECTIVES. Paob78. 


rencontree, 


met 

[have. 


canne, 


cane. 


Cest la personne la plus alma^ 


que fate, 


that I may 


asaez, 


enough. 


Ue, la plus agreable que j*ate 


certalnement, 


certainlj. 




butlbeUeve 


rencontree. Voire ami est-il pru- 
dent? Cartainement, il n'y a pas 


il n'y a pas, 


there is not 






de danger, sa mere est avec lui, et 


de danger, 


of danger. 






elle est encore plus pmdente que 
luL n est sense, mais sa femme 


encore. 


stuL 






est plus sensee que luL Est-il 


qae Ini, 


than he. 






plus poll maintenant ? Pas du tout 


aa femme. 


his wife. 






mais sa femme est encore moins p<^ 
Ue. Ce b&ton est tortO. Etvotre 


eat-il, 


is he. 


•••••• 




canne est tortue aussL Est-il In- 


paa da tout. 


notatalL 


«...•• 




Stmlt? Asses, mais je crois que 
sa SQBur est phis instmite que InL 


*jrORMATION OF «HB PLUBAI* 

The mascaline adjecdvei ending 
in oHi take x in the plnral: as bean, 


, 


•naaals. 
•narals. 
•tbatisli. 




B&vn]. •••....• 


fth^ftini]. ..•••• 




beanx; nonrean, nonreanx. Thoae 


* 




in <U take otic 

moraZ • • • • inoRmaB. 






^^ :::2St 






brnto^ bntoMn 






Ezoept— 






final flnah. 






lyloi^Uil 


.glfldab. 






K**^*** 







BDWABD CHUBCH'3 8T8TSX. 



OP THE ADJECTIVE.* 



81 



Rule to form the Fxhikikb. — The a^Jectiyes ending in el^ et^ ien^ on, doable their last 
oonaomuit and take e mute: erael, craelle; pareil, pareiile; ancien, andenne; bon, bonne. The 
f 18 changed into ve: bref, br^ve. 



VOCABULARY. 



c'eat vral, 
que sa fflle, 



tronTez-YOtis, 

ce dlamant, 

tovt-o-ftit, 

an mien, 

et eette bagae, 

a la Totre, 

[one 
aoflsi ancien 

delenr forme, 

lea accei^ter, 



it is true. 

[daughter, 
that his 

how. 

do jou find. 

this diamond 

quite. 

to mine. 

and this ring 

toyonn. 

as ancient as. 
[or shape, 
of Uieirform 
[cept 
them to ac- 



•foxmatioh or thb flusal. 

Some adjectires in td chanee this 
iomiiwdon in aux; as 4gcd, ^jomc; 
g6i6d; g^i^toux, See page 80. 



foas etei trop 
vom les eavalei 
mllle foia, 
trop bomie^ 
trouves-voQS 7 
la imrole, 
xm ton, 
plus que, 



[good, 
jou are too 

^send. 
to you^em 
[times. 
a thousand 

too good. 

findjou? 

the word. 

an air. 

more than. 



DICT^B Ko. 8. 
FROM THE ADJECTIVES. Paos 78. 

Cest vrai il est cmel, mais je 
crois que sa fiHe est plus cmelle 
que lui. Comment trouvez-vous ce 
diamant? Tout k fait parell au 
mien; et cette ba^e? exactement 
pareOle k la vdtre. Le diamant 
est aussi anclen que la bague est 
anciemie ; Je parle de leur forme. 
Voulez-vous les accepter? Vous 
dtes trop ban; ma femme Tons les 
envme. EUe est mille fois trop 
bonne. Comment trouvez-you^ 
Monsieur et Madame Duval ? Ha 
la parole un pen breve, et elle a im 
ton plus que bre£ 



82 F^BNCH BFOEEN. , || 




OF THE ADJECTIVE.* 


BiTLB TO Fosx TRX FxMXNiNs. — Acd^ actm; neo^ neotw; nai/; nalM (isgemioin). The 
adjectives ending in a^ change x lato « and take e mate: hontetup, hcmteoM; Tertaeiias, yertneiiftf; 
jalouxi jaloute. 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICTiJE No. 4. 


■ 








oni, asMZ, 


yes, enongh* 


ceconple,(m.) 


thiscoiqkie. 


FROM THE ADJECTIVES. Taq^ 78. > 


elle parait, 


she seems. 


est Uen* 


iswelL 


Est-ilactlf? Oui^assez. EUe 


fbrt, (adv.) 


very. 


assorti. 


united. 


pandt fort aoUTS. Ohl Je voos 


oh! Jevoiis, 
assure, 


oh I I you. 
assure. 


si la ftanune, 
an pins bant, 


ifdieivife. 
to the lugh- 


assure que ouL E pleut, ne mettez 
pas votre chi^>eaa nen£ Nous 
aliens en voiture, puis-je mettre ma 


que OQlf 


that yes. 


degre, 


d^jree. 


robe nenre 7 Non, MademoiseUe, 


U plent, 

- 
ne insttM paB, 


itrainsy 

do not put 

[bid. 
I yon it for- 


le marl, 
an dender, 


the husband, 
tothelart. 


tenx d'y aller avec ce chapeau. £t 
moi encore plus honteuse avec 


Je Tans le de- 


point. 


pointi period 


cette robe. Ce couple est bien as- 


[fends, 
d^ aller, 


of there to 


qni conri, 


who runs. 


sorti ; si la feomie est yertnense 
an plus haut degr^, le mari est ver- 


encore pins, 


still more. 

[dress. 
with this 


labas. 


yonder. 


tnenx aa dernier p(mit. Est-oe 


avec cette robOi 






votre sosur qui court Ik baa? Oni. 










Votre fir^re, est-fl Jalonz? Non, 










mais Emdiie est tr^ Jalonse. 


* The following adjectivet hare 
no plural in the masculine:-^ 




h^D^dal, patronal, fni^ 
canonial, Tfaginal, jovial, 
diagonal, vocal, Inatral, 
diametraX sodiacal, madnal, 
experimental, coigogal, naval, 
instromental, fmtal, pastoral, 
madnal, filial, pectonO. 
^Atitfti, final. 







BDWABD OHUBOH'B 8TBTSX. 



83 



OF THE AJXFECnVE.* 



Bulk to roBX thb Fexdonb*— ?The adjective^ or rather snbetaatiTeay ending in cur, 
change the r into se : menteur, menteuie ; tiomptftir, trompeiue* Some change eur into rice: admi- 
lalevr, admiratric«. Grasy boij doable the # and add e mate« 



VOCABULARY. 



one petttey (£) 
et CliarlM, 
un grand (e). 
voiiB no aoitirez 
ni cek aoteory 
idoetteacliloe, 
delenr talent, 
pas plus, 
dflf diantenn, 
chantense, 
Qiri las ontf 
precedes, 



alitde. 

and Charles. 

agreat 

[go oat 
joa shall not 
[actor, 
neither this 
[actress, 
neither this 
[ent 
of their tal- 

nomore. 

[ers. 
of the sing- 
singer. 

[hare, 
whom them 

preceded. 



* Fbl jfrllableB ending hraM or 
eat, drop the I or keep it, aa libitum 
Dim tnfaiM dtarmacMy or thoBnmJtit 



Bat monofyllables retain the f, as 
an gcBKi^ dt» ^BMlt ; VaA^ UkU, How* 
erer, intf miikfls tDMi; 



trouTess-ToitSj 
oe olooher, 
un pen, 
il est Trait 
qne I'egUse, 
est tres pen, 
eleree^ 
prenez, 
oette chaise, 
merd, 
eponse. 



how. 

find joo. 

that steeple, 
[rather, 
a H^ley or 

it is trae. 

[chorch. 
that the 

is Texy little. 

high. 

take. 

this chair. 

sponse. 



DICT^E No. 5. 
FROM THB ADJECTIVES. Paob 7a 

Yoos 6tes one petite mentense, 
et Charles on grand mentenr. 
Yoos ne sortires pas anjoordlmL 
Vous 6tes on trompenr, et die 
ane trompense. Je ne oonnais ni 

cetactenrnicetteaotrlce. £ltes- 
voos ndmiratenr de leor talent? 
Nbn, pas pins que yoos n'^tes adnd- 
ratrloe des ehanteors qoi les ont 
pr^edd^ Comment troavex-TOos oe 
clocher? Ua pea bas; ilestTrai 
que r^glise est tr^ pea dlev^. 
Prenez cette chaise; elle est trop 
basse merd. Est^il totyonrs aossi 
gras ce hon Monsieur L.? Qui, 
mais son ^usq est plus grasse 
qne lui maintenant. 



8 



84 FBBN0H8POKBN. 11 




OF THE ADJECTIVE.* 1 


RuLB TO FOBX THB Feuikine. — The following a^jecti 


[▼es double the consonant and take i 


e mute: las, laste; ^pais, ^psiiase; grosy groste; 80t| sotto* D 


VOCAB 


DLARY. 


DICt6e No. 6. 
nFBOVL THE ADJECTIVES. Paob7& 


airetons-noiUy 


let U8 Btop» 


ce gateau, 


this cake. 


un moment, 
Je veux Men, 


a moment. 

[lingly, 
I will wil- 


qii0 vrasetes, 
e'ect Tooa, 


how you are. 
it is you. 


Arr6ton8-nou8 nn moment, je snis 
laaae; je veux bien, je suis anssi 


[vons, 
oossi las que 


[you. 
ai^ tiled as 


moncoiudSiCm.) 


my cousin. 


laa que vous. Youlez-yous nn pen 
de cette soupe? Non merd elle est 


de cette soupe, 


of this soup. 


ma ooasbia, (£) 

[iiAxpaa, 


my cousin. 

[understand. 


trop epalaae; qudqnes cuiller^ 


elle est fcrop, 


it is too. 


vonsnecompre- 


yon do not 


do bouillon Yous feront da Inen? Je 


cnOlerees, 


spoonful. 


qne reftaaer. 


that to refuse 


le trouve trop epais. Frenez cette 
p^he. Elle est unpen trop groaae. 


de bouillon, 


of broth, 
[make. 


bleaae. 


hurts. 


Voulez-vous ce g&teau ? H est anssi 


Yona feront. 


to you will 




the person. 


tropgroa. QueYOus^tesaotmon 


du blen. 


some good. 




eat 

[nothing. 


cousin I C'est yous, bonne oousine, 


Je le trouve, 


I it find. 


rien. 


any things or 


oomprenes pas que refiiser toujonrs, 


cette peche, 


this peach. 






blesse la personne qui offire. Man- 


Yonlez-Tona, 


will you. 






ges ne mangez pas, je ne yous offii- 

•«: v^lna MAM 






rai plus nen. 


* mORXEfl OF SIGNIFICATION. 






PtmHoe, agx^ble. 












StipeHative, le or la pluf agi^Ie. 







« EDWAKD church's 8T8TE1I. 85 || 




OP THE ADJECTIVE 


in, bel (m.), beU^ (f.) ; noureauy nou- 
b added to hel, nouyel, vieil, makes 


Bttlk to vobm xhb FxiainHS.«^JRf{ makes mdh. Bef 
Tel (m.), wmYeUe (f.) ; TieoZi vieil (m.), yieSUe {£). Thus i 
the feminine. 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICT^E No. 7. 
FROM, THE ADJECTIVES. Paob78. 


Mt-cei 


isit. 


eitpeo, 


isHtUe. 

[point 
the main 


nn grandf 


a great 


lefond,. 


Est^ce un grand gdnie? On le 


gaile» 


gemns. 

n i_ 


Ilapils, 


he has taken 


regarde ccmune miL £t sa aoenr ? 


onleregarde, 


[look upon, 
they him 

as. 


Unitoe&, 
ranuuiy 


all that 
noYeL 


£31e est moins nidle qne lui» mais 
son style est ampoule. On dit qu'il 
est tr^ bean. Sa sosur est plus 


son style* 


heratfrle. 


a laqndie, 


to which. 


belle, sea traits sent plus r^guliers. 


ampoule, 
onditvi'Uegt, 


tumid. 

[he is. 
they say that 


essaye, 
telnte, 


tried. 

odor. 

[ceived. 


Est-il bel homme? Ti^ bel 
homme. Ayez-vous lu son noUYel 
ouvrage? Oui, mais son idee est 


tros beau. 


▼etyfine. 


Best trompey 


himself do- 


pea nowrelle, etle fond de cet 


aes traits, 
Iregnliers, 


his featoiea. 
regular. 


•••••• 




ouvrage n'est pas plus noaYeaii. 
n a pris tout celli dans un vieiizt 
roman. Ccst une vieUIe histoire 


lUf 


read. 


• 




klaquelle il a essay^ de donner une 


1 son Idee, 


his idea. 






DOUYelle teinte. Yotre viell ami 
g'est tromp4. 


• There are three lorts of oompanflon: 
1 1. SuPESiOBiTT. Phs agr^ble que; more agree 
1 s. Infebiobitt. Afoihsagr^ble que; less agree 
! a. Equautt. ^umi agrdableqoe; as agree 


able than. 
ablethuL 
able as. 


t This a^jectiTa is ahraji phoed befora 
the sabstantire. 


i 







86 VBENCH SPOKBN. « || 




OF THE ADJECTIVE. 1 


Bulb to fork thb Fbkinikb.— Fooi ibl (m.), moo, mol (iil), ae in the preeeding mle, 
make their feminine bj adding & to fi>l and moL ThoBi JblbjmoUe. 
The following are irregular: MxnCj hUmche; frcme^ fiamehe; Jrm$f Jrmehe. 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICT^E No. 8. 










aiiioiir«pini|ii6| 


self-lom 


quel air, 


what an air. 


mou TSEADJEcrnvBa. pio«78.! 


aiuHd fbUe qae, 
toatesafiuDlllei 


as crazy as. 
aUhisfanuly 


c'est Txal, 
aiiMd franche 


itistnie. 
as frank as. 


n a nn iblt amour-propre. H 
est fbu, sa femme est aoan fidte 


est de xneme, 
unUt, 


is the same, 
abed. 


son air, 
Je le penae. 


her air. 
litthinL 


que hii, toatesa&mlDe estde m&ne. 
Aimez-Tous nn lit mou 7 Oni ain- 
dqa'unmol^dredcmdessQS. Pre- 


ainilqae,* 
preneZf 
cette poire, 


as wen as. 
take, 
this pear. 


la peraonnd^ 
qni Inl parla, 
comme nne. 


the person. 

Ws. 
who to her 

as a. 


nes cetto poire; non eOe eat trop 
molle. Voyesoettejenneperscmne, 

Cost channanty mais je n'aime pas 


Jevne pemnuiey 
lapeanblancdie 


young lady. 

how, or as. 

[white, 
the skm 


roacjt 


rose. 


nntemtsiblaiio. Qaelairfranc 
eDe a. Cest vrdl, est-elle anssi 
flranohe qne son air? Jelepense. 
La personne qni Ini parle a le teint 


taint, 
•1, 


oompleiioD. 
so. 






plus flraia, die est fraiche oomme , 
unerose. | 


• Meaniog aiudbimmte,iBtaaim 
\aMhja$wdla». 


t Rom is prononncod nte^ becBnse 
wt 9f pUiced between two Towelfi 
has the soQiid of a ft 


t This a4ioethre is alw^ plaoed Ufoe 1 



BBWABD OHUBOB'B 8T8TBH. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE.* 



87 



l^OTTLAB Fbiokine. — iSNT, $iei€ f Onc, Grecque; 2Wic, Turque; Umg^ bngue; maUnj 
matigne;faux,faui9e. 



VOCABULARY 



lelinge^ 

C6tte aenrlettei 
[flgure, 
quelle belle 



enUerementy 

Je preftve^ 

le coslmney 

mol amuri, 

[t 
qndle 

ce dieconn, 



[timljae, 



I'adreMe, 
' da depntey 
, beancoap, 



the linfn, 

this TM yWi^- 
[face, 
what a £be 

his dress. 

entirely. 

I prefior. 

[or dress, 
the costome, 

lalsa 

[tome, 
what a &ie 

this discourse. 

the address, 
[or delegate, 
of the deputy 

mach. 



molna, 
qioelbd 
aparalty 



encore pine, 

[Tons? 

coiuialieea> 



it 

stm 

know you? 



[child, 
what a tn» 



i6tt6r, mMfiB|** 

nfooflu BV^feMMEm* 

pif^' •••.... • wora& piif* • •wone. 

M^mmmab, te mora vMMd. tatM^moL ftrmmlMd. 

momdrtf len, moms, len, 

phmptUL temoraaiOi. totjtmpn. ftrmonUtflt. 

The Englith huignage having only the ihree words, better, wane, and 



&K,tO 

I taut ~ 



he English huignage havmg only the ihiee words, hettei 
to lender tibese oompanthre a^jectiTes and adreihg, it is 
tiiat the teacher should explain them often. 



yeiy nnpor- 



DICTiSE No. 9. 
mOKTEEADJECmVES. FAOsTa 

Lelinge est-il sec? Cette ser- 
Metteest^eOeeeche? Qudle belle 
figure Oreoqae. Est-ceimOrec? 
Je le croisi son habillement est en- 
tidrement Orec. Je pr^f^ le 
OQBtume Tare, mol aussL . Qaelle 
bdle tcmiqae Torque! Ce dis- 
cours est on peu long. Comment 
^taitFadressedud^pot^? Beauconp 
moins longne. Qad bel enfant! 
il paiait malin. Otu, sa scenr est 
Ik has, elle est encore plus mallgne 
que loL Connaissez-yond lenr p^ ? 
Oui, nn pea trop, c'est un homme 
tr^ fltnz. Cette personne est en- 
core pins fiillMe. 



L 



w 



88 


FBBKOH BPOKKV. 


Ibbegulas Fexik 


OF THE ADJECTIVE. 


an^'—Dime, dotue,' /atori, faeoriti i jwrmw, >tMwB>. 


VOCABULARY. ( 


DICTiJE No. 10. 
ptOM THE i4 A^C!77FZrA Page 78. 

Panvre petit gar^on, £1 ne plenre 
jamais, il est donz comme nn ag- 
QOfui. Yoyez Em^Iie ooomie fl est 
ob^issanty fl faut tdeher d'etre aossi 
donee qneloL Ceten&ntestTotre 
ffllTOrl, mals sa soeiir est loin d%tre 
Totre fiiTorite, dites-moi poarqaoi? 
Cependant fls sont Jnmeanx. Le 
premier Jnmean est d'mie fort 
bonne sant^ le second est toqjoiiis 
malade; c'est le eontraire do oes 
deux demoiseUes: la premi^ Jn« 
meUe eist d*mie ttha fiiible sant^ 
la seconde finest jamais malade. 


panvre petit, 

fl ne plenre 

conmie, 

nn agnean, 

obeisaant, 

tache, 

aiuHd douce qae, 

est tola d'etre. 

[quol? 
dites-mef pear* 

cependant, 

[trure, 
c'eat le oon- 

fldble, 


poor Utile. 

[er. 
he cries nev- 

hoiwit 

obedient 

tiy. 

as mild as. 

is fiur of to 

ten me why? 

however. 

[traiy. 
itistheoon- 

weakyfeeble. 


• .•«••• 











BDWABD OHVBOH'B 8T8TEM. 89 || 




OF TE(B ABJECHVE. 1 


BuuB TO VOBM THS l^BiDHiin.— IXwrN; ditcfiU; tugmMy mqmke; eampkif eampOUf prdj 1 
jprlte. These foHow the aame role as p«ge 79, except the accent. 1 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICTEB No. 11. 


i fea sidfl mr, 


[sure. 
I of it am 


• 




ooDeotloii, 


ooDee&m. 






KoDsiear Charles sojes disCKi 




entiziQf^. . 






anssi discrete qae possible. Yotre 
pk« ^tait-fl inquiet? Pas trop, 
mais XDA mbre dtait ties likii|Uletea 
Cetoavrageest^lGonil^let? Oni, 










j*en sols sftr, mais la collection n'est 
pas entiferement oomplete. &tes- 
▼oos prett OoL Yotre femme 
est^De preteT Jelepeose. 









12 



do 


FRENCH BPOKEK, | 


Affile and tngambe follow tl 


OF THE ADJECnVB. 


be first rule; they are of both genden. DUpo9 and /tf have no 


feminine. NtUe has no masculine. . 1 


VOCABULABY. 


DICXiSE No. 12. 


^ 






[nent 


qnelage, 


what age. 


A Impertfaienti 


so imperii- 

[fiee. 
what signi- 




apt-U? 


has he? 


que aignifle, 


Quel Ago a-t-il? Environ qnatre- 


6]ITiM8l9 


about 


le mot, 


thewwd. 


vingtKanqans. Estpneaoereaglle, 


Jclnq, 


eighty-five. 


a Tent dire, 


itmeaai^ 


Ingambe? Oui, 11 est encore tr^ 
diapoa pour soi^ Age. OounaiBses- 


mm, 
chagrin, 


yean, 
grief. 


trpp mnr, 

[ploie, 
et il ne a'em- 


too ripe. 

[ployed, 
anditkem* 


V0U8 son fils? Oni, c^est mi grand 
flit qui'fiut beancoup de chagrm k 


Yenerablei 


venerable. 




never* 


son vdn^rable p^re. J'ai toujonrs 


' ^ V 






[eoline. 


pens< qoll serait mi sol, le voyant 


peii»e,(pp.) 


thought 
[would be. 


anmaacidln, 


in the aiM- 


si mani^ si vain, A impertinent 


quHl serait, 


that he 

[tnie. 
a aillj creap 


dltea, 


say. 


Que sigdfie le mot Uetle? H 


iin sot, 


Jen'aimepaa, 


Idonotlikeb 


veut dire tiop mfir, et ne s'emploie 










jamais an mascnlin. Dites: Je 


le Toyant, 


himseebg. 


lea polrea, 


thepean. 


n'aime pas les pokes blettea. 


al manlerey 


•0 affected. 


Uettea, 


soft. 




it Tain, 


•ovaiii. 






<. 









®ui^e 



so XBS 

FIBST CONJUGATION IJS EB. 

REeUL&R VERBS. 



92 



FRENCH 8P0KBN. 



FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 



Je otaante 
Tu "eg. 

H, eUe " e. 
Nous " oils. 
Vous " ez. 
Bflyelles << ent. 



NigaHvemenL 

Je ne chante pas. 

Ta ne chantes pas. 

D, eUe ne chante pas. 
Nona ne chantonspas. 
Vous ne chantez pas. 
Ilfl^ dies ne chantentpas. 



IttierrogaUvemenL 

Chantd-je? 
Chantes-tU 7 
Chante-t-il? 
Cfaantons-noos ? 
Chaate^-Tons 7 
Chaatent-Os 7 



IfigaUvemeni ^ interrog. 

ne cbant^-Je pas? 

ne chaates-tU pas? 

ne chante-t-il pas? 

ne chantonfr-nOOS pas? 

ne chantez-YOns pas? 

ne chaQtent-ils pas 7 



£%Jln%iif. Participe pritenL ParticipejMUsS. 

ANT 

vtO \ Ins /^ (perfect) 




EDWABD GHUBOH-8 BTBTEU. 



93 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 

IxTLAXxnoK ov THB GuiDB. — Ef, pliiced after all the following. Terbs, shows that they aro in ike infinitiTe mood, 
as in English when tiie preposition to is pboed before a yerbw Cat oJBTar from all these reihe, and yon will hare the 
roots chcmi, dtmm, demand^ etc Add to these roots ant, and they will become present partidpkM, chaniant, doimcmtj de- 
ntmritutf, singing, giving, asking. If you add ^instead of aitf, (mg,) they will becoiiie past particles, ckcuM, dnm£^ de- 
mcmd/y sung, given, asked. Thus, in adding to the root the terminations of the indiatUoef iatperfect^ pnuiite, fidun, 
ctmdiUonal, cto, contained in this Guide, tiie whole coigngation will be obtained.* 



VOCABULARY. 



chanter, 
' donner, 
demandcTf 
saater, 
fraj^wr, 
porter, 
parkr, 
aborder, 
marclur, 
cherchcTy 
former, 
: anU>riMr, 
■joueU, 



TO 

sing, 

give. 

asL 

jump. 

knock. 

carry. 

speak. 

land. 

wfdk. 



deekylookfor dlBfl] 



fomu 

authorue. 

playthings. 



flatter, 
dedalgner, 
trains, 
InYenter, 
ainur, 
pemwr, 
entrer, 
arriTer, 
▼laiter, 
iff 



dejemur, 

remarqncr, 

moyen, 



TO 

flatter. 

draw. 

invent. 

love. 

think. 

enter. 

arrive. 

visit 

dine. 

break&st 

[tice. 
remark, no- 



DICT^E No. 1. 
FROM THE QI7IDE IN ER Paob 9a 

Voire ch^re enfant cat tr^ lieur- 
enae id; elle phante du matin an 
soir. Mais bientdt elle demandera 
sa bonne m^re. Elle almo beau- 
coup Julie, elle lui a dODne la 
rnoiti^ de see jouets. Quand pen* 
•ez-TOna venir? Si jeudi pro- 
chain vons n'^tes pas id, Je vous 
assure que vendredi matin fanlY- 
erai avec les deux enfaos. t 



means. 



RRMAMf. — Le, h, r,ks, connected 
with TerlM, are jpitmoans instead of 
aiticles, as In Table No. 1, where 
they are connected with sabstaiitiTesi 
Ze,b,r, 2ai,an dwajs placed before 
the refh in ample tenses, and before 
the anziliaty In compound tenses : 

JelatAaMU, Je red chaniA 

I it sing. I it hare rang. 
r« ledomm}i Urn Jrht, 

Thou it glrest to tiiy hrofher. 
Tu fas doim€ h ton fi^re. 

Thou it has giren to thy mther. 



* The compound tenses axe, as In 
ag^uh, formed with one of the 
anxuiaries and tiie past participle of 
the Tcib co^jogatea with it : 
I have giren. I shall have giren. 
J*oi donnt* J*oupai doiw^w 



We ne dtimtee pae. Chcade^'ilf Ne 
thandbA.'dte paef I^ ne doimes pae. D(mn&' 
t-dlet Ne dorm&d-dlet pae aux pauomt 



9i 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAB VERBS IN ER. 



The verbs tenninated in ger, as the following, take an e after the g before the letters Sf o : 
naui partagwmif we partake; U ju^ea^ he jod^d. 



VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 2. 


. 


TO 




1 TO 


ttffliSVf 


afflict 


partagor, 


partake. 


FROMTUBGXJIDBIN£fi. Pao>92. 


allegsTi 


li^iten. 


pkmger, 


plunge. 


Nous voos offltg^^m** toajonrs 


anonger, 


lengthen. 


pMtegvr, 


protect 


sans la moindre mtention. Je ne 


arranger^ 
ohaagsTf 


arrange, 
change. 


rangsr, 
ravagery 


range, 
ravage. 


aongeal pas k la droonstance que 
voos mentionnez. Jngez-nous on 
peamienxune aatrefois. Aujonr- 


oorrlger, 




rongerf 


gnaw. 


dlini nous demenageona. Ou 


interrogor, 


interrogate, 
judge. 


songwr, 
aarnagBrt 


dream. 

[over, 
floaty swim 


firadrapt-Q ranger tons vos meaUes? 
Nous Ohangeona beancoap de vie- 
illes choses qui ne peuvent pins ser- 


manger, 


eat 


▼anger, 


avenge. 


vir. Nous TOyageona ensemble. 


menageri 

demenagsri 

emmeiiager, 


economize. 

move. 
1 tnrB fai order, 
place fiimi- 


▼oyager. 


(travel 
(voyage. 


Arrangaona tout de mani^ k 

psrtir bient6t Voulez-vous ? • 


nag«r, 


swinL 
















nceatirely, IntorrogadTeiy, and ncgatird/ 
andintenogaaTely. 



EDWARD church's SYSTEM. 95 1 


oonjuqat: 

The veite terminated in cei 
turn pktfonSf he menaced, w 


[ON OF THE BEGULAB YEBBS IN ER. 


r take a cedilla mider the C (9) before the letters a, o: II menofa, 
B place. 


VOCAB 


ULARY. 


DICTfeE No. 8. 




TO 




TO 


a^ancer, 


adTanoe. 


placer, 


place. 


BSOMTHBaun>BIN£& PiaSS. 


amorcery 


allnre. 


promypoflTi 


pionoonce. 


Avangoiuidoacement Jepto- 


balanceri 


balanoe* 


renoncer. 


renoonce. 


Qai toot snrcette table. Benfixn- 


dlYorcery 


divorce, 
sow (seeds). 


tracer. 


trace. 


9a la porte, ensoite nous gla^&mes. 
Lan^oiui la flfeche. ATant» tra- 


fntcniflaotty 






gona sor le sable Tendroit oil nous 


;e]ifoiiccr» 


glut. 






toeroerons le trou. PerQcma le 


forcer, 


force. 






maintenant. Nous rCDOllQaillca 
h ce projet plasieurs fois. 


.gercw, 


chap. 






FtonoilQOlia qnelqaes mots; 


glacer, 


freeze. 






s'ib viennent menagoiia de &ire 


inflaenccr, 


influenoe. 






fen. 


1 lancer. 


dart, 
[threaten. 








percer, 


loeroe. 








' 9 











96 VBENOH 8POKEK. 


CONJUGATION OF TUE REGULAB VERBS IN ER. 


ChanU^ donne^ dmandi^ momUj frappi^ parlij diharquSf marM. . 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTiSE No. i. 










de I'argent, 

pttT 1ft ftMtl0| 

ftTotreporte, 


somdiiioiiey. 
[window, 
oat of tbe 

atyonrdoor. 


one bonne, 
del mmvallasy 
enr Ilierbe, 


aporae. 
soma news, 
on the grass. 


FROM THB GUIDE IN £12. Paos92. 

J'ai chante. «rai donn^ Tu 

as demande de I'argent 11 a 


Chez ) 


to her 


sa tete^ 


her head. 


santeparlafen^tre. Ilaflrapi>e 


Mmerey ) 

an, (m.) 


mother^B. 
to the. 


daasaos tees, 
de sftmaladiei 


in our anns. 

[ness. 

of her sick- 


k Totre porta. Nous avona porle 
la petite fille ches sa m^re. Vous 
avez parle au fermier. lis ont 


fbrmier, 


fanner. 


Londi demler, 


lastMonday. 


debarqne k New York. Elles 


aNewYork, 
tres lola, 
petite, 


atNewYotk 

Teiy&r. 

Iftde. 


Blaidipaaee, 
■eieredl soIti 
Tendl matin, 


[past. 
Tuesday 

[evening. 
Wednesday 

[morning. 
Thursday 


ont marche trte loin. Je n*ax pas 
chante. Je ne lui ai pas donne. 


QUESTIONS. 


me, 


giri* 


danel'aiireM) 
midi, 


[noon, 
in the after- 


Qn'ayez-Tons chante? 


Samedl, 
mie ramaace, 


Satardaj. 
awQg. 


DtaBaBcte loiri 


[evenmg. 
Sunday 


Qn'aTez-Yona donne? 
Qn'as-tn demande ? 
Par on a^-t-fl sante? 










A. qnelle porte a^-t-ll flraK>e? \ 






On ayez-Yona ix>rte la petite ' 






flUe? 






A. qni ayez-Tona parle? 


i 


'*» 


On ont-Ua debarqne? 



:dward church's btsteu* 



97 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



The rerhs in er^ which Imve the last syllable of the ui/SntMM preceded by a close e (^)y change it 
into an open e (e) before a mute syllable : eHer^je eile; r^ter^ je repkerai; aUererj faUirerai; 
eideTy je c^derm. 





VOCABULARY, 




altera, 


TO 

alter. 


perseTara, 


TO 

perseyere. 


cedeTy 


yield. 


preferer, 


prefer. 


celebra, 


celebrate. 


regner, 


reign. 


celer, 


conceal, hide 


reveler, 


reveaL 


conaldmry 


consider. 


tempenr, 


temperate. 


decedcTi 


decease. 


tolerer. 


tolerate. 


decelcTi 


discover. 


repetsr. 


repeat. 


enqdetff. 


encroach. 






eipenr, 


hope. 






ezcedcTi 


exceed. 






inqnietir, 


disquiet 


. * • • • . 




modmr, 


moderate. 






opera, 


operate. 







DICTEE No. 6. 
FROM THE QinDE IK EK l^Aon 99. 

Je repete totgours la mdme 
chose parce que vons pr^f^rez ne rien 
fatre qne de vous occuper. J'es- 
pere cependant qne voos con- 
aidererez la question arant do 
toUrer nn send>lable abns. Je pei^ 
seYere h op^rer de la mdme mani- 
^re. Je celeiai toute ma vie, ce 
secret, h moins que Tons ne d^siriez 
qne je le deoele. 



QUESTIONS. 

Poorqiiol est-ce que Je re* 
pete taudoan la meme chose 7 
Quecoiuiidereress-Toiiu? De 
quelle manlere est-ce que 
J'opere? Que celerez-Yone 
toate Totre vie? A moinm 
que qaoi? 



18 



98 



FBBKOH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OP THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



The YerbB in er, which have a mnte e preceding the last sjUahle of the inJmiUvej change it 
into an open e (jb) before a mate syllable : dipecer^ Ji diphce; enkvetj fenlevej fenRverat. 



depeocTy 
enldTBTi 



peser, 
pratudifirf 



rdervt 



VOCABULARY. 



TO 

tear in pieces 
elope, 
lift np. 
lead, 
weig^ 
walk. 

bring bade, 
picknp. 



DICTJfeE No. 6. 
FROM THE GUIDE IN£& Faok92. 

Je depeoerals cette volaiDe en 
moins de temps qne Tons. J^enle- 
veraia d*abord Faile. Je me le- 
▼erais de bonne heore si j'^taisk 
la campagne. Je xneneralft ime 
vie dffidease. Je me promeiie- 
rals da matin an soir. Je sois sfir 
qa^en qadqaes mens je peserab 
?ingt oa trente liyres de phia. Si 
j'y vaifl je rameneral votie fils. 
Votre fille est-elle partie? Voos 
saves bien qa'eDe reteva da soar 
ladie. 



SDWABD OHUBOH'B 8TBTEM. 99 


OONJUGAn 
The verbs in eter or elei 


ON OF THE BEGUTiAR VERBS IN ER. 


*, as Bcheterj becquetor, amoncebr, appefer, take tt or 11 before a 


' mute e: yadwUe, il heoqaeUe^ yamonceb, j'appe&rot, etc 




VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No* 7. 




TO 




TO 


lachetcTi 


boy. 


anumcelir, 


heqpnp. 


raOM THE GUiDK USER CAAaaa. 


becquetCTi 


pecL 


appetoi 


calL- 




cacheter. 


seal 


attekr, 


pot hones. 


vanx? Je pipjette d'en acheter 


decacheteri 


iinseaL 


epeler, 


spelL 


qnelques nns sons pen* Je desire 
rappeler k votre soavenir les deux 


' funpttHttctey 


pack up. 


etincdff, 


sparUe. 


miensy doot je toqs ai parl& Je ne 


1 CpOHMlfftflff 


dnst* 


floeIfir» 


tie*- 


me nqppelle pas les avoir vns* Ce 


MtpoteHtttf 


lalieL 


geler, 


freeze. 


9oir je les attelleral et vons les 
am^eraL Adieu, je vons quitte. 


feaffletet 


torn over* 


%arcelflr, 




n fant que je oachette cette lettre, 


ftnetafi 


search* 


pekr, 


peaL 


et qua je la mette h la poste* J'ai 


JetOy 


throw* 


rappebr, 


recaU* 


anssikempaquetermeseffets* Vou- 
lez-vous que je les enqiaqaetteT 


projeto, 


project- 


reiioinr6luti 


renew* 


Non, merd, je les empaqaetlerai 


rejebr, 


throw back.* 


' 




moi-^otaie. 










i 



100 


VBEKOH 8POKBK. 1 


00NJUGAT3 
The verbs which have Hie ; 


[ON OF THE BEGULAB VERBS IN ER. 


n-esent parUdpU in lant, as the following verbs, take llin the first 


and second person plural of the imperfeety (indicative mood,) and also in the jpre$eni of the sab- || 


jnnctive: prier^notupriiims; lietj nomUums; vouipriiez^ vow Ktez; qttenaut Hums; que pous hiez. 1 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTEE No. 8. 




TO 




TO 


ante, 


mizi mute* 


llir, 


bind. 


FROM THE GinDE IN ER Taqh 92. 


ampUflBTf 


amplify. 


duuiIbFi 


touch. 


H &at que nous prlions avec ' 


apprectoi 


iqppxedate. 


negoctoi 


negotiate. 


phis de ferveiir. H^ est stiie que 


Msocieri 


associate. 


nleri 


denj. 


vous sacrlflfez plus de temps k 










vos devoirs. Je veuz que vous eta- 


bpnlfltfi 


mipiove. 


parlfir, 


bet 


dliez davantage. H est li piopos 


cerUflnr, 


certify. 


pibr, 


bend. 


que nous Taitiioiui noi titavamc, que > 


colorbr. 


lay on colors. 


sacrUbfi 


sacrifice. 


nous yerlfllons les comptes tous 


^ 




, 




les soirs. U &XLt, diaqne fois, que 


deortoi 


make odious. 


ttnipllflflrf 


smipibfy* 


vous oerUlliez que vous les avez 


dedto, 


dedicate. 


rappUflri 


supplicate* 


TM. 


etadleri 


stadj. 


t^rrlitoi 


terrify. 




ezpisr, 


expiate. 


▼artBTf 


vary. 




gratlflBTi 


gratify. 


▼erlfflff, 


verify. 




Initier, 


initiate. 



















XDWASB OHUBOH'S BTSTSM. ^^^11 


OONJUGAT] 

The tsrbe wbich have the s 
first person ctihe tnmeffieif {i 

' y into an i before a mute e: • 


[ON OS* THE BEGITT.AB 


VERBS m ER. 
e following verbs, take y and 1 in the 

pez. Besides, these verbs change the 

etc 


remUjiHuiieipb in yant, as th 

adicadve mood,) and also in Uu 
ifuenouBbalajfianajquevombaht 


VOCABULARY, 


DICTfjB No. 9. 




i» 




TO 


balajBT, 


sweep. 


lOllTOyOFy 


beatabont 


FROM THE GUIDE INJBfi. Fam 92. 


begajBTf 


sft&iomei* 


nettoyv, . 


dean. 


Je venz que voos balaylez le 


ootoyv, 


ixueb 


noyoTy 


drowxk 


bureau tons Iti matins. H fimt que 


comdoyiTi 


eflbow. 
defiray. 


octroywi 
ployer, 


grant 
bendarfold. 


nous netUgioiUi tons oes menbles, 
que nous ploylons tons ces papiers, 
et Tous, que vous emi^oylez la 


aeiagnrf 


dilnte. 


nidi^ywy 


nsexoog^y* 


mating k dtfpbyer ceux-d. Est-il 


deployefi 
tefDrayeri 


display. 
uJghteiL 




thofo. 


utae que nous eMMjioiUi ces ha- 
bits? Non,mettejsle8*dans]es lar- 
(urs de la oommode mais avant 


lempkiTV, 


fBBXplojm 






esDujfOii les. 


1 eniiiiyUi 


wenj oxxL 








eMayVf 


tiy. 


• ••••• ' 


• • p . • . 




etiiqnri 


w^ 








Igwwayw, 


Bsp. 












• Ztt (oUectitv) ii dwm plaeed sAv 
LmiB phMsedf^eforo thsrat) in the m- 



FBBNOH 8P0KX] 



102 



CONJUGATION OF THE BEGULAB YESES IN 



The verbs which are tenninated in eer, aa crier^ agri0ry take 66 throogh the whole coigtigatioii : 
Je criej iu cr4e^^ je creeraiy jt critraU^ nau» cr4erian8f etcL, except before the Vowels a, Oy i : Je 
creaij ttaus credmeij nous creanSf vcui crUex. The pott partieiplej in the feminine gender, takes 
eee : une proposition agriee. Thus are conjugated the four following verbs. 



VOCABULARY. 



agrecr, 
creer, 



rappleer, 



TO 

accept, 
create, 
recreate, 
supply. 



* /2dbn^ xneans to r;|bftp0^ fo tfw/Soy. 



avec gratltiidey 
ie]um7ell6»(f) 
ii]iDoinreaiiy(m) 
liurtituUoii9(f) 



(0 
pensioDf (f) 
a tout, 
iM beaoliMi 
|leiinbefl<rf]ia, 
detroit (e), 
ohoaeaf 
deaqaeHeay 



[tude. 
with grati- 

anew. 

anew. 

InstitatioiL 

papeMnilL 

proposaL 

schooL 

toalL 

the wants. 

their wants. 

destiojed. 

things. 

of whidu 



DICTiSE No. 10. 
FROM THE GUIDE IN EK Paob 92. 

J'aooepte votre bonne offine avec 
gratitude. JTai cree irnfi nooveDe 
institution dans oette viUe. J'ai re- 
oree le moulin k papier. Je aap- 
pleerai k tous les besoins. Il| 
acoeptenut votre proporition. Qre- 
ona une nouvelle pension id. II 
faut que nous BO^elimsk tout II 
fallait que nous agreaaafOBB 2tla 
premiere oflft«. Les institBtions odI 
ix& creeea, d^tmites et reoreees. 
Toutes les choses dont vous parlez 
ont it& auppleeea. I 



mm 



BDWABD OHXTBOH'8 8T8TBM. 



103 



OONJUQATION OF THE SE0T7LAB YEEBS TN ER. 



Je duoBHU: <tf ne dannu p(u; demande44lt ne MoutanMunu pas? vomfixgppez; mareka94ul 



VOCABULARY. 



anx pamM^ 

[qa^eUes, 
plus lurat 

a la porte, 

pendant, 

dm lavoUMi 

tovto hnmla, 

a Be cacher, 

ce projet, 

la ni0Bi6f 

a ftlre, 

cette, (f.) 



1688 oAeD* 

to the poor, 
[mother? 
where is his 
[they, 
higher than 

at the door. 

[daring, 
whilst, 

[hoi's, 
at the neigh- 
all Ihewaj. 
[sel£ 
to hide him- 

thispiojecL 
the 
to do. 
this. 



reolierclie, 
qiea ^1% 



quest 
my sons. 



DICT^E No. 11. 
FROM THE GUIDK IN^iZ. Paob 9S. 

Je cliante moins soavent mainte- 
nant. Tu ne donnea IMUI beaa- 
ooop anx panvxes. DQniande«i*ll 
oh est sa m^re? Ne saatona- 
nona paa plus haut qu'elles? 
Vona flrappiez k la porte pen- 
dant qu'ils portalent Tenfant chez 
la Yoisine. Je n^'abordai paa k 
New York. Marchaa-ta toute 
la rente? Ne oliercliaii4-U paa 
k 80 cacher ? Nona fimnamea 
ee projet; formatea-Yona le 
mdme? Ha n'antorlaerent paa 
mes fils k fidre eette xeefaerdie. 



104 FBBNCH 8POKXK, 


CONJUGATION OF TU£ BE6ULAB VERBS IN SB. 


Qt^dle awmee; quenaui amarcumi b ffiUer ; que vain balanciex; qu'ili divarcent; quefm- 


frnpasHf etc 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT1:£ No. 12. 
VBOM THE GUIDE JSER Pjuu92. 


cet onvrage, 


thiawork. 


mettez^ 


put 


n 08t a propo8| 


it is proper. 


Totre, 


your. 


11 faiit qa'elle aTance eet ou- 


le gibier. 


the mine. 

[proper. 
it is right, or 


mftiWj 


hand. 


Trage. 11 est Ik propos que nooa 


U convient, 


m M^ftH^yy. 


muffi 


amorcioil8 le gllner; 11 amvient 




[counts. 




[pen. 


que Yoiia balanci^s oes oomptes 


ces compteSf 

A 


these ac- 


11 fie pomait, 


it might hap- 


anjourd'hui mtoe. U fant absolu- 


[memei 
a^jourdliiii j 


[thisreiyday. 
to daj itself, 


pent-etre, 


perhaps. 

[sufficient 
it would be 


ment qa^'Ufl divorcent. B ne 


absolimieiity 


absolutely. 


il BOfObtdti 


pensait pas qae fenfonfiasse la 




[think, 
he did not 






porte. Je ne savais pas que tn ' 


SiiepeiisaltpaB 


lesjngca, 


the judges. 


ensemeiiQaaaes si t6t Poutus- 


la porte^ 


the door. 






je deviner qa*|l forgat ma caisse? 


JeneBaralspas, 


I did not 






A 


. -'^. 








choui il se pourrait qa'elle ger^aty 


Bitot, 

[▼Iner, 
paiiTai8-j6 de- 


so soon. 






peut-6tre qa'elle gla«at. B suf- 


oooldlgaess 






firait que Yooa infloencasurieB 


ma calsse, 


mjcash. 






les juges. 









SDWAHD CHUKCH'S SYSTEM. 



CONJUGATION OP THE REGULAB VERBS IN 



105 



FloMerm-je. Didaignera94»? 7\rainerart4l? InvmOerori'dUl Ihm afflifferom. Vom al- 
Ugertz. Ik allongeronL JEQes carrctnfferani^ etc 



VOCABULARY. 



Fio- 



IIOtr6 CSBBTf 

an trfbnna], 
nn noayean, 
rnoycn, 
II08 iMurens, 
n'y alhnis pas, 
lep0tit bateau, 
la route, 
pour eviter, 
le sable, 
poor le Toyagei 
cet enfimt, 



[self-love. 
his or her 

our dinner. 

[naL 
to the tribn- 

anew. 



onr parents, 
[notga 
there let us 
[boat 
the litde. 

[tance. 
the wajy dis- 



foT to avoid, 
the sand. 

[MV.VOTBge 

for the jour' 
this child. 



cee hommea, 

aiiud, 

da C6S pobaona) 

uotre argent, 



these men. 

thus. 

[fishes, 
of these 

[or silver, 
oor monej, 



DICTiSE No. 18. 

FBOM THE GUIDE TS ER Paox 92. 

flatterai-Je son amour proprc? 
Dedaigneraa-ta noire diner ? 
Trainera-t^ll son fr^ au tribu- 
nal? InTenterapt^Ue un nou- 
veau mojen ? Nona aflUgerona 
nos parens, n'j allons pas. VoTia 
allegerez le petit bateau. Ha 
allongeront la route pour ^viter 

le sable. Ellea arrangeront 
tout pour le voyage. 

Ne ohangeraia-Je paa ? Ne 
corrlgeraia-ta paa cet enfant? 
Interrogerait-il ces hommes? 
Jugerlona-nona ainsi? Man- 
geriez-TOTia de ces poissons? 
Menageraieni*lla notre argent? 



u 



106 



FBESrOH 8FOKEX7. 



CONJUGATION OF THE BE6ULAB YESBS IN 



Ne nage pas. Jfe forUtgecm pas. Proiige ta 
Queje sonffej,^c. 



icntr. JEUmgwm-ncfM. Ne ranagez poM. 



VOCABULARY. 



cette riviere, this river. 

a present, at present. 

dans oet endnitt|in this place. 

ta 8C0iir, 

ces ehaimileieif 

anlemdematii, 

IMiuralte, 

qa'on, 

nouaafidte, 

troia moia, 

aa aante, 

aoit, maybe. 

entierement, entirelj. 



thj sister. 
^ [tages. 
these oot- 

[day. 
to Hie next 

the insult. 

that one. 

[made, 
to OS has 

three months 
[health, 
his or her 



retablie, 
la baa, 
quefidt-U? 
on oa, 



restored, 
yonder. 



[do? 



abone. 



DICTEE No, 14. 
ESOK THE GOUDE IN J5!& PioxSa. 

Ne nage paa dans oette rivifare. 
whatdoMhellNe partageona paa k present 



Ne pkmgez I>aa dans oet endroit. 

protege ta mm. Rangeona- 
nons id Ne raTagez paa oes 
chaomik-es. n&atqae Je aonge 
an lendemain. II importe que ta 
Tengea Flnsulte qa'on nous a faite. 
n soffit qui! voyage trois mois, 
pour que sa sant^ soit enticement 
ritablie. Oil est mon chien? Lk 
has. Que fidt-il done? H ronge 
on 06. 



%ntpAm Vt^& 



07 



THE FIRST CONJUGATION.* 



• Uae tlM same Guidb as for the RsainjLB Ybbbs. 



108 



VBENCR 8POKEX. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERB TO GO-^KLLESL 



This verb takes the auxiliary verb to he (itre) in its compound tenses. All the moods and tenses ; 
of the irregular verbs of this conjugation are formed as the regular verbs ; that is to say,' by adding 
the terminations of the Gkiide to the root The exceptions are contained in this vocabulary. 



VOCABULARY. 



aUeri 
Je yals, 
ta vas, 
Uya, 

lis YODt, 

firal, 
ta Iras, 
UIra, 

noiui Irons, 
Tonslress, 
ila iront, 
▼a, 

rMUlar. 

alionfl, 



toga 

[amgomg.) 
I go, (for I 

thou goest 

he goes. 

they go. 

Ishallgo. 

thou wilt ga 

he will go. 

we shall go. 

you will go. 

they will go. 

go (thou) 

let us go. 



que faille, 
que ta allies, 
qa'U allle, 
que now anions 
qae voui allies, 
qalls anient. 



chercher. 



go (you, ye) 

[go. 

that I may 

[mayest go. 

that thou 

[go- 
that he may 

[go- 
that we may 

[go. 

that you may 

[may go. 

that they 



[for, fetch, 
to seek, look 



e J^ot d^tua$it€,Uaa/, tta, are 
employed to show that the penon is 
returned from the place wnere she 
went 7/ eKdZ^. indicates that the 
person is not retamed. 

t The second person singolar of 
the imperative takes an t omy when 
tfao following word is en or y. 



DICT^E No. 1. 

FBOM THB IRREGULAR VERB 
TO GO. 

Jndxe. Je TSil dans la dasse. 

Nfalar. 

Imperf. J'allais k la pension. 

nifBlMr. 

Pret. d. J'idlai k la promenade. 
Pret. in. Je suis all^, ou all^* 
IhOure, J^ini, til Ini. 
Chnd. J^indlytlliTailklacompagne. 
Impera. TB) allons, aUes. 

^.p. (liiej'iiiDe. 
Lnperf. Quej'Slaase. 



Jeyale. Tavae. Ilya. Nous 
allons. Voiuiallez. IhiTont. 
Jeeniialle. JPaiete.* Jfrai 
k Paris, nraiedanslaville* Va 
chercher ton fr^; yae-yt ^ite. 
Je n'ai paa d'argent; Tas-en chei^ 
cher. H veut qae faille chez moi. 
n ezige qae ta y allies, n fant 
qae nooa y i>lH^n# ensemble. 
Je desire qae vooa alllez avec 
mon fils. Je veux qalls alllent 
k r^glise maintenant II fallait qae 
f allaasey les voir chague jour. 



EDWABD church's SYSTEM. 



temsoBtm 



109 



CONJUGATION OP THE lEREGDLAB VERB TO GO AWAT—B'ES ALLER. 



This peflectiTe verb is conjugated as the preceding. 



VOCABULARY. 



•'en aSkHf 
Je m*eii yals, 
ta t'en ran, 
U s'en va, 

eOe s'en ya, 

IToi» 
nou nous en ai- 
de*, 
1 al- 



Je m'ea allato, 
Je m'en allal, 
Je m'en flia, 
Je m'en aula 
aUe on allee, 



to go away, 
lam going ^ 
thougoest '^ 
he goes 
she goes 
we go 
you go 
they go 
I went 
I went 
I went. 

f I have 



Je m'en iral, 
tn t'en Iraa, 



il a'en ira, 

[Irona, 
none nona en 

[Irezy 
vooa YOQM en 



; 



[away 
Ishallgo 



thou wilt go <" 
he will go » 
we shall go^ 
youwfllgo^ 

ila a'en iront, they wiUgo'' 

va-t'eni 

albnu-neas ea, 
eB| 

am< 



allec-iFoaa 

[aiue, 
que Je m'en 
[aiUea, 
qne ta t'en 



qii'il B'enaUle, 



go thou 

let us go ^ 

go yoo, ye " 

that I may 
[may est go '< 
that thou 

[go 
that he may 



DICTiiE No. 1. 

FROM THE IRBE6ULAB VERB 
TO GO AWAY. 

Indic. Ib m'en TBil Chez moL , 

regnlaiw 

Imperf. Je m'en allais chez toi. 



Prel. d. Je m'en allai chez lui. 
Pret. tn. Je m'en suis all^ chez elle. 
Future^ Je m'en ind chez nous. 
Cond. Je m'NL inds chez vous. 

Impera. Tft-fen, aDons-nons en, aUez- 
TOni en chez eux. 

/>. (toe je m'en tOk chez eUes. 

Imperf. Que je m'en allasse. 



n faut qne Je m'en aille d'ici 

1^ cinq heurcs. Allez-VOUa en 
maintenant si vous ddsirez. Mon 
ami Ya-t'en h, r^cole tout dc suite. 
Je m'en Iral apr^s d<Sjeuner. D^- 
jeune2 yite ton cousin et toi. Main- 
tenant aUez-Yons en. 



110 VBEKCa SPOKEN. 


CONJUGATION OF THE ntBEOUTJkB YESB TO SXND—tNVOYSSL 


Before a mute 


e, the 7 18 to be changed into an 1: femnne^ etc 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No- 1. 










J'enyerral, 


to send. 
IshaU ^ ' 






FROM THB IRBEGIILAB VEBB 
TO SEND. 


tu enverraSf 
U enyerra, 
elle enverra, 
now 0iifoiroii8| 

TODS 0IIVOR0Z| 

lis envwronti 


thOQWiU* 

hewfll « 
ahewfll << 
weahaU ^ 
youwfll « 
theywfll" 






Jkdie. fmOt k la poete. 

Imperf. J'envoyaiB nne lettro k la 
pension. 

PnL d. J'envoyai h Boston la se- 
maine derniire. 

^Vee. in. J^ai envoys nion fils kN. T. 
FkUuref roiTenai mafille en France. : 
CbmL J^onsmli mes fib en Lafie. 


elles enrtPTont, 


they win « 






^ftpsm. ElTOuy envoyons, enyoyes,. 
ees UTres. 

&f^'./>.(lnej'eiiToie. 

In^^erf. Qae j'envo^use. 


H fant que f eUTote ehes moo j 
onde savoir de ses ncmTelles. Je 










bier. D^pdchons-nous d'eilToyer 






aTant qaH soit pins taid. Oa en- 1 






voyez-YOUS? QnandenTeFrez-l 
VOIW ehes Totre onde? A present' 






Doones-moi Totre lettre fy ^aas. 



112 



rSKNCH 8P0KEK. 



TABLE No. 6. 



POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 



MON, my. 

Before all nouns mascu. 

or fern., beginning with 

a vowel or h mute. 



epanle, (£) 
corps, (m.) 
menton, (m) 
pied, (m.) 
ponce, (m.) 
oreUle, (f.) 
poing, * (m.) 
poignett(m.) 
conde, (m.) 
bras, (m.) 
talon, (m.) 
cote, (m*) 



CO] 



(m.) 



shoulder 
body. 

Foot. 

thumb. 

ear. 

fist. 

wrist. 

elbow. 

arm. 

heeL 

side. 

[Dion, 
compa- 



* FhnuranoejMiJi. 
t Fronoonoe/M!^ 



TON, thy. 



Before all nouns mascu., 
or fern., beginning with 
a vowel or h mute. 



con, (m.) 
hnmenr,(f.) 
action, (£) 
odorat, (m.) 
gont, (m.) 
ombre, % (C) 
indbfposltlim, 
malde teto,§ 
halelne, (f.) 
nuance, (f.) 
amitle, (f.) 
nnlon, (f.) 
habilete, (f.) 



neck. 

temper. 

action. 

smelL 

taste. 

shade. 

disorder 



breath. 



friendihl^ 
union. 



X Ombre, shade, is ftmi- 
nine. Omftra^is is maecnline. 

S I hove the headache is 
translated: J*aiwulkkiUU, 



80N,hia,lier. 

Before all nouns mascu. 
or fern., beginning with 
a vowel or h mute. 



mal-de-dentsl 
bmlt, (m.) 
plaiair, (m.^ 
mal-anz-yenx 
Bosuneil, (m.) 
reve, (m.) 
opbrion, (f.) 
mtlment, on.) 
deair, (m.) 
ei9eEaiioe,(f.) 
espolr, (m.) 
ioiiile,(f.) 
lndnatrle(f.) 



toothache 

noise. 

pleasure 

weak eyes 

sleep« 

dream. 

opinion. 

sentiment 



hope, 
hope, 
eeonomy* 
indostiy. 



1 1 ha?e the toothache, b 
tianfllated: J*oi iHfl/-<iinMff>rf>, 

i* t/Vit iM^awM^flMr is pro- 
per. «rat mod h faSf mm 
onlj one AIT'S. 



or THX 



Cardinal Nnmbora. 



qnatorze, 

qolnze, *^ 

seize, ♦* 

diz-sepc, 

dix-hnift, 

dlz-nen^ 

▼Ingt,** 

▼Ingi^t-nn, 

trente, 

trente-et-nn 

qnarante, 

qnarante-et- 

cinqnante, 



fourteen 

fifteen. 

sixteen. 

seyenteen 

eighteen 

nineteen 

twenty, 
[one. 
twenty- 
thirty, 
thirty-one 
forty, 
foi^-oiie. 
fifty. 



«* Bconouoe < 



edwabdchuboh'botstex. ^^^11 


1 


DF POSSESSIVE PSONG 


man chien. Mm is also used before 
ipauhj man areiUe, man heurtj etc 


1 M<m (my) 18 used before any mascaline noun: man Uvre^ 
\ a feminine noun when it begina wilh a Towel or A mute : man 


VOCABULARY 


DICTfSE No. 1. 
FROM TABLE Ko. 6. Paob 112. 


mefimtmal, 


[evil 
me make 


tant mienzi } 


[better. 
80 much the 


fbule, 
fracturop 


sprained, 
firacturedi 


oar, 
malheureiiz^ 


for. 
unfortunate. 


Mon epaiae, mon menton, 
mon pied, mon pouoe, mon 


casae, 


broken* 


soufflraitf 


suffered. 




demis,* 


out of joint 
broken. 


antant,! 
qae mol, 


as much. 
asL 


Mon poignet est foul^, mon 
mon talon fractui^, mon cote 


Totre, 


your. 


le aien, 


his. 


bris41 Et Yotre oompagnpn, com- 


compagnoD« 


companion. 
howcpMshe? 


cmteto,! 
rompnay 


hare been, 
broken. 


ment ya-t-il ? Mon compagnon 

estmort. Ahl tant pis; comment 
tant pis! dites tant mienz, car le 


mort. 


dead. 






nulheureux souf&ait autant que mm; 


ah! 
taiikFli,t 


abl 

[worse. 
80 much the 




• •.-••• 


mon corps, et le sien, out ^t^ 


dites. 


say. 






^ 


« Proooanoe d^ 
t IftonoiiiiM lEMpI* 

I 
\ 

1 


% Pronomce ftwiiwi. 
4 Fkononnoe cwftm. 
B Pkonoimce oRf^M if it WM one 
word. 


' 













114 FBENCH SPOKEN. 




OF POSSESSIVE PBON0UN& 


Ton (thy) follows the eame rule as Mm. \ 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTEE No. 2. 
FROM TABLE No. 6. Paox US. 


enfle, 


swollen. 


ii*Mt-a pas, 

■ 


IS it not 






\ 


[try. 




conunent tSj 


how goes. 


alaoampasiie,t 


to the coun^ 
[cover. 


Ton COU est enfl^ Comment 


xnieiiZy 


better, (adv) 


d'y leoovfveri 


of there re- 


Ta ton mal de tete? Mieux, 


merci,* 


thank you. 


la aante, 


the health. 


mercL Ton goat est-U meilleiir? 
Un pen. Ton indiaposition a 


melUeury 


better, (a^j) 


lui^t 


to her. 


^t^ longue? Cinqoante txois 


im pon UngiiOi 


a Uttle long. 


aMure, 


assures. 


henres. Ton halelne esi plus 


libre, 


free. 


les moyens, 


the means, 
[go- 


libre? Pas beaacoup plus. Etton 
hmneur est-elle plus gale? Non, 


gal(e), 


gay. 


d'y aUer, 


of there to 




anMd, 


as. 






a-t-eUe toujoors son mal aoz 
denta? Oui, et aon mal anx i 


triste, 


sad. 






yenx anssL Comment est aon 


qae poMible, 


as possible. 


. • • • • 




aommeU? IMsa^t6. Sonde- 1 


a-i-ene, 


has she. 






air, n'est-il pas d'aUer k la cam- 


* 1 -.-J*' 


[tated. 






pagne? Oui, aon eaparance est j 


tres agitee. 


very agi- 


• * • • 




d'y recouvrer la saat^ Ton am|p j 
tie pour eUe lui assure les moyens 


* Mend is a Biibstantiye of both 
genders. It is feminine when it 


t Etn h la axmpoum means to be 
in the oonntiy. £tit en oampa^iie, 


means maxy, piiw: — Etn h ia merd 
de qfiidqv^m, to be at the mercy of 


to be trardllng. 


d'y aller. 


X Lid means to bim, or to her; it 


somebody. It is masculine when 


is always before the Terb, except in 




it means afAoaib:— 3lm,I thank 


ihtimpenaioeaffirmaitnt. Damabu, 




yon, or, thank yon. 


give to Um, or to her. Dommkhd, 






give it to him, or to her. 


' 



SDWASD CHUBOH's STSTEH. 



OF POSSESSIVE PBONOUKS. 



115 



Son (his or her) follows the same rule as Man and Tan. 



VOCABULARY. 



pronvei 
IxroiiTerf 

ont, 

' 

fera, 
le reste^ 
grandey 
ccmnaiflMz- 



d'obliger, 
tout le 
bonhear, 
general, (adj.) 



proves. 

topn)ye. 

have. 

crowned. 

[do. 
will make, 

the rest 

great 

knowjon. 

this person. 

of to oblige. 

everybody. 

happiness. 

general. 



* When the word penmne is pre- 
ceded by the adjective jeunt, (yoang,) 
it always means young lady. Yoang 
gentlemen is translated oy jeunea 
gent. Thos, QaeU wont eea jeuna 
gauf QueBa mmt oes jeunea per- 
mmnaf OnejeumpenonnejVi'pniper. 
Vn jame ooit, is improper; loi Jeane 
homame is ttie singnlar <ajeime» gem. 



me sonty 
conauMf 
M-tu perdu? 
as-ta penr ? 
a proposyt 
je te feUcite, 
ou eat, 
le voicl, 
entenda-ta? 
qvefldt-UdOBC? 
a Joue aveo, 



to me are. 

known. 

[lost? 
hast thoa 

[fear? 
hast &011 

[of it. 
now I tiiink 
[tate 
I thee felici- 

where is. 

here he is. 

hearestihon. 
[do then, 
whaidoeshe 
[with, 
he plajB 



t Sometfanes h jaropot means in 
proper time. In uiis phrase, it is a 
transition, which does not refer to 
what has been said; it means, ntw 
Ithinkofii,€(tIabiutifirg€ito,eUi. 



DICT^E No. S. 
FROM TABLE Ko. 6. Page 112. 

Ton action pronve ton hoii 
dBnr. Ton bafailete, ton aa- 
anrance ont cooronn^ aon ea« 
polr; aon economie fera le 
reste. Son induatrie est grande. 
Connaissez-voos cette personne ? 
Ooi, aon plaiair est d'obliger tout 
le monde, aon reve est le bon- 
heurg^n^ral; aon opinion, aon 
aentlment me sont connns. As-ta 
perdu ton odorat? As-tu peur 
de ton ombre 7 A propos, Je te 
fdHcite de ton tinion. Oh est 
mon neveu 7 .Le voici, entends* 
tu aon bruit 7 Que fait-il done? 
U joue avec aa aosiir. 



116 



FBENCB 8POKEK. 



OF CABDINAL NUMBERS. 



IXx-iepi c(nn$; dtx-kuit vMettes; diaM^ewf pemiet. 
Pronouiice: diss^, dizuiy diznetu 



VOCABULARY. 



Je V01I8 envola, 


I send 70U. 


pommeih 


apples. 


poires, 


pears. 


peclies, 


peaches. 


coings, coins, 


quinces. 


▼lolettM, 
pensees,* 


violets. 

[nots. 
forget-me- 


li«,t 


liUes. 


roM8,| 


roses. 


jaamliiBy 


jessamines. 


oellleta, 


pinks. 


iimnortellM, 


everlastings. 


encore, 


again. 



* The i is hanh. 

t LiSf pranonnoe the t like lUae. 
The t ofiif is not pronoiinoed in 
JUundeUt, 

t The i placed between two row- 
els sounds like & 



Jacinthes, 
talipes, 
▼oila tout, 
ce qne j'al, 
pu, 

Tons ftire, 
paxrenir, 
satisfidt, 
BOOS pen, 
de jours, 
pouvoir, 
enTolf 
acacias. 



hyacinths. 

tulips. 

Thai's alL 

whatlhave. 

been able. 

[make. 
to 70a to 

to reach. 

satisfied. 

[a few. 
under (litde) 

of days. . 

to be able. 

[sending, 
invoice, 

acacias.. 



Rbicabk. — Hfi^andceneaietfae 
only nnmben whioi take the plural 
number: ^iKtfrs-oiii^CfAoawMiiytfmtr^ 

take the plaral nnmber, thoagh mul- 
tiplied bjr another nnmber, when 
they are loUowod by one: daae^mi' 



DICTi:£ No. 4. 
imOM TABLE Ka 6. Faob 112. 

Je vous envoie: qoatorze pom- 
mes; qninze poires; seize pSches; 
diz-sept coins; diz-hnit vio- 
lettes; dlz-nenf pens^ ; Tingt 
lis; yingtet one roses; trente 

jasmins; trente et WOL CBillets; 

qoarante acadas; qnarante- 
et-nne immortelles; oinqoante 
jacinthes, et cinqoante tulipes. 
VoiUk tout ce que j'ai pa vous £ure 
parvenir; j'esp^re que vous serez 
satisffdt. Sous peu de jonn je pense 
pouvoir vous fidro encore on petit 
envoL 



118 



FBEMCH SPOKE K. 



TABLE No. 7. 



POSSESSIVE PRQNOUNa 



XflUELy my. 

(My) Before a noun 
fem^ beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated. 



terre, 

▼leUlesM *. 

Jambe, 

chair, 

I>eaii, 

sante, 

laideor, 

»olf;t 

maladie, 

rage, 

scdgnee, 

▼le, 

<haine, 



[globe, 

lanii, 

old Bge, 

leg. 

ilesh. 

skin. 

deformity 
tliirit 

madness 

bleedint^ 
life. 

hatred, 



• This word is of difficult 
pronunciation ; prononnce 
viy€Uitne, the ff is !!• 
quid when preceded by an t. 
Liqnid U is prononncod as 
in the Enslish bnDiatd\ one / 
preceded 1^ an t sounds as 
liquid as two, Thus ; obU^ ege, 
badf leate, verU^ danaer, etc. 
Howerer, tnis rule has sev- 
eral exceptions, that the 
tutor only can explain when 
the /Z is liquid or not 



TAythy. 

(Thy) Before a noun 
fern., beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated. 



galete, 

taiUe|(i3QKhiiL) 

coupuret 

broliire, 

aurdlte, 

fievre, 

medeclne, 

vie, 

mort, 
honte. 



redness. 

gaiety. 

duuMiriae 

cut* 

bum. 



fever. 

crins. 

physic. 

life. 

reoofei'y* 

death. 

shame* 



Liquid Ui pillage^ m 
vaUe^angmile, 

Exceptions : mUUy vQUj 
and every word beeioning by 
t/Z, as ihgidmt, UlimiU, U- 
hutrt. 

The I is not pronounced in 
the following words : 



baril,... 
chenil, • 
foumiL* 
fusil,... 
outil,'.. 



oamu 

balothnm, 

gun, 

tooL 



S/L| hia or her. 

(HUy her) Before a noun 
fern., beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated. 



paleur, 

demarche, 

beaute, 

grimace, 

respiration, 

doolenr 

peine, 

fidm,{ 

fimlmne, 

coD.tnaloHf 

bleaaore, 

toiix,§ 

^hache. 



paleness 

gait 

beauty. 

grimace. 
J[tion 
respira- 

pain. 

grief. 

hunger. 

sprain. 



wound, 
coug^ 
axe. 



drunk, 
tent-chtk 
panifOfm 
OfArow, 
mm or mm. 



fils, 

gentils hommes, 
Though the /is 
in gaiUhomme^ ft does not 
sound in the plural «- Thus 
pronounoe ^BafmaML 

t Phmoonoe the/ 
X Pktuiounce,/ai. 

4 l^vmnntiMi Ihm. 



Cardinal Nmnbers. 



solxante,! 



sixty. 



solxante et an sixty- 



solzante-dlz, 

soikanteonze 

quatiBvlngti 

[nap 

qoatievuigt- 

[dte 
qiiatie?lngt* 

Qoatievlngt- 

cent, 

ml],T 

mme,T 

mmea,T 



seventy. 

[one. 
seventy- 
eighty. 

[one. 
eighty- 



pne. 
ninety. 

a hundred 



thousand 
[sand. 
one thon- 

miles. 



issei 

•^1 



I 

soixante, soissante, 
soixante-dix, s(^ssante disse 
soixante-onse M^ssantonze. 
quatreyingt. quatrerin. 
onmtreTJnpt-mjq qvatierindisse. 
When dtx is placed before a 
Towd, or silent A, it has a so(t 
sound. 

Dix tuhfu pron* cnuaivfv. 

T These are not liqnid; 
pronounce exactly as thei 



SDWABP CHUBOH'S 8T8TEV. 119 || 




OF POSSESSIVE PEON( 


)UNS. 

1 person or thing. They agree with 
1 English. Thus, speaking of a gen- 
ead of son m^re^ ion mere. 


May ta^ sa, although feminine^ may refer to a masculine 
1 tleman, you must say sa mere ; speakmg to himi to mire; inst 


vocaSulaey, 


DICt6e No. 1. 










jClnq,* 


fiye. 


la mlenne, 


mine. 


FROM TABLE Ka 7. Paob 118. 


! mines, 


mOea. 


finra, 


will make. 


Ma terre est it cinq nulles d'icL 


did, 


benoe. . 


menrtrle. 


bruised. 




1 
pronTe, 

ejctzamdliialiv, 
feponty 


proves. 

extraoiainar 

willmake. 


dangereiiaeyt 
afltevse, (f.) ^ 
aflBreiEZ, (m.) y 


dangerous. 
dreadfiiL 


malade. Ba palemr est extraor^ 
dinaire. Mea *wifiM*» feront mon 
bonhear dans ma vieillesse. Ta 
galete est one prenye de la tran- 


TieUlesae, 

1 


old age. 






quility de ton ame. 8a de- 
marche est trop 'hardie. Ma 




proof. 






Jambemefutplusmalqaliier. Ta 


tranqulltta, 


quietness. 






tallle est plus petite que la rnienne. 


trap %ardie, 


too bold. 






8a beanie fera son mallietu*. 
Ma chair est toute meurtrie. Ta 


me fidt, 


tome makes. 

[-s's&sr 

more eyil, 

[day. 
than yester- 






conpnreestdangereuse. 8a gri- 


plus ma], 
qalder, 






mace ^tait affreuse^ 


* Gnq is pronoimoed em before a 
(onsotiant or an A aspirated ; before 
a Towd or silent A it is pronoimced 
dnqae. Urns: 

t/ny isMci| cany m/mmem» 


t Dangereux, dnmgeram^ are some- 
acate accent on the first e; this is 

same sound; thns, dan-gtreex 


• 


11 











120 




FRENCH 


SPOKE V. « 1 


Ma, ta, u, follow the sai 


OP POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 


ne rule as the preceding, I shall only advise the tutor to fix the 


pupil's attention on the gender of the substantive, and make him or her remark, that the pronoun j| 


which precedes it 


is always of the same gender, whatever the person or thing which possesses. 1 




VOCABULARY. 


, 


DICTilE No. 2. 










etait, 


was, 


derniere, 


last. 


FROM TABLE Ka 7. Page 118. 


toute, 


bTL 


afflreiiae, 


dreadful 


Ma pean^taittoute bruise. Ta 


brnlee,* 


Sumt 


eat loin, 


is far. 


bmlnre n'est pas si daagereose. 


n'est pas, 


is not 


d'etre, 


of to be. 


8a respiration est plus libre de- 
puis quelques heures. Ha aante : 


plus libre. 


moreiree. 


malheur. 


misfortune. 


n'est pas mauyaise depuis quelques 


depoia. 


since* 


im pen, 


a little. 


mois. Ta anrdlte est mobs con- 


quelquea, 


a few. 




less. 


siderable que Tann^e demi^re. 8a 


- 








donlenr est affreuse. Ma lai- 


hetirea. 


hours. 


forte. 


strong. 


denr est loin d'etre un malhear. 


manTalae, 


bad. 


an dela, 


beyond. 


Ta flevre est un peu nu^ns ferte. 


mola. 


month. 


de tonte, 


of alL 


8a peine est an ddk do toute 
expression. 


moiuMf 


less. 


ezpreaaloD, 


expression. 




considerable. 


considerable 








Fannee, (£) 


the year. 








* See page S57. 


' 


« 



BDWABD church's STBTEM. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



121 



Ta crise; WBifaim; ma mahdie; ta medectne, etc- Orise, fcdmj maiadie, and medeciney 
being feminine nouns, must be preceded bj tOj «a, mo, without paying attention to the gender of 
those who have a crisis, who are hungry, 1?ho are sick. 



VOCABULARY. 



qa'a¥W-voii8? 

J'aisoU; 

J'aiikim,* 

a ete, 

eat-eUe, 

appaiaee, 

fl a bu, 

et mange, 

combieiiy 

de tempsy 

souffert, 

dm*e, 

et deml. 



[you? 
what have 

I have thirst 

I have hun- 

hasbeen. 

is it. 

relieved. 

hehas drunk 

and eaten. 

how much. 

of time. 

suffered. 

lasted. 

and aha]£ 



* Faim ought to be pronounced 
exactly as ^ I have heard this 
wofd proooimced as fame. The 
teadwr would do well in explaining 
cardfiilly the pronunciation of this 
woard. 



constammeiiti 
t'a^t^Ue,t 
sonlage, 
jlrea peiiy 
comment, 

au piedf 

laftit, 

Bonfflrlry 



horriblementy horribly. 



constantly. 

to thee has it 

relieved. 

very little. 

how. 

goes. 

[foot, 
to or at the 

her makes. 

suffer. 



t7'o4-€&? ihee has it? The 
second t cannot be translated, be- 
ing there only for the sake of en- 
phony. 



DICT^E No. 3. 
FROM TABLE Na 7. Paob 118. 

Qu'avez-vous? «rai trfes soif, et 
tr^s faim. Ta crise a i^t^ trb 
forte. Sa faim est-elle appais^e? 
Oui, il a bu et mang^. Combien de 
temps avez-vous souffert? Ma ma- 
ladle a dur^ trois mois et demi^ et 
j'ai souffert oonstamment Ta me- 
dectne de ce matin t'a-t-elle sou- 
lag^ ? Tr^ peu. Comment va ta 
soDVir? 8a foidm:^ aa pied la 
fait soufirir horriblement 



16 



122 



FBENOH 8POKEK. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



Ma Togty ta c^y sa contimofu Same rule as the preoediog.* 



VOCABULARY. 


DICTEB No. 4. 










loraque, 


when. 


qa'etait, 


what was. 


FROM TABLE Ka 7. Paos 118. 


Je me vis, 


I myself saw 


devenn. 


become* 


Lorsque je me via senl an miliea 


aeid (e), 


alone. 


le capitaine, 


the captain. 


de cette lie ce n'^tait plus da d^ses- 


au milieu, 


[die. 
in the mid- 


a la tete, 


at the head. 


poir, ma rage ^tait k son oomble. 
Ta Tie 4tai1r^e en danger? Cer^ 


de cette ue, 


of this island 


leJlt,t 


him made. 


tainemj^t Qa'dtalt devena le capi- 


ce n'etait, 


it was. 


monrlr, 


die* 


taine? 8a contoaion k la tdte 


pliM du, 


[some, 
no more 


pea dlienres, 


a few hoars. 


le fit moorir pead'heores api^oette 
affireose catastrophe. 


deaespoir, 


despair. 


aprea cette, 


after this. 




etait, 

a son comble, 


was. 

[point, 
at its highest 


aflfreue, 
cataatn^e. 


dreadfiiL 
catastrophe. 




etait-eUe, 


was it. 


... • • 






en danger, 


in danger. 








certainement, 


certainly. 








* The t placed bet 
els sonndfl like & T 


ween two tow- 
hns oofifuiMn is 


tZe^ him made, 
with avert), becomes 


X^ connected 
a personal pro- 





EDWARD CHUBCH'b SYSTEM. 



lL>8 



OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS- 



Ma Mignie, ta ffuMsof^* sa Neuurey ma vie, ta mart. 



VOCABULARY. 



qui t'a, 
i sauTe, 
'foUelle, 
ilongiie, 

enviroDy 

tniis I 
. la blemire, 
'etait dime, 

i 

caractere, 
fort grave, 
. morlelle, 
ftit aanTee, 



[has. 
who to thee 

sayed. 

was it 



about. 

three weeks. 

the wound. 

was then. 

of a. 

character. 

[seiiotis. 
very grayei 

mortal. 

was sayed. 



maifl ayant, 

la preaque, 

oerUtade, 

de ta mort, 

eUe me, 

derlnt, 

8i a charge, 

9oe Je Toidaifl, 

me lalaaer, 

momir, 

delUm,t 



^TtODaanet 



rrs*- 



but having. 

the almost 

certaiotj. 

of thj death. 

it to me. . 

became. 

[den. 
such a bur- 

thatlwished 

myself let 

to die. 

of hunger. 



DICTfeE No. 5, 
mOH TABLE Na 7. Pikaa 118. 

Qui fa sauv^? Ma salgnee 
je pense. Ta gnerison fiit-elle 
longne? Environ trois semaines. 
La blessure du capitaine ^tait done 
d'un caract^re fort grave? 8a 
blesam^ ^tait mortelle. Ma vie 
fut sauv^ mais ayant k presque 
certitude de ta mort, elle me de- 
vint si k charge, que je voulais me 
laisser mourir de fainu 



^ l^xoDOontb Jbt, 



124 


FBENOH 


SPOKEN. II 




Bai 


OF POSSESSIVE PB0N01IN& 


Umx, ata SoisuaUtf pnmoimoe miumtii. 


VOCABULARY. | 


DIGTfSE No. 6. 




[carries. 




[kerchieft. 


M porte, 


one's self 


flchiuh 


neck hand- 


FBOH TABLE Ka 7. Fioa 118. 


m'lnqaletey 


me disquiets. 


aoQlianiy 


shoes. 


Comment se porte TOtre fflla 


ce qpm y, 


what there. 


poor damaa. 


for ladies. 

[ers. 
spodta^wud-J 


auBntenant? 8a touz mlnqinte 


a dedans, 


has in it. 


DdotOilSL 


beanconp. Yoolea-yoDs onvrir oette 




pure. 


^ . / . 




boite et compter ce qn^ j a dedans. 


avec plalair, 


with pleas- 


flibrlqneayt 


made. 

[sand. 


ATec plaiair. Sotacmte bagaes; 


bagnea, 


rings. 


an ndlf 


in one thon- 


aoixanta ek on noroeaaz de 


aaTcm, 


soap. 


hnlt cant. 


[dred. 
eight nun- 


aolzante-onze bourses; qoatre- 


broaaeai 


brashes. 


trante-trola, 


thirtjr4hxae. 


Vingta aigtnlles; qoatra-viiigt- 


bouraea, 


pnrses. 


d'ou, 


whence. 


ima paires de gants; qoatre- 


algidllea,* 


needles. 


Ytetmant-Ua? 


comethej? 


Tingt-dlz tabliers de soie; qiuiF 






[milleaf 
da troia oeota 


hundred mfleiJ 


treTingt-onzepetitsfichns; cent i 


pairea, 


pairs. 


£rom three 


paires de soldiers pour dames; uOIe 


da ganta, 


of gloves, 
[silk. 






pebtons de sde fiEa>riqnte en mU- , 
hnitcent treute^iois. IVoii Tiennent* < 


tabUen da sola, 


aprons of 






i 
lis? De inns cents mlllea. . 


* The Stakes the 

tiOBL 


liqiiid articiilar 


t See page 257. 



mBom 



®uilie 



TO TBS 

SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR. 

REfiULAR VERBS. 



126 



FBEKGH SPOKEN. 





SECOND CONJUGATION IN 


IR. 


JLj^/nMUxvtm/snJU 


NigaJtivetMnt, 


LUerrogaHvement 


LUerragaHvemaU ^ JBfegaiw, 


Je Finis. 
Tu « is. 
D, eUe " it. 
Nous '' issons. 
Yous << issez. 
Ils,eUes<< issent. 


Je ne finis jmis. 
Tu ne finis pas. 
n, eUe ne finit pas. 
Nous ne finissons pas. 
Yous ne finissez pas. 
lis, elles ne finissent pas. 


Finis-Je? 

Finit-il? 
Finissons-noQS ? 
Finissez-Tons ? 
Finissent-ils ? 


ne finis-le pas? 
ne finis-ta pas? 
ne finit-il pas? 
ne finissons-noos pas? 
ne finissez-Tons pas? 
ne finissent-ils pas? 



Indtcaitf pri$enU 

1 Je is, 

2 Tu is, 

3 II, elle it. 

1 Nous issons, 

2 Yous issez, 

3 Bs, elles issent. 

ImparfaiL 

1 issais, 

2 issais, 

3 issaiU 

1 issions, 

2 issiez, 

3 issaient. 

Pritirit defni. 

1 Is, 

2 is, 

3 it. 

1 imes, 

2 Ites, 

8 irent. 

FtOur. 

1 Irai, 

2 Iras, 

8 ira. 

1 irons, 

2 ire2s, 

8 iront. 



InfiniHf. Parttcipe pri$ent ParHcpaui. 

ES8ANT X 




OondUtonnsL 

1 Irais, 

2 irais, 

8 iraiU 

1 Irlons, 

2 iriez, 

8 irai^L 

ItnperaHf. 

1 

2 to, 

8 

1 issons, 

2 issezy 

8 

SubfancHf present 

1 Qneje isse, 

2 Quetu issesy 
8 Qu*il isse. 

1 Qnenousissions, 

2 QueYousissiez, 
8 Qu'ils issent. 

trnparfaii d% Sukjimdif, 

1 Qneje isse, 

2 Qaeta isses, 
8 Qa'il tL 

1 Que nous issions, 

2 Que vous issiez, 
8 Qu'ils issent. 



J 



J 



XDWABD OHUBOH'S 8T8TXM. 127 | 


CONJUGAT 
In this oonjiigatioa, ir b^j 


[ON OP THE EEGUT-ATi 


* VERBS IN IR. 

^ the ezphmatum ciyen page 98 for 


p the sign of the infinitiye moo 


' Uie Conjugation in JSt may be applied to this, as well as to the third and foorth. 1 




VOCABULARY. | 


DICtIiE No. 1. 




TO 




TO 


iflnlfi 


finish. 


gm^t 


coreyheaL 


FROM THE GXnDE IN HL Pagx 126. 


agfr, 


act 


piml^ 


Dunisn. 












Je flnls yos ouyrages. 


adoaoifi 


soften 


temlri 


tamish. 


Ta aglflMds en protecteur. 


jassenrii^ 


enslaTa. 


miry 


miite. 


n adOUClt son chagrin. 

EUe asservlra tons les cosurs. 


appesantifi 


makeheayy. 






Nous appesantlrions notre au- 


astoavlri 


glut 






torit^ 


9SSstwbf 


strengthen. 






AssoUTis ta y^ngeance, le yoici ! 
Aflbrmissons leur couhige abatta. 


'appamrriTi 


impoyerish. 






AiypanyrisscK-le d'aboxd. 


lasiortir, 


match. 






Que J'aMorUflse ces ^toSes. 


ayerUr, 


inform* 






Que ta aTerUues tes parens. 
Que faie embelli ses jours. 


embelliri 








Qull enrichlMe des amis. 


enrieUry 


enrich.. 






Que noiui enseveUssknui son 

onde. 


leiuieTellry 


bury. 






Qa'ils gnsiltteilt ces malheureux. 
Voxm pimirez les coupables. 














J'ai tend son honneur. 








JVai vni mes efforts aux y6tres. 



128 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



m. t ^ tcu^ t ^ 

Binir (to bless) has two past participles : 1. Mnit^ hinxte ; 2. hinii hinie. The first means, con- 
secrated bj ceremonies or solemn rites: dupain hinit^ hallowed bread ; ds Veau bemUj holy water. 
The second means, the fiivor of God: peupU beni de DUuy people blessed hj God; famtile benie 
ds DieUy familj blessed hj God. 



VOCABULARY. 



86 dit, 

pour manpiori 

la protection, 

particuliere, 

de Dieu, 

[sonne, 
rar une pe]> 

fianille, 

nation, 

toutes lea, 

ont ete, 

en Jesus-Oliiltt, 

lea prlncea, 

ne ae croient, 



is said. 

to specify. 

[tion. 
the protec- 
[culiar. 
special, pe- 

of God. 

on a person. 

familj. 



all the. 

have been. 

[Christ 
in Jesos 

the princes, 
[themselves. 
only believe 



M. s. 



anr le trane, 

que pour, 

le bien, 

de llmmaiiKei 

la benedictions 

de TegUae, 

one cbapelle, 

deadrapeanxy 

dea armea, 

da del, 

[taffle, 
champ de ba^ 



on the throne 

but for. , 

the good. 

of mankind* 
[tion. 
the benedio' 

ofthechnreh 

achapeL 

[banners, 
some flags, 

[weapons, 
some anns, 

of heayen. 

[tie. 
field of bair 



DICTEE No. 2. 
FBOM THE GUIDE IN HL Page 1S6. 

Beni, benie, se dit pour mar- 
quer la protection particuliere de 
Dien sur une personncy sur une fiuur 
illcy sur une nation, etc Toutes les 
nations ont ^t^ beniea en J^sus- 
Christ Les princes qui ne se croi- 
ent sur le tr6ne que pour le bien de 
lliumanit^, sont benia de Dieu et 
des hommes. 

Benit, benite, se dit pour mar- 
quer la b^n^ction de T^glise, une 
chapelle benite, des drapeaux be* 
nia. Des armes benitea dans 
r^glise^ne sont pas toujours b^Blea 
du del sur le champ de bataille. 



EDWARD CHUBCn'8 8TSTEM. 



129 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN IIL 



I ^Honr (to hate) has two dots over the i through the whole conjugation, except the three persons 
I singular in the present of the indicative : Je 'Aow, tu ^hcdi, H ^haiL The second person singular in 

the imperative mood follows the same rule : ^hai$. The circumflex, which is always used in the two 
I persons plural of the preterit dejinite and the third person singular in the in^erfect of the suhjuno- 

tive, is replaced hy the two dots or diasresis (••) — tremoy in French. 



n blame. 
I [tloiis. 

toutas mes ac 

I me liatty 

I Indifference, 

iponr Ini, 

I pars num flls, 

I 

' %aia le vice, 
Faion, 
aie de I'aver- 

poar oe tpdeiti 

nnlaible, 

del'aatipathlei 

ce qui porte, 

an crime) 



VOCABULARY. 

. . 7D 

he blames. 

[tions. 
all my ac* 

mehAtes* 

indifference. 



for him. 

[son. 
set off my 

hate vice. 

[sion. 
have aver- 

ferwhaftis. 

prcjndidaL 

antipathy. 

what leads. 

to crime. 



delaiepag* 

pent, 

attelnte, 

at<^ 

repatation. 



caDi may. 
injQzy. 
to thy. 
reputation. 



repugnance. 



DICTfeB No. 8. 
FROM THE QTJIDB IN 222. Pagb 1S6. 

II blame toutes mes acdons parce 
qa'il me ^halt. Je ne le lianrai 
jamais, mon indifftSrence pour lui est 
trop grande. Pars num fils, ^hala 
le vice; aie de Taversion pour ce 
qui est nuisible ; de I'antipaChie ponr 
ce qui porte au crime ; et de la r^ 
pugnance pour ce qui pent donner 
atteinte it ta reputation. 



17 



130 



VREKOH 8POKBN. 



CONJUGATION OF TH£ BEGULAB VERBS IN IR. 



Fleurirf to bloBBom, or, to flouriah. When Jleurir meam to flourish, it is employed flgoratiTelj; 
in this case, ihepruent participle is floriisanij instead o£ Jleurissani ; and the imptrftd of the in- 
dicative folbws the same role : h eette ipoqw Je$ seienees flobissaxent, instead d[ JUuri$$aienL 



VOCABULARY. 



reiissir, 



J'eaperey 

[prtae, 
Totre entre- 

[nnte, 
est ftDiil flocis- 

oette annee, 

qae ceBefl, 

precedentes, 

nudiondiB cftiii- 

yenezy 

le plus tot, 

[lex, 



tosnooeed. 
succeed* 

I hope. 

[taking, 
youp under- 

[iahingi 
is as flour>- 

thisyear. 

as those. 

preceding. 

[house, 
country- 
come. 

the soonest, 
that you 
we are. 



deja, 
a flenrir, 
ala TiM^ 
on aqieot 
raTiMant, 
a bientoty 



on aejovr, 
delideiDCy 



a reside 



phioe. 



delicious, 
[tfainc) begins, 
all (eveiy- 

already. 

to blossom. 

tothesig^t 

aprospect 

[charmingL 
raTishin^ 

tovexysooo. 



DICT]§:£ No. 4. 
FBOM THE OUIDB IN IR, Faos 116. 

B^ussisseg-vous ? J*esp&re qae 
votre entrepiise est anari florit* 
•ante eette annide que oeUes pr£* 
cddentes. Nous espdrons vous voii 
bientdt k notre maison de campagne. 
Venez le plus tdt que tous pourrez, 
nous sommes dans un a^joor d^ 
deuX) tout commence d^jk k flemlr 
etdonne k la Tueun aspect rarasaoL 

Adieu, k UentftL 



XO XBB 

CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS 

IN XR. 



VBKNCH 8P0KEK. 




• When the first penon of the singnlar ends hi «, as JSi emB§, €,m,€, take the place of «, «, f. 



XDWABD OHUBOH'S 8T8TX1C. 188 



<0jrplanaiion of % (SM^t. 



ThefiUbmnng Table exkOUi ai one view att Oe PHmiHve Temet of Me CkmjugaUon. 
I. The first peraon slngiilar of the in^loatlye present makes: 

1. The three persona singular of the indicative present 

2. The seeond penon singular of the imperative* 

IL The present participle makes : 

1. The three persons plural, of the indicative present. 

2. The imperfect of the indicative. 

3. The two persons plural of the imperative. 

4. The pxesent of the subjunctive, in changing ant into the teoninatioos of the Guide. 

ni. The preterit definite makes: 

1. Its whole tense in changing is or ns into the terminations of the Guide.* 

2. The imperfect of the subjunctive, in adding to the primitive tense the terminations of the 
Guide, — except the third person of the singular, which changes is or ns into it or lit. 

IV. The infinitive mood makes : 

1. The futnre,^ in adding to it the terminations of the Guide. 

2. The conditional, in adding to it the terminations of the Guide. 

V. The past participle makes: 

All the compound tenses, with the help of one of the auxiliaries. 



* Imlead of Je domtt, Je Bentu^ Je parttt, if the frimitiTB teiiMS are Je coanif^ Je moqiw, the pupil will tske tfie 

tenninadoiis of the Gnide wfaidi agree with the primitiye tense. Thus, 



Je domus, i^ons doimlmea, Je connu, nous coorfimes, 
tn donnis, TOfos dormSles, ta eonnis, row oonrdtes, 
U donnit, ib donairent il coarat, ila ooniurent 



qne je dormisse, qne nous donnisnoDfl, que Je 

que to dOTmisses, que toos darmusiei» que ta 

qa'il doimit, qa*ili doimiaaeiit) qa^tt oourftt 



134 


VBENOH SFOKBN. 






SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR,—IBEE6ULAR VERBS. 


Present de finfnUif. 


Pariicipe prisenL 


ParHcipe pant. 


Priienldefindieatif. 1 


acqaerlr, 


To 
acquire. 


aoqaerant, 


[iflg. 
acquir- 


acquis. 


aoqoiied 


raoqoien. 


I 

aoqaire. 


boiilUir, 


boiL 


bonlllant, 


boiling. 


bouilli, 


boQed. 


Je boos, 


IxmL 


courlr, 


run. 


oonrant, 


ginning. 

[ing- 
gather- 


conm, 


run. 

[ed. 
gather- 


Je conra, 


run. 


caeffllr, 


gather. 


cueOlant, 


cuellli, 


Je cueille, 


gather. 


dormlr, 


sleep. 




sleeping 


dormi, 


slept 


Je don. 


deep. 


fUlllr,* 


fail. 

[away, 
run 


fidllant, 
fiijrant, 


failing. 

[away, 
running 


failU, 


failed. 

[away, 
run 


Je ftnz, 
Jeftdfl, 


fiuL 

[away, 
mn 




lie. 




lying. 


nentlf 


lied. 


Je mentfl. 


Ue. 


monrlr, 


die. 


mooranf, 


dying. 


mortit 


dead. 


Je menra. 


die. 


ofMr, 


offer. 


dflDrant, 


offering. 


ofRsrt) 


offered. 


ToflBre, 


o£^. 


ouvrlTf 


open. 


on^rant, 


opening. 


oaTort, 


opened. 


roHTre, 


open* 


parOr, 


start 


partant, 


starting. 


parU,t 


started. 


Jepara, 


start. 


flentir, 
flortbf 


feeL 
go out 


flentant, 
flortant, 


feeling, 
[out 
going 


■entl, 
•ortl,t 


felt 

[away, 
gone 


Je flena, 
Je flora. 


feeL 
go out 


tenlr, 


hold. 


tenant, 


holding. 


tenn, 


held. 


Je tienfl, 


hold. 


treflsailllr, 


startle. 


trasaafllanti 


startling 


treflflaiUi, 


starUed. 


Je trauHtlllei 


atartie. 


Tenlr, 


come* 


Tenant, 


coming. 


TenOft 


come. 


Je Tlena, 


oome. 


TGtir, 


doihe. 


Tetant, 


dodiing. 


Teto, 


cbOied. 


JeTetfl, 


dothe. 


• OeneraUriised In the In- 
ftsiliTB mood, preterit defi< 
Dite, cad oomixmnd teiifet. 




tHiew Teite 1 
gated wUh the 


ira oonja- 
nodliaiy 





EDWAB.D OHURCH'8 8T8TSM. 



135 



SECX)ND CONJUGATION IN IR, — IRREGULAR VERBS. 



JMtMt dijini. 



J'aoqiilB, 
I Je txmfflis, 

Je coums, 

Je caeilUs, 
I Je dormift, 
.Je ftOiie, 
ije ftdfl, 

Je mentis. 



Je 
roffiis, 
i J'ovvtifl, 
Je perUfl, 
Je senile, 

Je eortte, 

I 

Je tine,* 

• 

Je tmnillbi 
Je ylne,t 
Je yetie, 



I 

acquired 
boiled. 

ran. 

[ed, 
gather- 
slept 

fiuled. 

[away. 
ran 

lied. 

died. 

offered. 

opened. 

started. 



went oat 

held. 

startled. 

came. 

doihed. 



(DbscrDattone. 

The ieardg printed ^n italics are4he txeeptioM to the preceding Gmdem 

Indic. Pres. J'acqoiers, ta acquiers, il acquiert, nous aoqu^ronsi voos 
acquereZ) tie acquihreni. Future. J'acquerraij etc Cond. J^acqiter* 
raisy etc. SusJr. Pres. Quefacquierey que tu acquHreSy qtCil gequS^ 
que nous aequ^rions, que vous acqu^riez, quHk ocquiirenL 

Future. Je courrai. C)ond. Je caurrcds^ etc. 

Future. Je cueiUeraij etc Cokd. Je ateUbraiif etc 



Future. Je maurraiy etc Cokd. Je nuntrraiey etc Subj. Phec Qu$ 
je mewrey aue tu meuresy qt^il mettrey que nous mourions, oue yous mou- 
riez, qu*ii8 meureni, lok troisi^e personne plurieUe au present de 
rindicatif fidt: He meurefU. 



Indic. Pres. Ibtiennent. Future. Je tiendndy etc Como. Je tiendrm$y 
etc Subj. Pres. Quejeiienneyquetutiennesyqu'iltienneyqu*ibtiennent. 
Future. Je treuaiUerai^ etc. Cond. etc 

Indic. Pres. Je viens, tu viens, il vient, nous venons, vous yenezy He 
viennent. Future. Je viendrai, etc Cokd. Je viendraisy etc Subj. 
Pees. Que je vienney que tu viennesy qu'il vienne, que nous Tenionsi 
que vous Teniez, q^^ib viennent. 



* Je tins, ta tins, n tint, notis ttnmes, tow tintes, ils tinrent 
t Je Tins, tn Tins, il Tint, noos Tinmes, voos vintes, ils Tinrent. 



12* 



136 



PREKCR 8POKBV. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IBREGULAE YEBBS IN IR. 



mDICATIVE FBESENT. 



[tune, 
qaelqne fi>]> 

d'impatience, 
[•olr, 
dn matin au 

tout ce^ 

nnpeumieuz, 

mercl, 

[Uenz, 
loin de ces 

lui eviter, 

du chagrin, 

ma fbrtone, 

d on le tionvej 
[jonrs, 
sous pen de 

unpeuBoiilaKe, 



VOCABULARY. 



[tane. 
some tor- 

[tience. 
of impa- 

[ing to night 
m)m mom- 
all that 

[ter. 
a little bet- 
thank yoa. 

[those places, 
far from 

[avoid, 
to him to 

some sorrow 

my fortune, 
[finds, 
if one him 
[days, 
under a few 
pieved. 
little re- 



presque, 
tons lea maUnSi 
ma "*<>^*»j 
qnelqne chosei 
Je vais, 
revoir, 
un grand, 
service, 
mon plus bel, 
habit, 
accompagMTy 



almost. 

[ing- 
every mom- 
my hand, 
something, 
I go. 
to see again, 
agreat. 

service. 

[fine, 
my more 

coat. 

[ny. 
to accompar 



DICT^E No. 1. 

FBOM THE 6ini)£ IN ZB. . Faob 133. 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 

J'acqoiers qtielque fortune, mais... 
Je bous quelquefois d%[ipatience. 
Je cours du madn au soir. 
Je cueille tout ceUi pour voos. 
Je dors un peu mieux, mercL 
Je fiiUZ. (Seldom used.) 
Je ftiis loin de ces lieuz. 
Je m^its pour lui ^viterdu chagrin. 
Je meurs d'inqui^tude. Oii est-il ? 
jJ^oflBre toute ma fortune si on le 

trouve. 
J'ouvre souvent ma fenfitre pour 

vous voir. 
Je parts sous peu de jonn. 
Je sens que je suis un peu soolag^. 
Je sors presque tons lea matins. 
Je tiens dans ma main quelque 

chose pourvous. 
Je tressaiUe de bonheur, je vais 

revoir ma m^rel 
Je Tiens voua deoumder on gcnd 

service. 

Je vets* mon plus bd habit pour 
vous aocompagner. 

* BeiMoiii 6Biploiysd. 



1 BDWABD OHVBCH'S 8T8TEM. 137 |] 


OONJUQATIOH OF THB IBBBGULji 


B TEBBS m HL 






i VOCABULARY. 


DICTEE No. 2. 
FBOM THE GUIDE IN 2R. Pagb IdS. 


idece de tensi 


piece of land 


tamalflon, 


thy houses 


deccdere. 


of anger. . 


la portlcarOf 


the door. 


mREGULAR VERBS. 
Tu 
acqaeraia une pi^ce de terra. 


n'efUcepcui? 


18 it not? 


de la vallUTDy 


of the poach. 

[galop. 

to the great 


dislaverite, 


teUthetrdtli. 


an stand galop) 




[mimt, 


[franklT. 
8peak(th0a) 




[tance. 


OOUraia oh? aliens, dis la v^rit^. 


paile fkandiA- 


Itrnportance, 


the import 


cneillala qnoi? park franche- 




sotmdly. 
[speed. 


^o3rage, 


voyage. 


ment. 
dormaia tr^s profond^ment 


aumtesjambesi 


with aU 


taparcdei 


thy word. 


ftiUaia. (Seldom used.) 


' . ^ ^ ^ 


[sure. 






Aiyaia k toutes jambes, pourqnoi ? 


J'aLetalagiir(e) 


I of it was 

[self then. 


antrefbto, 


fbrmetly. 


m^itaia, j'en dtais sdr, corrige-td 

done. 
monraia de rire pendant qu'il 


Gonlse*toi done 


correct thy- 


de Jole, 


of joy. 


derire. 


oftolaogh. 


nuntean, 


doak. ' 


parlait 




whilst, diii^* 


/ 




oflB:tda de vendre ta maison. 


pendant, 


detrelouneoar- 
pato, 


of scariet 

[velvet 


OUVrala la portiere de la voitore. 


qnniporlalt, 


that he spoke 












aeiltala I'lmportance de ce voyage. 


deTendre, 


of toselL 






aortala tonjoors de la qaestion. 
tenaia mieux ta parole autrefois. 










treaaalUaia de joie k chaque 






mot. 


t ^ 




venaia de me quitter.* * 






vetala un manteau de velours 




. 


^carlate. 


• Vemr de means, to have jrist Thus, 






TuvtntMdemiquUter, thoa hadft just left 
me. 



18 



136 FBSNOH 8F0KSN. 


OONJUGLITION OF TUU IBBBGULAS TEBBS IN HL 




FBETBBIT DEFDaiTB. 




VOCABULARY. 


DICt6e No. 3. 










la certitude, 


the certainty 
[misfortune, 
of his or her 
[too much, 
a great deal 


aTeoeuz, 


wiihtheopu 


FROM THE GUIDE IK ZS. PaaiISS. 


de Mn mallmiri 


lea yeozy 


the eyes. 


nOLEGULAR VSRB& 


bMvcovp tiop, 


refermeTy 


toshutanin 


Ilfene 


presqae, 
palsfUementy 


ahnost 
peaceably. 


son ma], 

■ 


immediate- 

[evily pain, 
his or her 


acquit la certitude de son mal- 

heur. 
bouillit beauooup trop. 


tombery 

etrepreMe(e) 
U est prene, 


tofalL 

[hurry, 
to be in a 

[hurry, 
he is in a 

[hurry. 

she is in a 

[very sure. 

I of it am 

at the end of. 


augmentait, 

, [ment, 
precipitandp 

fldelement, 


increased. 

hastily. 

faithfully. 


COUrut an devant de kd. 
cneilltt presque tous les firoits. 
dormit plus paisiblement 
fUlUt tomber par la fendtre. 


au bout de, 


de crainte, 

pour lelol dire, 
[(hoBsard, 
unifonne de 


for fear. 

[to say* 
for it to him 

[hussar, 
uniform of a 


fuit, ou s'enfuit, U, elle est press^ 

press^e. 
mentit, j'en suis trte sdr. 
mourut an bout de quelqnes 


qnelqaes hemes 


a few hours. 






heures. 
Offlrit de partager avec euz. 


partager, 


to partake. 




OUTlit les yeux, puis les referma. ' 










sentit que son mal augmentait. t 






sortit pr^cipitamment. 






tint sa promesse fidMement 






tressaillit de crainte et d'esp^ 






Tint k propos pour le lui dire. 






Tetit son unifonne de qiussard. 



BDWABD church's BT8TEH. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IKKBGUI.AB Y£BBS IN IB. 



139 



PBETEBir II!II>i£Fl^nX 



VOCABULARY. 






le droltp 

rage, 

desespolr, 

que fldref 

IaJoiiniee,(f.) 

lanriera, 

flsoovtentclierj 

euviitHi, 

[dre, 



ponrlMtromper 
direnMlfly 
I ayes pitley 
de ftim. 



the right. 

[rage. 
madnesB, 

despair. 

what to do? 

the day. 

laurels. 

[dear, 
they eost 

ahoot 

[prised, 
to be SUP- 

[deceive, 
for them to 



said they, 
haye pitj* 
ctf hunger. 



de soi^ 
de ttoldf 
de traTaiUer, 
a tout Yenant, 
▼ons laisaant, 
la force, 
Qoekpies ft'ohatu 
avec fldelite, 
aflheiue pensee) 
nVetles paa, 
haMts de ooar, 



of thirst 

of cold* 

of to work. 

to all coining 

[ing. 

to you leav- 

the strength, 
[chases, 
some pnr- 

[fulness. 
with faith- 

[thought, 
dreadful 

[not 
there were 

court-dress. 



DICTiJE No- 4. 

jpmou THE ampE in jol pao» iss. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Nous avoiie 
acquis le droit de tous parler 

ainsi. 
bouilli de rage, . de d^sespoir, 

nuds quefaire? 
COUra toute la joum^e apr^ lui. 
CQeilli queiques lauriers maia ils 

content cher. 
donnl deux heures environ. 
ikUU nous hdsser surprendre. 
fui d'abord pour les tromper. 
nentifdirent-ils, mais ayez piti^ 
None sommes morta de faun, 

et de froid. 
Nona avoiie Offert de travailler. 
Nona avona ouTert notre porte 
k tout venant 

Nona aommea iMurtla vous lais- 

sant seuls id. 
NoQa avona aenti la force de cet 

argument 

Nona aommea aortia faire quei- 
ques achats. 

Nona avona tenn vos livres avec 
flddlit^ 

Nona avona treaaallli k oette 
afireuse pens^ 

Nona aonunea venna, mais voos 
n'y^tiezpas. 

Nona avona vetn nos habits 
de cour. 



140 



FRENC H SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE ntREGULAB 1?1£&BS IN IR. 



itrruKB. 



VOCABULARY. 



d'experience, 

dimpatlence, 

auz plalsln, 

moinfl apres, 

sommeil, 

plus tranqnlllei 

a voa devoirs, 
['hantez, 
qae toxlb 

pins laronioiiti 

pas dn tont, 

[flance, 
calme ct con- 
[cux, 
auz malheur- 

an repesLtlr, 



of 



[ence. 
iri- 
^tience. 
of impit- 

[ures. 
to tlie pleas- 
[harsh. 
less rough, 

sleep. 

more quiet, 
[ties. 
to your du- 
[quent 
that jou fre 

more seldom 

not at all. 
[confidence, 
calm and 

[tunate. 
to the unfor- 
[ance. 
to repent- 



de ce monde, 

avec delices, 

vrale fbl, 

da neant, 

vtvre toiyomf 

▼OS regards, 
, ['haut, 
attaches ea 

de bonhenr, 

espolr, 

le lincenl, 

demiere robe 

en esprit, 



of this world. 

with delight. 

true faith. 

[tity. 
from nonen- 

live always. 

your looks. 

fixed above. 

of happiness 

hope, 

[sheet 
the windiilg- 
[garment. 
last robci 

in spirit 



DICT^B No. 5. 

FROM THE^OUIDS INISL Biob ISS. 

ntREGULAB VESB& 

Vous 
acqaerrez, plus d'ezpdrience 

dans quelque temps. 

bouilllrez moins souTent dim- 
patience. 

COUrrez moins aux plaisirs. 

CUelllerez des fruits moins Upres. 

dormlrez d'un sommeil plus 
tranquille. 

fitiHirez moins souvent k tos 
devoirs. 

ftdrez la soci^td que vous ^hantez 
maintenant 

mentirez plus rarement, plus du 
tout j'esp^re. 

mourrez avec calme et confiaDce. 

oflMrez tout aux malheurenx. 

ouyriliez votre coeur au repentir. 

partlrez de ce monde avec de- 
lices. 

sentlrez les joies d'une vraie foL 
SOrtlrez du ni§ant pour vivre 
toujours. 

tlendrez vos regards attaches 
en %But 

tressaUlerez de bonhenr et 



▼etirez le lincenl, notre demi^ 

robe. 
Tlendrez souvent nous visiter 

en esprit 



EDWARD CHVSOn'fl 8T8TSM. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IBBEOULAB YEEBS IN IR. 



141 



COin>ITIOHAL. 



VOCABULARY. 



abonmarohe 
^ [cuitfl, 
gans etre 

[•oir, 
du maUn au 

ae fiitigQer, 

[mettaia, 
at Je le peiv 

. jnaqa'a mldi, 

M ba evaillalt, 

alaiipliu chare 

pli|tot qudy 

ae adaiUer, 

dnmenaonge, 

de ban corar, 

lenr Tie, 



cheap. 

[cooked. 

witbouttobe 

[log to i^gfa t 

from mom- 

[tire. 

one's self to 

[ed. 

if I it allow- 

until noon. 

[them. 
did not wake 

[dear, 
was more 

rather than, 
[stain, 
one's self to 

of the lie. 

[heart, 
of good 

their life. 



poor lanr pafi, 
[nemia, 
lea ranga en- 
comma raolair, 

qaalBaiiKOoalai 

[velnea, 

dana leara 



vaiiiqaeiira, 

lleiir aermenty their oath. 

aieuz, 

noble flerte« 

cnlraaae, 

appel, 

aaaant, 



[country. 
&r their 

[ranks, 
the enemy's 

as lightning, 
[flows. 
what blood 

in their Ypins 



conquerors* 

would not ap- 
pear anymore. 



ancestors, 
noble pride, 
cuirass. 
appeaL . 
assault. . 



BBBB 



DICTEE No. 6. 

FROM THE GUIDE IN IR. Pjiaa las. 

IRREGULAR VERBA 

Ha 
acquerraient c^tte propri^t^ k 

bon march^ 
bonilUraient toute une jonmde 

sans 6tre cuits. 
conrraient du matin au soir 

sans se fatiguer. 
cnelUeraient, si je le permet- 

tais, tous les fruits du jardin. 
dormiraient jusqu'ii midi, si on 

ne les 4veiUait. 
fidlliraient si yous n'dtiea paslL 
foiralent si la vie leur ^tait plus 

ch^re que I'honncur. 
mentlraient s'ils pensaient 

comme lui. 
monrraient plutdt que de se 

souiller du mensonge.. 
oflHraienty de bon coeur, leur 

vie pour leur pays. 
onvrlraient bientdt ks rangs 

ennemis. 
IMurtiraient comme I'^cliur. 
aentiralent quel sang coule 

dans leurs veines. 
aortiraient vainqueurs, ou ne 

parattraient plus. 
Uendraient leur sermcnt comme 

leurs aleux. 
treaaailleraient d'une noble 

^ fiert^. 
vettraient la cuirasse au premier 

appeL 
Tiendralent les premiers s'of- 

fHr pour I'assaut 



142 FBBNOH 8POKBK. 1 


CONJUGATION OF THE lEEEGULA 


B VEBBS 


IN nt. 






DfFEBATrVE MOOD. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTiJE No. 7. 










promptemeat, 


promptlj. 


sonyent, 


often. 


FROM THE GUIDE INZR Pao« 182. 


moins, 
Tite, 


less, 
quick. 


ta parole, 
notie piemeaie, 


ihjword. 

oar promise, 
[tioiu. 


IBSEOULAB, VERBS. 


acquien, 


aoqu^rons, 


acqu^rez. 


un i>eii, (adv.) 


a little. 


V06 engagemens 


jonr oUigiF 


boas, 


bouillons, 


bouilles. 


quelqpies hemes 
rarement, 


a few hours. 

seldom. 

[possible, 
as quick as 

never. 

[age- 


de Joie, 

de lx»ilieiir, 


of joy. 

of happiness. 


cours, 

cueilley 

dorsy 


courons, 

cueillons, 

dormons, 


oourez. 

cueillez. 

donnez. 


au plus tot, 


tea habits de 


of pleasure, 
[dresses. 
thyfeasU 


£miz,* 

fnia, 

mentSy 


faillons, 
fuyons, 
mentons, 


failks. 
foyez. 
mentez. 


avec oonragei 


with cour« 
with kind- 


les notres, 


ours. 


meursy 


mourons, 


mourez. 


aveo bonte, 


les votres, 


jours. 


OiSrai, 


ofirons, 


offirez. 


sans tarder, 


without de- 

{more delay. 

without anj 


de bomie heme, 


early. 


ouvre, 
pars, 


ouvrons, 
partons, 


ouvrez. 
partez. 


sans plus taideri 






sens, 


sentoDS, 


senles. 


fortement, 


strongly. 






son, 
liens. 


sortons, 
tenims, 
tressaiUons, 


sortez. 
traez. 






UCUBy 

tressaille, 


tressaillez. 


' 




vAts, 


▼6tons, 


▼dtez. 






yiens, 


▼enonSy 


venez. 


i 


» Seldom used 





EDWARD CHUBOH'SSTSTEM. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IBBEGULAB VERBS IN IR. 



148 



SUBJDI7CTIVE FBSssarr. 



VOCABULARY. 



n •emble, 

II convient, 

n soffit, 

n est a pioposy 
, Je doute, 
jTcxige, 

Je crains (ne) 
I n craint (ne) 

n Tent, 

n donte, 

n dcarire, 

aonlagement, 



[tant 
it IS impor- 

it seems. 

it is proper. 

it is sufficient 

it is proper 

I doubt 

I require. 

I fear. 

he fears. 

he wishes. 

he doubts. 

he desires. 

relie£ 



• The yeibovMidbv, to fear, obliges 
the Terb whidi follows it to be pre- 
ceded hy te n^^ative ne. Thus: Je 
cnuM ^H m mrttf Jtaraini qu*U ne 
parte 



penaez-Yons? 

croyez-Tona? 

soppoiez-TOQs? 

JenepeiiBepas, 

Je ne vera, pas, 

Jenedeatrepas, 

Ilsn'abnentpas 
[paa^ 
naneyenlent 

dealrez-Tonaf 

fiint^U? 

convient^il? 

eat-UntUef 

cle, 



do you think? 

[lieve r 
do you be- 

[pose? 
do you sup- 

[think. 
I do not 

I will not 
[sire. 

i do not de- 
pike. 

they do not 

they will not 
[sire? 
do you de- 
[ly? 
is it necessa- 

is it proper? 

is it useful? 

key. 



DICTfeE No. 8. 

FROM THE GtTIDE IK ZR Faok 132. 

IRBEOVLAR VERBA 

Qne JTacqaiere des talents 
qne tn bonillea d'impatience. 
qu'il conre tout de suite. 
qn'elle cneille quelques fruits. 
qne nona dormiona toute la nuit 
qne vona fkUliez si vous trava- 
iUez. 

qnlla ftaient h I'in^tant mtoe. 
qn'ellea mentent tr^s sourent 
qne je menre arant son arriv^e. 
qne tn offlrea quelqu' argent 
qpill onvre cette boite avec cette 

qn'elle parte le plus tdt possible. 

qne nona aentiona du soulage- 

ment 

qne Tona aortiez ce soir. 
qnlla tiennent leurs engagemens. 
qn'ellea treaaaillent de joie. 
qne je Vete mon uniforme. 
qne tn Tiennea ici passer les va- 

cances. 



13 



SBBBi 



144 



wntvon SPOKEN, 



CONJUGATION OP THE IBBEOULAB YEBBS IN IIU 



D£FEBFBCT OF THE SXTBJUNCTIVE. 



VOCABULARY 



n importait, 
n semblait, 
n contTenait, 
n sufflsait, 
netaitapnipoi, 
Je dontais, 
J'exigeala, 
Je oralgiiaia, 
n voulait, 
ndootait, 
UnepeiiBaltpas 
ndealrait, 



[tanU 
itwaflimpor- 



it 

it was proper 
[dent 
it was suffi- 

it was proper 

I did doubt 

I required. 

I feared. 

he would. 

he doubted. 

[think, 
he did not 

he desired. 



[thiijL? 
did you 



doylax-wui? 

msftodUrJonsJ 

Je ne pentals 

Jene voidau 

/ Dm 
Je ne deslrais 
[pas, 
Us n'aiiiiaieiii 

DsneTOdo^ 

deslriez-Yoiis? 

fiOlait-U? 

conTenait-U? 

etait-U utile? 



[you? 
believed 

[suppose? 
did you 

[think. 
I did not 

[wish. 
I did not 

[wish. 
I did not 

[like, 
they did not 

[wish. 
they did not 

[sire. 
did you de- 

[sary~ 
was it neces« 
[er? 
was it prop- 
was it use- 



DICT^E No. 9. 
FBOMTHBGUIDSIINZZE. PaobUI 

irregulAb. verbs, 

qae J'acqoiaae cette propri^td. 

que ta bouUUaeea de colere. 

qaHl COlinit au devant de lid. 

qn'elle coellht un joli bouquet 

que nous dormiaeiana un pen. 

que vooa fidlliaaiez k vos de- 
voirs. 

qpi'ila fiiiaaent sans d^biL 

qa'ellea mentlaaent trop soa- 
yent 

que je mouraaae sans faire mon 
testament 

que tu oflMaaea quelqne chose 
auz pauvres. 

qu'il OUTTit sa bourse. 

qu'elle partlt apr^ Texamen. 

que noua aentlaaiona tant de 
soulagement 

que Toua aortlaalez si tdt 

qu'ila tinaaeut leur promesse. 

qu'ellea treaaaiUiaaent autant. 

que Je vetiaae mon unifonne. 

que tu Tlnaaea dans cette vOle. 



146 



FBENCH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 8. 



POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 



NOTRB, 



oar. 



Before any nouzii singa- 
lar. 



VOTRZSy your. 



Before anj noun, singu- 
lar. 



eau, (m.) 
solell, (m.) • 
cUmat, (m) t 
rive,(f.) 

port, (m.) t 

flenve, (m.) 
ponty (m.) i 
etang, (m.) | 
Inmlere, (f.) 
molMon, (f.) 
recolte, (f.) 
conge, (m.) 



water. 

sun. 

dimate. 

shore. 

harbour, 
[river, 
great 

bridge. 

pond. 

light 

harvest 

harrest 

holiday. 



• The < 18 liquid. 

t The ( do68 not 
pionoiiiioe ountL 
X ^rononnoejMxr. 
I PjRmomice /NM* 
I PjRmomioe 0an* 



corar, (m.) T 
sang, (m.) •• 
cervean,(m.) 
cenrelle, (f.) 

(m.) 

emboqpolnt, 
malgrenri (f.) 
action, (f.) 

(m.) 

monvement 
sonrire, (m.) 
sonpir, (m.) 
son, (m.) 
plaiair, (m.) 



heart 

blood. 

brain. 

brains. 

[ness 
plump- 



teint, (m.) ft 
parole, (£) 
aflence, (m.) 
repo8,(m.) 
It, 



action. 

motion. 

smile. 

sigh. 

sound. 

pleasure 



^ Bronomioe 
soimdther. 



iMcr, and 



^^ Flronounoe urn. 



LEURy their 



Before anj noun, singu- 
lar. 



ome, (in.) X\ 
toncher,(m.) 
obscmito, (f.) 
odenr, (f.) 
aavenr, (f.) 
jole, (f.) 
degout, (m.) 



[ion. 
oomptax- 
[word. 
speech, 

silence. 

rest 

gi;oan. 

hearing. 

touch. 

daxkness. 

smeU. 

relish. 

J07. 

surfeit 



ft Ptonoimoe tin, (in 
Froich) 
H nionoanoe oui. 



07 TnB_ 

Ordinal Nmnbers. 



qnatonieiiN, 

qniiii&iiM, 

ttiileme, 

dix-Kptieme, 

dix-hnitieniD 

dix-neuTieiiiB, 

Tingtieiiie, 

Yingt-efrnniaBB," 

tmitHiiiifiiMy 

qnanmtleiiMi 

dnipiaiitKinB, 



[teenth. | 

foor- 

1 

fifteenth. 1 

sixteenth. \ 
[teenth. 

seven- 
[teendi 

eiffh- 
[teenth 

nine- 

twentieth, 
[fint 
twenty- 

UuitiedL 
[fint 
thirty- 
fortieth 
fiftieth. 



H UmhuiB^ is need only 
after, vmgt^ trade, qmMrwde, 



EDWABD GHUBOH'S 8T8TS1C 



147 



OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



Jhtre^ volnsy Uwr^ are of both gendersi Thus — wOre phre^ notr$ niire ; vcir§ tauTf vofrv frire ; kur 
eoutitu, bur eonrinef etc 



VOCABULARY. 



trouTeZ'Tousy 

deCkdogney 

fort bonne, 

fiuelesbefloinsy 

defl«iitre% 

paasent, 

iMTotres, 

oomme, 

lenrteint, 

eslaiilme, 

ftclle, 

descendent, 



find you. 

of Cologne. 

very gooA 

[wants, 
that the 

ef others. 



70UI8* 

see 700. 

as. 

complexion. 

isanunated. 

easy. 

come down. 



bndant, 
lenotre, 
panUmjoiwnh 
quelqaefiilflf 
▼otre magf 
bont, (verb.) 
T08 veinefl, 

semblablMi 

Jenepidi, 

sangflroldi 






burning, 
ours. 

not always, 
somelames. 
your blood- 
boils. 

your Tons, 
mjudtke. 
such. 
I cannot, 
cool blood. 



w 



DICTE6 No. 1. 

FROM THE TABLE l!la & Fagb 146. 

Comment trouvez-yous Hotre 
eaQ de Cologne? Fort bonne. 
Votre oosnr est si bon que les be- 
soins des autres passent toujours 
aTBnt les ydtres. Voyea-vous ces 
demoiselles comme lenr teint est 
anim^? Cost fadle k comprendre 
elles descendent de la montagne. 
Comment in>uvez*yous notn M^ 
lell? Beaocoup plus brukotque 
le ndtre quelquefois; pas toujours. 
Votre mng bout dans vos yeines 
lonqne yous yoyes des iiyustices 
semblables. Certainementy je ne- 
puis comprendre TOtre UttDff fioid. 



148 




FRENCH 8P0KSK. 




C 


IF POSSESSIVE PBONOUNa 


The same rule as page 147. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTfeE No. 2. 
FROM THB TABU Ha 8. Piob14«. 


jel'ai, 


I it have. 


eciit, 


written. 


Je trouTe, 


I find. 


senle, 


single. 


iraT6s-Tous pas lenr parole 7 


passer, 


topaas. 


llgnc, 


line. 


Oui, je FaL Que penses-voos de 
notre ollmat7 Je trouve que 


anxqaatre, 


to the four. 


m'inqniete. 


me disquiets. 
qmteienUre- 


▼otre temperature &it passer 


saisons, 


seasons. 


font-a^fidt, 


anx quaire saisons qaelqiiefeia en 


en, (pr^p.) 


in. 


anssi large, 


as large as. 


quatre jours. Votre oerrean 

8'en trouve-t-il mal? H se taxmve 


s'en, 


itself of it 


croyez^Tons, 


belieye you. 
[have taken. 
that I may 


enrhum^ tth& souyent, yoilk tout. 


troave-t-Uf 


finds it. 


qnej'aiepris, 


Ontrilstoal? Pas iuw.aenle liffie; 


mlenz, (adv.) 


better. 


cecl. 


this. 


lenr sUence m'inquifcte. Notre 
rlTlere n'est pas tout4kfait anssi 


mal, (ady.) 


bad. 


devine. 


guessed 


large que la yAtre. Oh croyes-yous 


enrhmnei 


cokL 


Jnste, 


right. 


que j'aie piis ceei? Bans irotre 


YoUa font, 


thatisalL 






oerrelle. Vous ayes deyin^ juste. 




have they. 













EDWABD church's SYSTEM. 



OF POSSBS&IVE PBONOUNS. 



149 



The same rale as page 147. 



VOCABULARY. 



netnmldoiispas 
treiTiTaiit, 

pittorMqae, 

empeche-t^il? 
de marohery 



[troaUe. 
let us not 

very lining. 

{HCtoresqae. 
[to hinder, 
to prevent 

prevents it 

of to walk. 



pasdutontv 

[tendol 
entendre, en* 



leqael, 

aimez-Tons, 
lemieiucy 
oulevotre, 

lO[li0QZi 



not at alL 

[heard, 
to hear. 



which* 
like yon. 
this best 



or yours. 
I like better. 



le notre, 
paarqoot? 
porceqall, 
estdamt, 
mon pays, 
Jeraiflprety 
]e aids prete, 
noils sQumiesy 
pretih 



ours, 
why? 
because it. 
isin. 

my conntiy. 
I am ready. 
I am ready, 
we are. 
ready. 



DICT^E No. 8. 
FEQM THE TABLE Ned. P4.0V 146. 

Ne troublons pas lenr repoa 
elles sont bien fadgu^es. Comment 
trouYez-Yous notre port? Tr^s 
▼ivant, mais notre rive est pkxs 
pittoresque. Voire embonpoint 
Yous emp6che-t-il de marcher ? Fas 
AYez-YOus entendu lem* 
Leqnel aimez- 
Yous le mietix, notre flenve on le 
Ydtre? J'aime mieux le ndtre. 
Pourquoi? Parce quH est dans 
mon pays. 



da tout. 
gemisMment? 



ISO 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



OF FOSSESSIVB PB0N0TJK8. 



The same rule as page 147. 



VOCABULAEY. 



preferable, 

neftttespMy 

taot de bruit, 

e«t fln, (adj.) 

n'est-n pas, 

admirable, 

Jelepense, 

solidement, 

coBstruit, 

conetmire, 

qn'elegamme&t, 

j'admire, 

pauTres, 



do not make, 
[noise, 
so much of 

is dtf ifi ftffK 

is it not. 

admirable. 

litdiink. 

strongly. 

built. 

to build. ' 

as elegantly. 

ladmire. 

poor. 



aveaglee, 
content (e), 

lenrobaonrlte 
delioat (e), 
leanotree, 
c'eat Trai, 
nenona, 
guide pas, 
toqjours, 
sibien, 
rend, 



blind. 

pleased. 

[of. 
seen, in spite 

ness. 
their dark- 
delicate, 
ours, 
it is true, 
not us. 
guide not. 
always, 
so welL 
renders. 



DICT£e No. 4. 
FROM THE TABLE No. 8. P^x 146. 

Votre maigrenr est prdf<^rable 
k mon embonpoLnti Ke fiedtes 
pas tant de bruit, lenr ome est 
fin. Notre pont n'est-il pas ad- 
mirable ? Je le pense s est-il aussi 
solidement qu'fl^gamment ccmstmit ? 
J'admire Totre action, panTres 
aveuglesl Comme ils ^talent con- 
tents, beurenx ; yous avez yu com- 
bien Fobscurit^, rend leUT ton- 
chery leiV ome plus delicats que 
les nitres. Cost yrai, notre In- 
mlere ne nous guide pas tonjours 
si bien* 



EDWABD OHUBOHS BTSTEK. 



OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



151 



The same rale as page 147. 



VOCABULARY. 



gradeox (ae), 
I serieux (se), 
I TOQS a?et Tair, 
I (Fane hnmeur 
! massacraxite, 

I'odomrn'eatpas 
lagreaUe, 

I A 

6tre en retaxdi 
jcette aimee, 
nefidtespas, 
trop bouillir, 
ces legiiiiije«» 
'dmsv«nb», 



graceftil. 

serions. 

[air< 
yon have the 

of a humour. 

hateful. 

[is not 
the smell 



to be late. 

this year. 

do not do. 

[boiL 
too much 

{tables, 
these yege- 

if you will. 



consenrer, 
en aTsnoey 
alalxmneheue 
un pen plna, 
Frangaiey 
e'esi beanooiqh 
mienxy (adr.) 



preserve. 

[early. 
inadvancey 
[now. 
that is better 

a little more. 

French. 

it is much. 

better. 



DICTlfeE No. 5. 
tBOM THE TABLE No. 8. Paos 146. 

Votre nourire est trte gra- 

deux; mais lorsque yous Stes s^- 
rieuse vous ayez Fair d'une humeur 
massacrante. Quelles magnifiqnes 
roses I Only mais letur odeOT n'est 
pas agr^able. If otre moissoil 
est en retard cette ann^e. Je com- 
prends TOtre flOTipir. Ne faites 
pas trop bouillir ces legumes si tous 
Youlez conserver leur Baveiir. 
L'ann^e demi^re notre recojte 
^tait en avance. A la bonne heure I 
Votre eon est un peu phis fran- 
9ais k present, c'est beaucoup mieux. 



152 



FBENOH SPOKEN. 



OF POSSESSIVE PBONODNS, AND OBDINAL NUMBEBS. 



The B»me role as page 147. 



VOCABULARY. 



fiu)Ue, 

oomprendre, 
notre oonge, 
vanoiui, 
I>eniiettre, 
de les mener, 
a la campagna, 
Chen enfims, 
n'eat-il pas, 
de lea roir, 
henreuz (ae), 
diatractlon, 
gueiity 



andentand. 

[holjdaj. 
our recess, 

goes us. 

[mit 
to allow, per- 
[lead. 
of them to 

[tiy. 
to the coun- 
ren. 
dear child* 

b it not 

I see. 
of them to 

happj. 

pleasure. 

cures. 



guerir, 

I'etade, 

etiez-Touai 

a rexamen, 

recite, 

non plna, 

pasdavantage, 

laiaaez-mol, 

tranqulUe, 

alafln, 

[noiEvalles, 
recevoir des 



to core. 

the study. 

were you. 

[inination. 
at the ezBr 

recited. 

no more. 

not any more 

leave me. 

alone, quiet 
[after all. 
at the end, 

[news, 
toreoeire 



DICT6e No. 6. 
FROM TABLE No. & Faob 146. 

Leur jcle est facile k compren- 
dre. Notre conge va nous pei^ 
znettie de les mener k lacai^pagae; 
chers en&na! Votre plaiair 
n'est-U pas de les voir heureux? 
Souvent un pen de distractioQ gu^iit 
leur degotit pour r^tude. Etiez- 
yous2i Texamen? Oui, mon fils k 
r^ittf le qaatorzieme; et le 
▼dire? Le qolnartewie. Qui 
^tait le aelzieme ? Je ne sais 
pas ; et le dix-aeptieme 7 Non 
plus; etledix-hnitieme? Pas 
dayanti^ et le diz-naiiyleme ? 
Laissez-moi tranquille li la fin.. 



BDWABD church's STSTSH* 



158 



OF ORDINAL NUMBEB& 



VOCABULARY. 



[fachez, 

Tons YOUM 

ne fSclier, 
id Je ne vona, 
arretaiflpas, 
vaam aurtez, 

contiime, 
ainsi (de suite), 
jasqa'a, 
Tannee, (f.) 
prochalne, 
quel caiactere, 



[angry- 
70a get 

to get angry. 

if I not you. 

stop not 

[have. 
yon would 

perliaps. 

continued. 

thus (on). 

until. 

the year. 

next. 

[per, 
wfiat a tern- 



de manyahiey 
Iranieiirf 
taut mlenx, 
tant pie, 
plntot, 
pine tot, 
c'est oe que, 
V0118 voadnsi 
an plaisiTf 
de veiu revoiri 
adieu, 
Yoiia etesy 



of bad. 

numour. 

[better, 
so much the 

[worse, 
so much the 

rather. 



(tenon 

so(Hier. 

it IB what 

you will wish 
[sure, 
to the plea- 
^ [agam. 
of you to see 

good bye. 

yon aie. 



DICTe6 No. 7. 



FROM THE TABLE Na 8. Faoi 146. 
Yous Yous fftchez? Non, mais 
si je ne vous arrfifais pas, voqs auriez 
peut-^tre continue 2^ dire : le Tlllg- 
tieme, le vingt-et-imieme, le 
trentieme, le trente-et-unie- 
me, le quarantieme, le cin- 
quantieme, et ainsi de suite, jusqu* 
kPann^eprpchaine. Quel caract^re 
YOUS aves, yous 6tes toujours de mau- 
Yaise humeur! Tant mienx; je 
crois que c'est plutdt tant pis. Cest 
ce que yous Youdrez. Adieu^ au 
plaisir de yous reYoir. 



20 



154 



FBBNCH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 9. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



I, my. 



Before anj noun, in the 
pluraL 



pensees, (f.) 
Idees, (f.) 
banx, (m.)* 
coranz, (m.) f 
emanz, (m.)t 
souplranx, 

(m.) 

gonTeraaUs 
manz, (m.)| 
Taiaaeaux, 
denta, (f.)** 
maina, (f.) 
braa, (m.)tt 



thoughts. 

ideas. 

leases. 

corals. 

enamels 

air-holes 

rudders. 

evils. 

vessels. 

teeth. 

hands. 

arms. 



* Ptononnoe 60. 



t 
I 
♦ 
V 

IT 
** 

tt 



coro* 



dan, 
6ra. 



BroM takes an t in the sinj 
lar, as weU b« in the 



e Btnni- 
plaru. 



TES, tby, 



Before any noun, in the 
pluraL 



mcBura, (f.)* 
flla,t 

bODOffl, t 
(BUfs, (m.)t 
doigta, (m.) 
jambea, (f.) 
pieda, (m.) 
onglea, (m.) 
habita, (m.) 
sonlien, (m.) 
robea, (f.) 
cliapeaiiz(m.) 



nuuuiers. 

sons. 

oxen. 



fingers. 



feet. 

nails. 

clothes. 

shoes. 

dresses, 
[bonnets, 
hats, 



* Fronounoe meur. 

X /does not sound in hoBufi, 
aufij (f.) sounds in the singa- 
lar. 

cerf^ stag, (f,) does not 
sound; it sounds in terf^ slave. 

nerfi^ nerves, the /is pro- 
nonnoeid in the singular. 



The/ does not sound in the 

following: 
oaf-volant, • • I paper-ldte. 



hla or her. 



Before anj noun, in the 
plural. 



diapodtioiuiy 
aulZi (m.)* 
aieux, (m.)t 
beiUaaz, (m.) 
yeux, (m.)t 

(m.) 

morceanz, 
chevaazy (m.) 
Jenz, (m.) 
feuz, (m.) 
chouz, (m.) 
calllonZi (m.) 
^hibouz, (m.) 



[sitions* 
dispo- 

garlick. 

ancestors. 

cattle. 

eyes. 

pieces. 

hair. 

games. 

fires. 

cabbages. 

pebbles* 

owls. 



aiiffraU^''' 
ceu/dur^ • • • • 
nafdehcBuf^ 
bomfgraa,'" 
htmfmd^, . . • 



fresh egg. 
hard egg. 
ox's nerve, 
fat ox. 
salt beef. 



* This word is pronounced 
as 0: singular, ad. 

t Pronounce ayeuxn 
The word aXeux means 
ancestors; tOads means the 
paternal grandfather, and the 
maternal grandfather. 

I Pronounoeyftt ; ma ftuXf 
is pronounced, m€zieu, I 



H0NTH8 OF THE TEAB 

TEST ISE ALL UBCDCDiB. 



Janvier, 
Fevrier, 
Mara,* 
ATrU,t 

Join, 

JuiUeM 

Aont,§ 

Septembre, 

Octobre, 

Novembre, 

Decembre, . 



January 

February. 

March. 

April. 

May. 

Jime. 

July. 

August 

[ber. 
Septem- 
October. 

[ber. 
Novem- 

[ber. 
Decern- 



• Pronounce manx. 

t The / is liquid. 

X II Uquid; pronounce 

S Pronounce ml 



EDWARD CHUBCH's 8TSTEK. 



155 



OP POSSESSIVE PBONOUNS. 



J&», teSf ses, are of boOi gendersiaad are always used before plural nouns. 



VOCABULARY. 



mobui triste, 

meDtoaresCadj.) 

win (e), (adj.) 

zovisnneiit^llBi 

rereniTf 

Uentot, 

anmois, 

pent-etre, 

peitl, parUr, 

oiiap-t-ll, 

misypaaier, 

sont-ilsla, 

pres de vons. 



less sad* 

better. 

sound. 

[beck, 
dotbejcome 
[return. 
to comeback 

soon. 

at th^ month. 

perbi^. 

[to start, 
gone awajy 

wheriehashe 

put, basket 

[there? 
are they 

near you. 



aoz champs, 

depniaqnand, 

a-t-il Tegn, 

recevolTf 

lea paplen, 

deniier (e), 

mola, 

bmlea,* 

bouchea,* 

Ueaaeea,* 



* SeeiMge257. 



at the fields. 

since when, 
ceived. 
has he re- 

to receive. 

the papers. 

last. 

month. 

burnt. 

shut. 

wounded. 



DICxiSE No. 1. 
FROM TABLE No. 9. Paob 154. 

Mea penaeea sent moins tristes. 
Tea mOBtira sent meilleures. Sea 
diapoaitiona sent bonnes. Mea 
ideea sont plus saines. Tea flla 
reviennent-ils bientot ? An mois de 
Janvier, pcut-6tre en Fevrier. 
Oh est le paysan ? II est partL Oik 
a-t-il mis ses fruits? Dans oe 
panier. Mea baUX sont-ils prSts ? 
Us sont lit prte de yous. Tea 
boeuft sont-ils aux champs? OuL 
Depuis quand a-t-il re9u les papiers 
de aea aieiiz? Depuis le mois 
deMara. 



TT 



156 



FBSNGH SPOKBK. 



OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



The same rule as die preoediog. 



VOCABULAEY. 



8ont-ils, 

booUlis, 

parUSy 

arriTe-ua? 

nesont-ibpas? 

dansoette, 

bolte, 

vont-Ua? 

mienx (ady.) 

na xacaffoiis- 

nonapaa, 

deanouTellea, 

bnder, 



1 



are ihey, 

boiled. 

gone awaj. 

[arrive? 
does he 

are they not? 

in this. 

box. 

do they go ? 

better. 

[receive ? 
shsJl we not 

some news, 
to bom. 



boucher, 

bleaaer, 

tttUea, 

quandf 

viennenty 

eUea? 

anmoia, 

de Juin, 



shat 

to wound. 
usefuL 
when*^ 
come, 
they, (f.) 
at the month 
of June. 



DICT^E No. 2. 
FBOMTHB TABLE No. 0. Paox154. 

Mea oorauz sont-ib arrive? 
Tea craft sont^ils bonillis? Sea 
beattauz sont-ils pards ? Arrive- 
t-il an mois d'Avrll? Mea ^n- 
anx ne sont-ils pas dans oette boite. 
Tea doigta n*ont-iIs pas 6t6 
brol^? Sea yeuzvont-ils mienx? 
Ne recevrons-nons pas desnonvelles 
de noa parenta an mois de mai? 
Mea aonpiraoz sont-ils bonch^? 
Tea Jambea sont-eUes bless^ ? 
Sea morceauz de bois sont-ils 
ici? Qnand viennent-ellee? An 
mois de Jllllla 



EDWARD church's SYSTEM, ^^^1 




( 


• 
)F POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 


The same rule as page 155. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 8. 


/ 9 

tepmremf 


repaired. 


d'A0at,t 


of Aognst 


FBOMTHBTABT4Kl!lo.9. Paox 154. 


gnadr. 


locQre,heaL 
[ed. 
cared, heal- 
[in ringlets, 
to curl, pot 


que vouMf 


thatyoo. 


Mes gonvemalUi ne sont-ils 


gneris, 
bonoler. 


reviendreZf 
dftDS \t porti 


wiUretom. 
[harbor, 
in the port. 


pasr^par^? Tes piedi ne sent- 
ilspasgo^ris? 868 Ohereoz ne 

sont-ilspasbood^s? N'4tait-ce pas 


bonolMy 


curled. 


fattM, 


made. 


au mois de Jnillet que je yoos ai 




I you have, 
seeoytosee. 


fidre, 
eteiiidre, 


to make, 
to put out 


TO & N. Y. ? Mes mauz de t^te 
ne aont point go^ris. Tea ODglea 
ne sent point coupes. Sea Jenx 


caapeTf 


to cat 


eteigiiant, 


putting out 


ne sont-ils pas dangereox? N'est-cc 


c<mpesy* 
Beimt-llsfasT 


cot. 

ale they not? 


feteina, 


pot out 
I put out 


pasao mois d'Aoat que vous rc- 
viendrez? Mes vaUiaeaQZ ne 

sont-ils pas dans le port ? Tea ha- 


da^sraozCae), 




fetelgnia, 


I put out 


bits ne sont-ils pas fails? Tea 


n'Mt-oepas, 


is it not 






feuz ne sont-ils pas ^teints ? 


aumoiflv 


(teiBlliaiM>tlt) 

at the month 








•8Mpi«eaft7. 


t Phmonnce d*0ii. 



158 FBBirCH SPOKEN. 


OF POSSESSIVE PBONOUNS. 




The same role as page 155. H 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICTilE No- 4. 










n'aYaient point, 


had no. 






IBOMTHBXABLBlilaa. Pa0b IM. 


de donleiira, 
etdansrespace, 
de trois mola, 


of pains. 

[period, 
and in the 

[months, 
of three 






An moia de SeptembM mee 
dents ^taient toates honnes. An 
mois d'Octobre deimer mes 
maiiifly et mea braa n'avaient 1 


fai perdu, 
un dramatiamey 
m'aatoi 


I have lost 

[tiflOL 

arheoma- 
[taken away 
tome has 






point de dooleors ; et dans Fespaoe 
de tzois mois j'ai perdu toates mea 
denta, et on rhumatisme m'a 6t^ 
rusage de mea mendirea. Oii 


I'oaage, 


the use. 






ayes-Toos mis aea choax? Oii 


de mea, 


of my. 

[you. 
where hare 






aa-tamis tea aooliera 7 


mis, mettre, 
oaas-tOf 


puty to pat 

fthoo. 
idierehasi 













SDWABD GHUBOH's ST8TSK. 159 | 




C 


)F POSSESSIVE PBONOl 


DNS. 

• 

5. 




The same role as page 15< 




VOCABULARY. 




DICTilE No. 6. 










lacaiMe, 


die box. 


le lendemaliif 


the next day 


FROM THK TABLE Na 9. Pjlgb 164. 


daas lafooltoi 


in which. 


demon. 


ofmj. 


La caisse dans laquelle ^taient 


elaient, 


were. 


arrlvee, 


arriyaL 


tea robes et tea ohapeanz est- 


est-eUe, 


isit 


repondn, 


answered. 


elle retrouY^e? Je ne crois pas. 


f 




^ 




Quand I'as-tu oubli^e dans hi dili- 


retroavee, 


found again. 


repondre, 


to answer. 


gence? Au mois de NoTembre 


retrourer, 


to find again. 


date, 


date. 


dernier. As-ta ^crit pour la reda- 




it hast thou? 


le Jardinier, 


the gardener 


mer? OuL Quand as-tu ^crit. Le 


onbUee, 


forgotten. 


dans la, 


in the. 


m'a r^pondu qu'au mois de Decem- 


onblier, 


to forget 


COOT, 


yard. 


bre. Quelle ^tait la date? Le26 
ou 27 je ne sais pas an juste. Oil 


diligence. 


Btace. 
[written? 


charrette. 


cart. 


estlejaidinier? Danshicour. Oti 


a«-taecrlty 


hast thou 


cage. 


cage. 




pour la, 


for it. 






rette, et aea Uboaz dans la cage. 


f 


[toin<piire. 








redamer, 


to reclaim, 









14 « 



Guilre 



TO VBM 

TEIBD CONJUGATION IN £VOIS. 

RESULAR VERBS. 



21 



162 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



THIED CONJUGATION IN EVOIR. 



Je Recols. 
Tu «ol«. 
H, eUe « oit. 
Noua « 6TOIUI. 
Vou8 , « eTez. 
Ss^eUes << olTent 


JBTegaHvemenL 

Je ne regois pas. 
Tu ne re9ois pas. 
Hf elle ne re9oit pas. 

Vous ne recevez pas. 
Il8,ellesne re^oivent pas. 


Be^ois-Je? 
Re9oi8-ta7 
Re9oit-iI? 
Becevons-noUS ? 
Becevez-TOllS ? 
Be9oiyeiil>-lIs 7 


AierrogaHvemmt^ Nig. 

ne re^ois-je pas? 
ne regok-ta pas? 
ne re9oit>-il pas? 
ne receyons-nouspas ? 
ne reoevez-YouB pas? 
ne repoiventrils pas? 



Infinitif, Participe prisent, ParHcpauL 



IndieaHf pritmU* 

1 Je ois, 

2 Ta ois, 

3 II, eUe olL 

1 Nous eTonsi 

2 Vous eveZf 

8 nsycUesoiTent. 

ImparfmL 

1 eyais, 

2 eyais, 

8 eyait. 

1 eylonSf 

2 eylez, 

8 eyaienU 

PriUrU difm. 

1 US, 

2 US, 

8 nt. 

1 umes, 

2 mes, 

8 nrent. 

Fuhar. 

1 eyralf 

2 eyras, 

8 • eyra. 

1 eynms, 

2 eyrez, 

8 eyront. 




CkmdUioikneL 

1 eyrais, 

2 eyrais, 

8 evrait. 

1 evrionsy 

2 eyriez, 

8 eyraient 

LmperaUf. 

1 i 

2 - Ota. I 

1 • eyons, 

2 eyez, i 

8 1 

SulQxmeUf pretenL 

1 Queje otye, 

2 Quota oiyes, 
8 Qu'il oiye. 

1 Qnenoos eyioDSi 

2 QueiFoos eylez, 
8 Qu'ils oiyent. 

laifaaifaiU cbf S^ancUf. 

1 Que je nsse, , 

2 « nsses, i 
8 « Au 

1 « 

2 << nssiez, 
8 << nssent. 



EDWABD CHUBOH'b 8T8TXK. 



163 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN EVOIIL 



The seTon following verbs onlj are terminated in eTolr. This conjagation has no other mgu- 
lar Terbs. Those in otCf on page 1^6| are irr^galar, and oonjogated -with the Guide, page 164. 



VOCABULARY, * 



RECeToir,* 
APERCeToIr, 
DeToir,t 
REDevoir, 

CONCcToir, 

PERGevolr, 

a l^burtant, 

conranty 

d'apres, 

[mtmiery 
onbliez de di- 

fidtes-en, 

la aovstractloiiy 



torecdve. 

toperodTe. 

toowe^onght 

toowestilL 

toeonceiye. 

to deceive. 

to collect 

at the instant 

instant. 

from* 

rminish« 
forget to di- 

makefromit 
[tion. 
the snbtrao- 



* la this conjugation, the c takes 
a cedillA (f) befoie a tf,to ^veitthe 
soft Bound of an $: Je n^ou^jenftu. 

t Depoir and redeooir both takie a 
dreomflex on the tf in the past par- 
ticiple: dA,ndA. 



InteDlgence, 
mon attente, 
cncorCf 
TOW aayez, 
la aomme, 
he Uen! 
fen ferala, 
volontierSf 
le aacrlfloe, 
poor qui], 
s'occupat, 
un pea phia, 
denies aflUres, 



intelligence, 
[tion. 
my expecta- 

again. 

yoa know* 

the sum* 

welll 

[make. 
I of it would 

willinglj. 

the sacrifice. 

for that he. 
[p J himself, 
might occu- 

a litde more, 
[ness. 
of mj busi- 



DICT^E No. 1. 

FROM THB GUIDB IN EVOIR 
Paob 1S2. 

Je regola k I'instant votre lettre 
du25courant. IXaprte votre ccmipte 
je Toos redola trais cent-cinquarUe- 
cinq francs. Je m'aperQOla que 
Yous oubliez de diminuer soizaote- 
quinze francs que yous avez per* 
911a pour moL Faltes-ev la sous- 
traction et je ne yous redeyral 
plus que deux cent-quatre-vingt 
francs. Je ne conQOla pas yo- 
tre cousin, quel homme n^Iigentl 
J'avais de Tespoir dans>6on intelli- 
gence, mais mon attente a encore ^tA 
deQUe. You3 saYCZ la somme 
qu'il me dott? h^ bien! j'en fends 
Yolontiers le sacrifice pour qu'il 
s'occup&t un pen plus de mes 
afiaires. 



lU 



FSSNOH BPOKBK. 



(S^ttil^e 



TO TBB 

CONJUGATION OP THE ntBEGITLAB VERBS IN OIR. 



JndiciXttf prinnL 

1 Je 8, 

2 Tu 8, 

3 J\, eUe t. 

1 Noos oiUl| 

2 YooB ez, 
8 Us, elles ent. 

LnparfaU. 
1 ...... Bl8, 

2 ai», 

3 ait. 

1 ions, 

2 iez, 

aient. 

PrfUrit Mfim. 

1 •• 118, 18, 

2 •• 118, 18, 

3 .. nt, it. 
1 • • uine8, une8, 

• • 4te8, tte8, 
3 • • nrent, irent. 

Futur. 

1 ral, 

2 ra8, 

3 ra. 

1 roiur, 

2 rez, 

1 3 rant. 




See the next Table, for the 
Fatare and Ck>iiditioiiaL 



Junpetoiif* 



OBBf 

ez. 



SnUbjcneUf priimiL 

1 Que je e, 

2 Que ta ea, 

3 Qu'il e. 

1 Que nous loil8| 

2 Queyoasiez, 

3 Qu'ils ent. 



ImpcBffaU da Subfandif. 



1 Que je ae, 

8 « ij AL* 

1 <" aiona, 

2 « 8iez, 

3 « aenL 

CbndUhnnd. 



"* raia, 

« raia, 

« ralL 

** riona, 

« riez, 

<" raient. 



* Instaad of adding ft to v», diaago w into ft. 



EDWARD CHUSOH'S 8T8TEK. 165 



(^jrplanotion of tt)e C^mie. 



ThefoOaunng TahU eaMhiU ai one vieuf att Oe JMmUive Tm$e$ of ikU Oof^uffoHan. 

L The first i>eT0oii singular of the IndicatiTe present makes : 

1. The three persons singular of the indicative present 

2. The second person singular of the imperative* 

n. The present participle makes : 

1. The three persons plural of Uie indicative present* 

2. The imperfect of Uie indicative. 

3. The two persons plural of the imperative. 

4. The present of the subjunctive, in changing ant into the terminations of the Guide.* 

in. The preterit definite makes : 

1. Its whole tense in changmg is or US into the terminations of the Guide. 

2. The imperfect of the subjunctive, in adding to the primitive tense the tenninations of the 
Guide, — except the third person of the singnlar, which changes is or US into it or nt. 

IV. The infinitive mood makes : 

1. The future and the conditional in changing oir into the terminations of the Guide. 

2. AH the futures of the following verbs are irregular, except the verb nunwcir^ which.makes: 
Je mouvrat, tn mouvreu, il mouvm, nous mouvront, vous mouvreai^ ils mouvron/. The conditional 
always follows the same rule as the future. 

V. The past participle makes: 

AH the compound tenses, with the help of one of the anxiliariefl. 



* The jf is changed into t before a mute e. Thiis, tb oojoit, histead of ib togiwrf ; ^J9 voU^qM fH imei^ fautoad of 
^ /e n^e, giw te teyei, etc 



166 


FRENCH 8P0KBN. 




1 

THIBD CONJUGATlbN IN OIB,— IBBEGTJLAB VERBS. 


Firiseni de finfnUif. 


ParHcipe prt$mL 


Participe passi. 


Prisma defindieatif. 


choir, 


To 

fall. 


• • • 




• a • . 


a . 


a a a a 


a a 


decliolr, 


decline. 


• • • • 


a . 


dechn, 


declined 




Idedine. 


echolr, 
iUlolr, 


expire. 

[e88ary. 
be neo- 


echeant, 

.... 


expiring 


60lllly 

ftlln, 


expired, 
been 


Ilecliolt, 
nfiiiit. 


[pires. 1 
it ex- I 
[essary. 
itisnec- i 


mouTolr, 


move. 


mouTantv 


moving. 


mn, 


moved. 


Je mens, 


Imovca 


pleuTolr, 
pourvolr, 


rain, 
provide. 


pleayant, 
pouiToyant 


raining. 

Png- 
provid- 


pin, 
pounm, 


rained. 

[ed. 
provid- 


n pleat, 
Te powolfli 


it rains, 
[vide. 
I pro- , 


• . • • 
pouToir, 


* ■ 
be able. 


«... 
pouTant, 


[ahle. 
being 

[ing. 
prevail- 


a . . . 


[ia>le. 

been 

prevail- 


u • • • 

Je vail, pens, 


[able. 
I am 


prevaloir, 


preyaiL 


preralant, 


prevalii. 


Jb profam:, 


IprevaiL ' 


s'asseolr, 


sitdown. 


s'Mseyant, 


sitting. 


assls, 


sal. 


jem'aadedfli 


I Bit 


MTOiTi 


know. 


sacbantv 


knowing 


•n, 


known. 


Je Mis, 


I know. 


Taloir, 


be worth 


yalant, 


a . 

[worth, 
being 


a a a a 

▼alQ, 


[worth, 
been 


Je Taiiz, 


[worth. 
I am 


Tolr, 
vouloir, 


see. 
be ^V 


voyant, 
▼onlant, 


seeing. 

[willing. 

being 


▼ouln, 


seen. 

[willing. 

been 


Je Tcrfe, 
Je veiiz, 


I Bee. 
[willing. 
I am 











EDWABD church's 8T8TEH. 



1G7 



THIBD CONJUGATION IN OIB,~IBREGULAR VERBS. 



Prltirii cUfini. 



i 



Jedecbufl, 
I n echut, 
InfiUatv 

Jemnfl, 

Jepowiiflt 

JeinvaliiB 

I 

I le m'aflds, 
; Je MOM, 

JevaiiiA, 

JeTifl, 

JevoiUas, 



I declined. 

it expired, 
[essary. 
it was nec^ 



ImoTed. 
it rained. 
I provided. 

• • . . 

I was able. 
I prevailed 



[self. 
I sat mj- 

1 knew. 



[worth. 
I was 



[willing. 
I was 



If 



(DbstroattonB. 

The words printed in itaHcs are the exceptione to the preceding Guide, 



FuTXTRE. Je deckerraif iu dicherras, etc CoKD. Je dicherraief tu dd* 

cherraUy etc. 
Future, J^eeherraiftueeherroifeic Cond. J*echerraiSftuicherrcds,et(i. 

Future. // faudra. Cokd. II faudrait, Subj. Pkbs. QiiU faille. 
Quoiqu'il n'j ait. pas de parddpe present. 



Indic. Pres. Je mens, ta mens, il meut, nous mouvons, vous mouvezy ils 
meuvent, Subj. Pres. Que je meuve^ que tu meuveSf qv^H meuve^ que 
nous mouvionSy que tous moaviez, quHle meuvent. 

FcTim:!^ Je paurvairai. 



Indic. Pres. R^gulier except^: He peuvenL Future. Je pourrai. 

Subj. Pres. que je puieeej etc 
Se conjugue oomme valoir, except^ le present du subjonetif qui est 

r^gnlier: Que je pr^vale, etc 



Indic. Pres. Ik i^aescnenL Future. Je mauieraij tu ^aeeierae. 

GoKD. Je m^aseieraie^ etc 
Indic. Pres. Je sais, tu sais, il sait, nous eavansy voue savez^ ils savent. 

Indic. Imperf. Je eawne^ tu savaiSf etc Future. Je saurai^ etc 

Impbra. Saehef saehons, sachez. 

Future. Je vaudrai^ tu vcmdraSj etc (Point d'imp^ratif. Subj. Pres. 

Que je vndUe^ que tu vatUeSj qu'il vaiOej qu'ils vaillent. 
Future. Je verrai. . 

Indic. Pres. Je veux, tu tcux, il vent, nous voulons, vous voulez, He 
veuknt, FuTUR. Je vaudrm^ etc (Point d'imp^ratif.) Subj. Pres. 
Que je vemUef que tu veuiUee^ qv^il veuille^ que nous voulions, que vous 
vouliez, qi^ile vemUenL 



168 FBBHOH 8POKSV. 


CONJUGATION OF TUE IBREGULAB VERBS IN OIR. 




BSDICATIVB PRESENT. 




VOCABULARY. 


DICTAe Np. 1. 
FROM THE GinDE IN OIK Paob 164. 

nausovLAR veeb& 

Je dechola de mon rang. 

n echlrft dans quinze jours. 

n fimt que tu Genres anjourdliuL 


de mon rang, 
^ftna qulnze 
que ta ecilves, 
noasnepoiivoiiB 


[rank, 
from my 

[night 
in a fort- 

[mayst write, 
that thou 

we cannot 


• 




a Terae, 


hard. 

[wants, 
to their 

you to help, 
[birth, 
of one's 








a lean be8olii8| 

Tons aider, 

[aance, 
de aa naia- 






n pleat k Terse maintenant 

Je pourvola k tous leurs besdns. 

Je pnia ou Je peoz tous aider. 


fktignee, 
Toua dlnez, 


fisitigaed. 
YOU dine. 






naissaace. 

Je m'aaaieda, car je soia tr^ 
fatign^e. 


qne flon ftei6| 


[brother, 
than his 






VoQa aavez que tous dines avec 
nous* 

n Taut mieux que son frbre. 

Voua Toyez bien que tous ave« 






Ua Tenlent que je parte. 






Ha peaveut lire cette lettre. 






Ua a'aaaeient souyent icL 






Voua aarez qui je suis. 



EDWABD church's 8T8TEH. 169 


CONJUGATION OF THE IBBEGUTiAR YEBBS IN OIB. 




DfFESEBOT. 




VOCABULARY. | 


DICTilE No. 2. 
FROM TUE GUIDE IN OIR Page 164. 


n'a poiDt, 


has na 


cette epoque, 


[time, 
that epoch. 


dlmporfidt, 


ofmip^ect 


pas tantv 


not so much. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


n'afant potat, 
departiclpe, 
present, 


havmg no. 
of participle, 
present . 


a cette place, 
qa^Qetaltld, 
nepasyaller, 


atthisjplaoe. 

[here. 

that he was 

[go- 
not there to 


D^choir n'a point d'impar&it nV 
jant point de partidpe present 

II echeait huit jours avant le mien. 
n fiOlait le lui faire Toir. 


afant le mien, 
leliflfidre, 

voir, 

[▼Ions, 
none ne pon- 

[eortir, 
trop poor 


before mine. 

[make. 

it to him to 

to see. 


parfidtemcfntv 
[ralson, 
que J'aTais 

qne Je lertane, 


perfectly. 

[right 
that I was 

that I might 


Nous ne pouvions nou.s moUTOlr* 
n pleUTCdt trop pour sortir. 

n pourvoycdt aux frais de son 
Education. 


weoonldnot 

[to go out 

too much for 

[pense. 

to the ex- 

[education, 
his or her 
[useful 
to 70U to be 


avec enx, 


with them. 


Je poUTais yous 6tre utile k cette 
Epoque. 

n ne ftllatt pas tant yous pre- 


anzfraiSy 
wn education, 


•' a ... 




▼alolr. 
Elle s'asseyaitr toigours k cette 
place. 


fovetie utile, 






Vons saviez trhs bien qu'H 4tait 
ici. 

n Talait mieux ne pas J aller. 




« 






Vons TOSriez parfaitement que 






j'aYais raison. 






Ha Tonlalent que je restasse aYoc 






enx. 













170 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IBBEGULAB VERBS IN OIR. 



FEETERIX Djsjonixjs. 



VOCABULARY. 



I6 premiery 
da molSf 
lui coai>er, 
le brasi 
pendant, 
qaaianta Joui) 
a tout, 
lea oonaoler, 
qahininatant, 
employer) 
lenr tempa, 
mUle franca, 
lenr pairena, 



the first. 

of tlie month 
j]to cut 
tolumorher 

the arm. 

dming. 

forty days. 

toalL 

[sole, 
them to con- 
[stant 
but an in- 
to employ. 

their time. 

[francs, 
a thousand 

their parents 



Chez mot, 
Chez tot, 
Chez Ini, 
ohez elle, 
Chez nona, 
chez Tooay 
Chez enz, 
Chez ellea, 
Chez aoi, 
Fen Inatralre, 
Ini en parler, 



[or house 
at my home, 

at thy « 

at his <' 

ather « 

atour ** 

at your ** 

at their ** 

at their ** 

at one's " 

[ofittotelL 

him or her 

[of it to speak. 

to him or her 



DICT^E No. 8. 

FBOM TBS GUIDE JS OIR. Paob 164. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, 

n echnt le premier du mois. 

n ftUnt lui couper lebras. 

II ne pnt mouvoir. 

n pint pendant quarantejourB. 

n ponrvnt k tout. 

nona pnmea les consoler. 

II ne a'aaait qu'un instant. 

Ha anrent employer leur temps. 

n Taint mille francs. 

TOna Yltea leurs parens dies moL 

Ha Tonlnrent parUr. 

EUe ant Ten instruire. 

Ha ne pnrent lui en parler. 



BDWAB0 OHtTS^OH'a BTSTEH. 171 


.OONJUGAXIOiar OF TU£ IBBEQULAB YEBBS IN OIR. 




FiUfiTKUlT usmiuriJNiTE. 1 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTJ&E No. 4. 

FROM THE GUIDB IN OIR. Pagb iU. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

n est echn depub trois mois. 


depnifl trols 
l*! tnuuporter, 
le Inl I0iiiotti6| 


smce 
himt 
it to 


[lonths. 

three 

[carry. 

iereto 

[remit 

him to 


amplemanty 
en proAteTy 
lev en offliry 


amply, fiilly. 

ofittoptTofit 

[to offer. 

to them of it 


to lpnjd<w*i>iiij 


the next daj. 
[wants, 
to their 

[see. 
him there to 
[spoken, 
to him has 









alennbefloliifl, 
Inl a parle, 






n a pa le lui remettre. 
n a pin le lendemain. 
n a ponnm h leurs hesoins. 
Elle a pu I'y voir. 


lear le^oii, 


their lesson. 






EUe s'est asslie et Ini a parU 


dayantage, 


more. 






H» ont na lenr le^on. 


8W ovvragefly 


his works. 






lis ont vain davantag^ 


l^ylaiarcr, 


[leave! 
him there to 






Vons avez Tn ses ouvrages. 
Hff ont Tonlu I'y laisser. 


en dfliwiCTy 


ofittogrre. 






n a fidln en donner beanoonp. 


en aToir, 


of it to have. 






Nous aTOns pn en avoir. 
n y a ponrvn amplement 
Elle a sn en profiter. 
n a Tonhl leor en ofl&ir. 


N. B. Zw metHU to him or to her, 
and If ahrmjs placed before the yeib, 
except m the nnpemtiye afBimadye. 




l^^wmm if km, tf her, afji^m 
offk«,ivbenapraiioii]i. When it 
u a prepodtioo, m means m. 






















• 



172 VBSHOH BPOKXX. 


CONJUGATION OF THE IBBECmLAB YBBBS IN OIR. 










TOTDSB. 




VOCABULARY. 


DICTAe No. 5. 
JTUOM THE OmDB IN 0222. Piaal6i. 


demesdrotfai) 


ofmjzightB, 


oda. 


that 

[will 


una Iniltaliiey 


eight days. 


a ooBliiMMnVy 


against <Mie'a 

[else. 


mSBQULAE VEEBS 


mio tiiifnmfufti 
tqa'aTant, 
anMi Uen 


afortQighL 
[bdbre. 
as well as 


autre ohoae. 


Je dMherral de mes droits. 
n eoherra dans one hnitaine. 


-i-mMU-waaiiQ 


Je V01I8 aBBme, 
anzdepensea, 


Ijoaafiflure. 
[pense. 
to the ex- 


• • • . . 




n fimdra venir dans one qnuu- 
aine. 


yaUer, 
poor yrioe, 
al'Mart, 


there to go. 
[laugh, 
for there to 
[way. 
out of the 






n pleuTra je yons assure. 
n pooITOlra aux dipenses. 
Je ponrrai j aller pour 7 rire. 
Voua Toua aaaierez it F^eart. 


pKoboUenMHlr 
la Terit^ 


probahlj. 

the truth. 

[or end. 
of it to finish 






Voaa aanres prohablement b v^ 
n TOUdra en finir k I'amiable. 


en flnlTf 






Vcma verrez oellt h oontroKwur. 


a randable, 


amicaUj. 






n TOUdra autre ebose. 


■ 





XDWABP OHITBOH^S BT8TXK. 173 


OONJItGAnON OF THE IBBEOULAB VBBB8 IN OIR. 




CONDmOMAL. 




VOCABULARY. 


DICXilE No. 6. 










de numrang, 


of my rank. 






FBOM TUK GUIDE IN OIR. Faqb 164. 


trop tardf 


too late. 






IRREGULAR VERBS. 




the latest 






f 


\ 








Je decherraifl de mon rang. 


tMt-a-lUtUeii. 


quite welL 
[the same. 






n echerralt trop tard. 


Jliaiide 111011101 


I Bhould go 
[doubt 


•••••• 




n firadrait j aller dans hnit joora 
an plus tard. 


flans ckmte, 


without 

[tell. 






n moUTralt tout-k-fait bien. 


lelnidtre^ 


it to him to 






n pleUTralt k Terse, jlrais de 


0n paztl0Qll0i^ 


inpriyate. 






m^me. 
n pooITOiraitv sans doute, k tout 


a elieTal, 


fireelj. 

[hack. 
oa hoise- 




;••*•• 


VoQfl pooiriez le hu dire en 

particulier. 


[mieiiz, 








Je m'assieralfl librement prha 


beauooiQ) 


mQch better. 






de lui. 


did. 


hence. 






Nona saurioiui probablement la 

Y6nt6. 


tout praidie, 


yerjr near. 






n vaudralt mienx j aller k chevaL 
Voua varriez beauooup mienx 










d'id. 


• 




Je Toodraia 6tre tout procfae. 



174 



VBBKOH ftPO&SH. 



OONJUGATION OF THE IBBEaUIiAS TBBB8 IN (MB. 



JMPERATm MOOD. 



VOCABULARY. 



noos ozlenter, 
a la nonxritiiie, 
des ohevauz, 
a la notrei 
a I'avance, 
des fonda,. 
s'Uy a, 
une maison, 
prea diet, 
pre. de moi, 
le batv 
quel afBrenXy 
malheiir, 



[whoro wo aro. 
to consider 

to the food. 

of the horses 

to ours. 

[vance< 
to tiiie ad« 

of the funds. 

if there is. 

a house. 

near hence. 

near me. 

the aim. 

[dreadfuL 
what a 

misfortune. 



me ponraiiity 
daatiiif 



me pursues, 
fate. 



DICT^E No. 7. 

FROM THE GUIDE IN 0/22. Faoji 16i. 

mSEGULAR VERBS. 



ponrrols, 

•wieda^oi, 

sadiOi 

TOiS| 



pouToyoiiS} 
aflMyDDS-noWi 



yoyoBBf 



pdUf V0J€1. 



Aaaeyttma-nooa icL flachoiis 

nous orienter. VojQDB oh nous 
sommes. Toi,i>oiirToUl iilanour- 
riture des chevauz. Yous; poUT- 
Toyeas k la notre^ et nous, pOill> 
▼oycma h rayance des fonds. Tolfli 
mon ami, s'il j a une maison pr^ 
d'icL Charles, aaaleda-tol U^ et 
Tous Hesdemcnselles, anafM-VOOf 
pr^ de moi) et aachez quel est le 
but de notre Tojage. Voyez quel 
aOreux destin me poursuit. 



aai 



SD-n-ABD OHITBOH'B 8T8IKM. 175 


CONJUGATION OF THE IBEE6TJLAS VEBBS IN OIR. 

, 1 




BUBJUIiUTIVK FKE8ENT. 


VOCABULABT. 


DICTJfeE No. 8. 










Bitot, 


so soon, 
[fortune. 






FHOM THE GUIDE IN OUL Faoc 164. 


qad maDieiiri 


what a mis- 


• • . • • 




IRREGULAR VSRB& 


ii*lmportei 

laissez-moi, 
[porte, 

n est a prapos, 


[abne. 
leave me 

[voa. 
what is It to 

it is proper. 






qaHl fidlle partir si t6t 
qa'a pleave ou non, j'irai. 
qae Je pfoiaee on non, j'essaierai. 
qae Je m'asseie ou que je reste 
debout. 


1 n coaTient, 

n&ut, 

[pcwte, 
pea Tons im- 


it is proper. 
£sary. 
itisneoes- 

[vou. 
what is lit to 






qae Je eaohe cel^iavant oa apr^ 
qae Je yaUle mieux qu euz. 
qae Je vole oii en sont les affaires. 
qae Je yeaille signer ou non. 


fesiaierai, 
qae je reirte, 


I shall try. 

[stay, 
thatlshould 








deboat, 


standing. 








qn'eiiz, 


than the J. 









176 VBSKOB BFOKBH. 


CONJUGATION OF TUE nUUSGULAB TEBBS IN OIS. 


mFBBIECT 07 THB 81WI}NCTIVE. | 


VOCABULARY. ( 


# : 








■ 


DICT6e No. 9. 


JPetais peine, 


I was aony . 
















FROM THE GUIDE IN OHL Paoi164. ! 


JPetals fiu)he, 


I was 80117. 








[jMUif 


[know. 






IRREGULAR VERB& 


Je ne savals 


I did not 






i 


Je desirais, 


I desired. 






qnll ftUot lamouToir. 1 
qn'il plat aatant 


Je ▼oQlals, 


IwonM. 






qu'll put venir. 


nsemblait, 


it seemed. 







qu'eUe s'aMit qaelqnes minntefi. . 
qa'eile rat cette nouvelle. 


J'eadgeal* 


I reqiiired* 

[think. 






qa'elle Talat davantage. 


pensiez-YonSy 


did you 
• • • • • 






qa'eile vrt cette lettre. \ 
qa'elle Yoolat !» lire. j 













178 



FRENCH 8P0KE1T. 



TABLE No. 10. 
OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



our. 



Before anj noun, in the 
pluraL 



confltniasi (f.) 
coiiteaiiZ|(m.) 
fourchettes, 
CQUlen, (f.)* 
astiettesy(f.) 
aorvlettas, (f.) 
plats, (in.)t 
bonteffles, (f.) 
carafes, (f.) 
hullieiB, (m.) 



lledge. 
know- 

[sioBs. 
provi- 

[meats. 
sweat- 
knives, 
forks, 
spoons, 
plates, 
napkins 
dishes. 
boUles. 
decanters. 
oU-cniets. 



* Fronoance hnUht, 
tPronottaeejBJa. 




Before anj noun, in the 



passions, (f.) 

IMDBi (m.) 

▼ivres, (m.) 
repas, (m.) 
rerres, (m.) 
tasses, (f.) 
80iicoape8,(f.) 
imcilen, (m.) 

V0IIO1I8, (m.) 

evaiitail8,(m.) 
bals, (m.) 
reflezlOBS (f.) 



passions 
food, 
▼ictoak. 
meals. 



caps. 

saucer. 

[basins, 
sugar- 
bolts, 
fans, 
balls, 
reflections 



X Frononnoe r^HUkaon. 



their. 



Before any noun, in the 



piuraL 



aflbcti0ii8, (f.) 
chateanZiCm') 
volx, (f.) S 
nez, (m'.) I 
baleaiiz,(in.) 
vorax, (m.)Y 

bUoiuc, (m.)«» 
tt 

chevaax, (m.) 
tt 

traTanx, (m.) 

animanz, (ni« 



i 



hopitaiu[,(m.) 

It 

tableaux, (m.) 



affections. 

castles. 

voices. 

noses. 

boats. 

wishes. 

jewels. 

horses. 

works. 



hospitaiflk 
pictures. 



\ PrononncQ vou 
II " atC 
t • twi. 

tt Fh>nonnoo : 
cfaoto, the sihgolar is cheoaL 
tram, '^ tnwcoL 

BxdmOf " anuiud, 

hopito. ** hopitaL 



loixaBttcme,}} 
loixante-iixieme, 
loinnt^omieiiie 
qnatnTiiK-licDie, 



OF THB 

Ordinal Nmnben. 



diiieme, 
oBiiciiie, 
dooiieine, 



eeHieme, 
eent-uBieme, 
mfllieoKf 
millioiiieiDey 



sixtieth. 

serentieth 
•[fint 
seventy- 

eiSutieth' 
[finl 
ei^ty. 



[6nt. 
ninetj- 
[second. 
ninety- 

hnndrelh. 
[andfinL 
hundred 
[ssndtb. 
thou- 

milliontfa. 



U Pronoanoe misttrnt^- 

H ZMOme, b only used 

after vu^ trmte, ^turanU, 

cmfwmte, mimMe, qmtn- 

oii^oeni;and milU 



EDWARD CHUBOH's BTSTEM. 



OP POSSESSiyE PE0N0UN8.* 



179 



NdSj va$, hum are plural, and of either gender. 



VOCABULARY. 



qofilles sonty 

leFrangais, 

r Anglais, 

FltaUen, 

repiimer, 

pouToir, 

peiiv6iity 

dnrer, 

encore, 

hnitondts, 

sent sains, 

nesontpas, 

assez, 



what 81^ 

the Frendi. 

the English. 

the Italian, 
[strain, 
repress, re- 

to be able. 

can. 

last, 

stm. 

eight or ten. 
[some, 
are whole- 
are not. 
enough. 



IT 



sncrees, 

sucrer, 

oinlnnerf 

dlniimienty 

aToed'oBlI, 

se fUsaient, 

entendre^ 

amlnnit, 

recotnrrer, 



sweet, 

[sngar. 
to sweeten, 

to diminish. 

diminish. 

[eye. 
at sight of 

[made, 
themselves 

hear. 

at midni^t. 

toreoover. 



DICT^E NOi 1. 
FROM TABLE No. 10. Paob 178. . 

Quelles sont Yos connalssan- 
ces ? Nos oonnaissanoes 

sont: Le Fran9ais, TAnglais, lltsr 
lien, &C. n faot r^primer yos 
passions. Lenrs affections 
sont' considerables. Nos prOYl- 
sions peuvent durer encore hmt 
on dix jours. Vos <fcH«i«t!«^ sont 

sains. Lenrs cbateanz sont 

magnifiquesi Nos COnfitores 
ne sont pas ^ssez sucr^es. Vos 
Vlvres diminuent k Tue d'oslL 
Lenrs Yofac so fidsaient encore 
entendre k minuit. 



iivBSai^B&B 



180 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



OF POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 



The same rule as page 179. 



VOCABULARY. 



▼enlr, 

viennenty 

repasses, 

repasser, 

combien 

de temps, 



! 



mettez-Toos, 

ecraser, 

ecrases, 

donnez-nousy 

pretez-nousy 

amenez-nons, 

nettoyer, 



to come, 
come, 
sharpened. 
to sharpen. 

how long. 

pot you. 
to crush, 
crushed, 
give lis. 
lend us. 
bring us. 
to clean. 



nettoyez, 

apportez, 

voiilez«Yoiis, 

nouM preter, 

fermez, 

fenner. 



ouvrez, 
generalement 
Tosbals, 
sontjolis^ 



dean, 
bring, cany, 
will you. 
to us lend, 
shut, 
to shut, 
to open, 
open, 
generally, 
your balls, 
are pretty. 



DICTi&E No. 2. 

FROM TABLE Ko. 10. Paob 178. 

Nos OOUteanz riennent d'etre 
repasses. Combien de temps mettez 
▼ous k Yos repas ? Leurs nez 
^talent 4cras^ Donnez-nons n08 
fonrchettes. Prdtes-nous tos 
▼erres. Amenez-nous leurs ba- 
teaux. Nettoyez nos cuillers 
nos assiettes, nos plats, nos 
bouteillesy nos carafes, nos 
huiliers et apportez nos ser- 
viettes. VOulez-vous nous preter 
▼OS tasses, yos aonooupes 

YOS SUCriers. Fermez TOS ' 
Yerrous. OuTres yos evan- 
tails. G^n^ralement yos bals 
sontjolis. 



EDWABD church's 8T8TEM. 



181 



OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. 



VOCABULARY. 



' sontjiurtes, 
ezances, 
ezancer, 

I 
Toler, 

etre en nage, 

avancer, 

avancent, 

rapidementy 

, 8'etre echaipei 

86- aont, ') 

echappea, ) 

dirigea, 



are right, 

[granted, 
heund, 

[grant, 
to hear, to 

[bed. 
stolen, rob- 
[rob. 
to steal, to 
[sweat 
to be all in a 

to advance. 

advance. 

rapidly. 

[run awaj. 
one's self to 



ran away. 



directed.. 



diriger, 

aoln, 

economkei 

extreme, 

demain, 

demaitre, 

Jetambal, 

tomber, 

a Fagonle, 

on me cmty 

mort) 



to direct 
care, 
economy, 
extreme, 
of hand, 
of master. 
IfelL 
tofalL 

to the agony, 
pieved. 
they me be- 
dead. 



DICXfeE No. 3. 
FROM TABI.E No. 10. Faoe 178. 

Voa refleadona sont jostes. 
Leura Yoeuz seront ezaacds j'es- 
P^re. Lenra bijoaz ont 6i6 vol^ 
Leura chevanz sont en nage. 
Leura travaux avancent rapide- 
ment Leura nnimftttv se sont 

^chapp^. Leura lu^itauac spnt 

dirig^ avec un soin et une dconomie 
extremes. Leura tableaux sont 
de main de maltre. Le aoixan- 
Ueme jour, je tombai malade. Le 
acrfxante-dizieme, j'^tais k 
Tagonie. Le aoixante-onzieme, 
on me crat mort Le quatre^ 
▼Ingtlemei je reconvrai ma con- 
naissance. 



182 


FBENOABPOKEN*. '1 


See the Table No. 


1 
OP ORDINAL NUMBERS. 


LO, page 178y for the use of the Ordinal number, imteme. 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICTEi^ No. 4. 
FROM TABLB So. la Pao* 178. 


Jepus, 


[able. 
I cool^ was 






Je marclial, 


I walked. 






Le qnatrevliigt-iiiiieme jour, j 


decette, 


of this. 






je pus parler. Le qoatreTingt- : 


terle, 


aA«HA« 






dizieme, je marchaL Quel est ce | 


senes. 








celni-ci, 


tbiBOue. 






erne de cette s^rie. Et cdai-d? . 


de lameme, 
etcegros, 


of the same, 
and this 






Le centieme de la m6me s^rie. 
Et celui qui est sur cette fen^tre? 
Le cent-unieme delaseptieme 


volume, 


volume. 






sdrie. Et ce gros volume lit bas sur 


snroette, 
quel est, 


uponthk. 
what IB. 






cette table ? CTest le millieme 1 
de la qaatorzieme aerie. Quel 
est Id dernier de la TingUeme et 


le dernier 


the last 








ladenilere, 


the last 






ieme. 


:■ ; 











16' 



Cable Ho. 1 1* 



184 



FBENOB 8P0KXN. 



I 



TABLE No. 11. 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



OB, tllis, that. * 



Before a noan masculine 

beginning with a conso- 

nanty or h aspirated. 



rote, (m.) 
rouge, (m.) 
noir, (m.) 
blanc, (m.) 
vert, (m.) 
Jamie, (m.) 
▼iolet, (m.) 
pomprei (m.) 
grl«, (m.) 
^huMard, 
^ablenr, 
^bamean, (m.) 



.J' 

pink or 

red. 

black. 

white. 

green. 

yellow. 

▼iolet 

purple. 

gwy. 

hussar. 

liar. 

hamlet. 



* When ee is not connected 
with a sabstantiYO, it ex- 
presses a penon or a thing 
spoken of^ then it means it: 
ipd csC-eef who is it ? deque 
means whaL Oe que voue 
ArhMXtmOKDB what you write ; 
or, that which you write. 



GET, this, that 



Before a noun masculine 
beginning with a vowel 
or h mute. 



honneur, (m.) 
homme, 

habit, (m.) 

(m.) 

haUUement, 
oiivrag6| (m.) 
coil, (m.) t 
arbre, (m.) 
enfimt,} 
argent, (m.) 
ami, (m.) 
esprit, (m.) 
oraf; (m.) § 



honor. 



coat. 

dress. 

work. 

eye. 

tree. 

child. 

money. 

friend. 

wit. 



I 



t Pronormoe euU: the / is 
liquid. 

|Fronoance0i/&fi. Enfant 
is mascoline, when speaking 
of a boy ; and feminine when 
referring to a girl: c^eettm 
beif or wfi€ beOe enfiaiL 

\ ceuft sound the f, except 
in the plnral o»/i, in eeuf- 
fiaie,eaid<Buf'dwr, Seepage 
154. 



OBTTByiliiiiUL 



Before a noun feminine. 



prison, (f.) 
conlenr, (f.) 
humeor, (f.) 
ohalear, (f.) I 
• (£)l 



llivenr, (f.) | 
(f.)ll 
blanchenr, 

candenr, (f.) | 

henre, (f.) 

Oialne, (f.) 

'haie,(£) 

*arpe,(£) 

qionte, (f.) 



prison. 

color. 

[temper, 
humor, 

heat 

error. 

favor. 

[ness. 
white- 
candor, 
hour, 
hatred, 
hedge, 
harp, 
shame. 



J Sound ther at the end of 
those five words. 



Before any noons, in the 
ploraL 



(f) 
haHtatloiiSi 

liaHtiide8,(£) 

aignllbi, (f.) 

(m.) 

hamesons, 
vertos, (f.) 
talents, (m.) 
sons, (m.) T 
vers, (m.) T 
histoires,(f.) 
cedres, (m.) 
■hanteozB, (f.) 
*heros, 
heromes. 



f The f does noltoand; 
pronounce scM| osmu 



habita- 

habits. 

needles. 

fish^iooki 

virtaes. 



sounds. 

verses. 

histories 
[trees, 
cedar 

heights. 

heros. 

hermnes 





XDWABD OHUBCB's SYSTEM. 185 1 


OF DEMONSTRATIVE AND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 


Ck (this) is always employed before a masculine singolar noon, beginning with a consonant, or 
an h aspirated. (&i (this) is used b^ore a noun mascaline singolar, b^inning with a vowel or 
1 a silent iL 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTfeE No. 1. 
PBOM THE TABLE No. 11. 


jPaime, 


pike. 
I love or 

[pink, 
this rose 

tender. 

to prefer. 


cbolslstenty 


choose. 


ceroM, 

teadre, 

, prafiBTcrf 


rieiifpas, 
regarder, 
me regardOf 


nothing, not 
tokx^at 
tome kx>ks. 


Pagx 184. 

J'aime oe roae tendre. Je 
n'aime pas ce rouere. Tutroaves 
06 noir joU? Je pr^f^ ce 


prefexe, 

tatroUTOfy 

chofatTy 


prefer, 
thou findest 
to choose. 


parleralt, 

dizheiirea, 

crolralSf 


would speak 
tenhonrs. 


blanc It ce yert. Elle cHoisit 
ce Janne. Nona prenons ce 
violet. Vona aurez ce pour- 
pre. na auront ce gria, et ellea 


elle choUdt, 


she chooses, 
to take. 


aidez-moly 
t'ilvoiia plait, 


help me. 
if yoa please 


ne choisissent rien. Ce ^uatard 
me regarde. Ce liableiir me* 

parlerait dix heures que je ne croir- 


▼OQ^^anrez, 
ilsaunmt, 


we take. 

[have, 
yon win 

[have. 
ihejwiU 


plaire, 
atroaver, 

• • • • a 


to please, 
tofnd. 


ais pas It unedeses paroles. Aidez' 
moi h trouver le chemin de ce 
Oiameau. Donnez-moicetha- 
Ut,s*ilvou8 plait 


ellMne, 


ihey (£) 








en, ire alwi^iuedi 


fa,r,fai,y.snd 
M objects or xe- 




• 






24 







186 FRENCH SPOKSK. | 




TABLE No. 12. 






PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 




aziravxiAa. 




SUBJECT. 
JE, (L) 

FIBST PBBgOK. 


SUBJECT. 
TU, (thou.) 

SBOOKD PEBgON. 


SUBJECT. 
IL,(he,it) 

THIBD PBBSOH.CB.) 


SUBJECT. 
ELLE, (she, it) 

THIBD PEBSOK.d) 


OBJECT. 


OBJECT. 


OBXBOT. 


OBJECT.^ 


me, {h moi.) 
me, (moi.) 
moi, (k moi.) 
moi, (moL) 


tome. 

me. 
to me. 

me. 


te, (ktoi.) 
te, (tol) 

toi, (ktoi.) 
toi,(toL) 


tothee. 

thee, 
to thee. 

thee. 


iQl, (kluL) 

L (M.) 
pe, (oeUu) 


to him. 
him. 
him. 
it 


iQi, (keUe.) 
la, (eUe.) 
eUe, « 
eUe, ^ 


1 
to her. i 

her. 1 

her. 

it 


1 

PXiVBAXi. 


SUBJECT. 
NOUS, (we.) 

FIRST PEBSOir. 


SUBJECT. 
VOUS, (you.) 

SECOND PEBSON. 
OBJECT. 


SUBJECT. 
IL8, (they.) 

THIBD FBB8OH.0B-) 


SUBJECT. : 

1 

ELLES, (they.) , 

THIBD P£BSOX.(t) 


OBJECT. 


OBJECT. 


OBJECT. ! 


nous, (h nous.) 
nous, (nous.) 


tons. 


VOIUi (&T0U8.) 

VOUS, (youB.) 


to yon. 
you. 

• • % a 


lenr, (keax.) 
lM,on(eiiz.) 
enx, « 


to them, 
them, 
them. 


lenr, (kelles.) 
leBi (elles.) 
elles, <' 


to them, 
them.; 
them. 





BDWABD CHUBCH's SYSTEM. ^®^ 11 


OP DEMONSTRATIVE AND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 


The proooiiDs fiie» le, <^ notit, voi» , fatir, fa, fat, f , fas, y, and 


«it, are generally placed before the 1 


veib which goveniB them. Thej are always repeated before the yexb to.which tliej belong : Jt || 


MM LB WAT etlsRhd dirt. 






VOCABULARY. 


DICT&E No. 2. 
FROM THE TABLES Nos. 11 & IS. 


iidloiter, 


flate. 
to oongrata- 


▼lenty 


comes. 


domie-toi. 


give thyself. 


d'eOe, 


from her. 


Faob 184 & 18S. 


la peine, 


the trouble. 


o'estelle, 


it is her. 


Je te f^lidte de oet honnenr. 
Je te parle de cet homme. 


delamettrey 


ofittoputon 


qoil'a, 


who it has. 

[ed. 
sowed, plant- 


Prends cet habit donne-toi * la 


aftitf 


has made. 


plantep 


peine de le mettre. Est^ce toit 




[make. 






quiasfaitfairecet habUement ? 


ftirei 


to do^ to 


6«t-ce, 


is it. 




jcvato, 


Igo. 


labas, 


yonder. 


Est-celniqnirafait? JeTBisle 


letoir, 


him to see. 


ftra, 


will make. 


voir et le Ini} dire. Cet €b11 
iQiS (f.) fait maL Get enfiint 


dirCy 


tosajytotell 
[sores. 


dnUeiif 


some' good. 


la tourmente trop. Get arbl^ 


ftitmal, 


makes evil, 


Mt-oevoiifl, 


is it yon. 


Tient d'elle, c'est elle qui I'a 


tamviaiter 


tioiAle. 


eorlt, 


written. 


bas. Oni c'est eUe. Cet ar- 


tropi 


too much. 






gent noua fera dn Men. EstH» 


▼enlr, 


to come. 






vons qui avcz toit h oet ami? 
Ge n'est pas noua. 










• In the imperatiTe affirniBtlYe moL ioi, 
noitt, tKWf, lia, leur,kfht let, y^ at mi, foiloir 
theyerh. 

t After c'eiC.iie^ and a n'at pn; moi, 
toi; now, tKWf, Aft; cSl MX, an vied. 

X When a Toib has two rogfaneos one 
direct and one indirect, the dhreet it drat 
espxesaed: Je vm$ le id dke; dUeehlm. 




























• 






f £« means 10 Aflr, or, 10 Ana. 



188 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



OF DEM0N8TBATIVE AND PERSONAL PRONOUNS- 



The same rale as the preoedlng. 



VOCABULARY. 



afidt, 

pliUndre, 
Jevous plains 
leorfidt, 
da tort} 
leafidt, 
fremlr, 
connalBsez-voiu 
connaitre, 
Je parlaifl, 
en 06 moment 
lem* a fidt, 



has made. 

evil. 

to pitj. 

I you pity. 

[makes, 
to them 

some wrong. 

them makes, 
[horror, 
tremble with 

know you. 

to know. 

I spoke. 

[inent 
in this mo- 

[made. 
to them has 



dachagrbiy 
lenr plait, 
lesamnse, 
amnaer, 
Je let Yoia, 
ilya, 
qaelquea, 
la chalem', 
de oe pajra, 
Jeoroia, 
que onif 



some sorrow 
[pleases, 
to them 

them amuses 

to amuse. 

I them see. 

there is. 

a few. 

the heat 

[tiy. 
of thiscoon- 

I believe. 

that yes. 



DICXilE No. 8. 

FROM THE TABLES NoS. 11 & 12. 
Paob 184 & 186. 

Get OBHf Tous a fait maL Je i 
vona plains. Us ont beanooup 
d'esprit, mais oet esprit leUT fait 

du tort Cette prtaon l^a fait 
fr^mir. Connaissez-vons mes fibres ? 
Certainement je porlais d'enx* en 
ce moment Cette lettre leur (f.) 
fait dn chagrin. Cette oonleor 
letir plait Cette hmnenr lea 
amuse. Connaissez-vous mes soeurs ? 
Beanooup, je let vob sourent, je 
pariais d'ellea il y a qudqaes min- 
utes. La chaleur de oe pays lenr 
plait-^Ue ? Je crois que ouL 



* Xei, is used before the Tert>; < 
fltZ^afterit 



and 



EDWARD CHUBCH's SYSTEM. 189 


1 OP DEMONSTRATIVE PBONOITNS. 


CetU before a 


feminine noon \ ee$ before any 


noun in the pluraL 


VOCABULARY. ( 


DICTEi: No. 4. 


/ 


[able. 






erteondderable 


is consider- 


prouver. 


to prove. 


FROM THB TABIiBS Noa. 11 ib 1%. 


estgrande, 


is great 


son. 


his or her. 


Paos 184 & 186. 


fidtplaiflir. 


[sure, 
makes' plea- 


remorda. 


remorse. 


Cette erreur est considerable. 


' \ 








Cette fiivenr est grande. Cette 


avoir, 


tosee. 


admirablea. 


admirable. 


Uanohenr, fait pkdsir k voir. 


meraTit, 


me delights. 

[me. 


nnlaiblea. 


hurtful. 


Cette candenr me ravit Cette 


[pa«. 


\ / 




henre ne me convient pas du tout 


ne me oonvleiit 


does not snit 


a la aante. 


to the health 


Cette ^haine est-elle implacable ? 


coDTenir, 


to suit. 


combien, 


how much* 


Cette 'haie est fort hello. Cette 


da tout, 


atalL 


coutent, 


cost 


'harpe est-elle a Toiifl? Cette 
Oolite prouve son remords. Ces 


est^Ue, (neut) 


is it 
j]inexbrable. 


aont. 


are. 


habitatioiui sont admirables. Ces 


implacable. 


miplacable, 


rarea, 


scarce. 


habitudes sont nuisiUes k la sant^ 


fort bene. 


very fine. 






Combien coutent ces aiguilles? 


. -_ ^ 








Voyez-vous tons ces poissons k ces 


eit-elleavoiifl? 

i 


is it joors ? 






hamegons? Ces vertns sont 


pronve. 


proves. 






rares. 


! 











190 VREKOH SFOKEN. 


OP DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 




The same rule as the preceding. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTiJE No. 5. 
SHOM TU£ TABLES Nos. 11 & 12. 


iontpirecieiiz 


arepredouB. 


foutea, 


alL 


sontdifflclles, 


are difficult 


lea qnalitea, 


the qualities 


PAABiaiaias. 


arendre« 


to render. 


aonttonjaiiray 


are always. 


Cea talenfta sont piMenz. Cea 


[lenx, 


[nious. 




[some. 


aona sent diffidles k rendre. Cea 


sontharmon- 


areluOnno- 


beUea, 


fine, hand- 


vera sent harmonieux. Cea hia- 


sont fbrt, 


are very. 


commei 


as. 


toirea sont fort intdressantes. Cea 


/ 








oedrea sont-ils h vous ? Oai^aiDsi 


interessaates 


intereBting. 


dea, 


some. 


que ceuz qui sont sur cea 4iaa- 


nonUUMf 


are they. 


daaaaaai 


goddesses. 


tenra. Cea^ieroaderomansont 


aToiui, 


to you, yours 




. 


toiijonrs toutes les qualit^; et oea 
heitmiea sont toujoors belles coi&- 


alnaiquey 


as well as. 






me dee dresses. 


cenx, 


those. 








quisont, 


which are. 








deromana, 


of novels. 








out tOV^OUFSy 

• 


have always 









192 


FBEN CH 


SPOKEN. 


. 


POSSESS 


>IVE PI 
TH 


TABLE No. 13. 


NOUNS 
SPERSOl 


S EXPRESSED. 


«NOUNS WHICH AGREE WITH 


B FOLLOWING RELATE ONLY TO ONI 


MASCULINE, 
8nroi7i.AS. 


FEMININE. 

BINOnULB. 


MASCULINE, 

FLURJLL. 


FEMININE, 

FLUXAX* 


Lemien 
amol, 


mine* 


La mienne 
amoi, 


mine. 


Lea miens 
amol, 


mine. 


Las miennes 
amol, 


mine. 


Le tlen 
atol, 


tnine. 


La Uenne 
atoi, 


thine. 


Lestiens 
atol, 


thine. 


Lea tlennea 
atoi, 


thine. 


Le sien, 
alul, 


his, its. 


La si^nne 
alui. 


his, its. 


Lea aiena 
alni. 


his, its. 


Lea alennea 
alniy 


his, its. 


Le sien 
aelle, 


hers, its. 


La sienne 
aelle, 


hers, its. 


Lea aiena 
aelle,- 


hers, its. 


Lea aiennea 
aellea, 


hers, its 




THE FOLLOWING RELATE 


TO SEVERAL PERSONa 1 


MASCULINE, 

SIirQUXJLB. 


FEMININE, 

8IKQt7T«AB. 


MASCULINE, 

PLUSAL. 


FEMININE, 1 


Le notre 
anons, 


ours. 


La notre 
anons, 


ours. 


Leanotrea 
anona, 


ours. 


Leanotrea 
anona, 


ours. 


Le votre 
aToufly 


yours. 


La Totre 
a Tons, 


yours. 


Lea Totrea 
aTona, 


yours. 


LeaTotrea 
aTona, 


yours. 


Le Icnr 
aenx, 


theirs. 


Lalenr 
aeoz, 


theirs. 


Lealenra 
aenx, 


theirs. 


Lealenra 
aenx, 


theirs. 


Lelenr 
a elles, 


theirs. 


Lalenr 
a elles, 


theirs. 


Lealenra 
aellea, 


theirs. 


Lealenra 
aellea, 


theirs. 



BBWABD church's SYSTEM. 193 


POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS WHICH AGREE WITH NOUNS EXPRESSED. 


VOCABULARY. 1 


DICT^E No. 1. 
FROM TABLE No. 13. Paob 192. 


portrait^ 


portrait. 


• 




■iUenfldtf 


so well made 


... • . 




Votre portrait n'est pas si bien 


celiil-ol, 


this one* 






fiedt que le mien; h qui est celui- 


[micuZf 


[better. 






ci? AmoL Le Uen est un peu 


est unpen 


18 a hide 






mieux. Ce cheval est-il a toi? 


Tendn, 


sold. 






Oiii. Ton fr^re a-t-il vendu le 


Tenne, 


oome. 






Sien 7 (m.) Non ; 2i qui est celui- 
ci? BestalnL Votre soBurest^e 


1 celniy 


that. 

[yonder. 






venue avec le sien 7 (f.) Certaine- 


1 qui est la tea, 


which is 






menl, celui qui est Ik bas, pr^s de la 


pres de la, 


near of the 






grille est a elle. Quelle jolie voi- 








ture I La mienne. est beaucoup 


'grille, 


gate. 






plus belle; a qol est celle-ci ? 


quelle Jolie, 


whatapret^ 






Elle est a moL 


Toiture, 


carriage. 




.■•••• 


• 






25 




* 



194 VBENCH SPOKSH. 


POSSBSSIVB PBONODNS WHICH AQREB WITH NOUNS EXPBESSBD. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICXiSE No. 2. 
FROM TABLB No. 13. PaabIM. 


Toiol, 


look at 


pins, 


more* 


ma iiioDtr6f 


mjrmratdi. 


d'nnanf . 


of a year. 


Yoict ma montre d'or, oil est la 


d'or, 
celle-ol, 


of gold. 

this one. 


c'estDumpnei 
qnilalnia. 


itmy&ther. 

[has. 

who it to her 


tlenne ? Je ne sais pas ; celled 
n'estreaepasatol? Non. JLqni 
est-elle done? A mon firtee. Vrai- 


n'est-enepM? 


is it not 


donnee, 


given. 


mentl Est-ce la Menne? Ooi 


aqalf 
est-elle done? 


[whose, 
to whom, or 

is it then. 


ponrealSte, 


for her feast 


elle est a InL Ta soeur en srUSk 
une? Oui celle-d est la sienne. 
Cette jolie, eutoiirfe de diamans? 


▼raiment, 


truly. 






Oui, elle est a elle depuis phis d*an 


taaosnry 
ena-t-elleime? 
entonree de, 


thy sister. 

[she one 7 
of them has 
[of. 
surrounded 


' 




an, <^est mon p^ qui lalui adoan^ 
poursaftte. 


Altantknti^ 


diamonds. 








depnla, 


since. 








^ 







EDWABD CHUBCS'8 STSTEU. 



195 



POSSESSIVE PBONOTTNS WEIGH AGREE WITH NOUNS EXPBESSED. 



VOCABULARY. 



a qui sont, 
' ces senriettes 
cenz-df 
cadette. 



whose are. 

[kins, 
these nap- 

these ones. 

joonger. 



17/ 



SB 



DICTiJE No. 8. 

FROM TABLE Na ». Paos 192. 

Oil sent yos fils? Au coUbge. 
Les miens sent partis hier. k 
qui sont ces serviettes? A moL 
Votre fHre a-t-U des enfans ? Lies 
Siena sent morts. Je crojais qae 
oeox-d 4taient a InL Non ceux-d 
sont k ma doear cadette. Yiaiment I 
Oui ce sont lea aiena. Et celm-ci, 
est-il a elle? Non oehd-ci est h 
Madame D. notre voisme. Yos 
filles sont-ellesarrivfei? Ooi; lea 
miennea aussL 



196 FBENCH SFOKEN. 


1 

POSSESSIVE PBONOHNS WHIGH AGBEE WITH NOUNS EXPRESSED. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTEfe No. 4. 
FROM TABLE Na IS. Pass 192. 


desnouveUes, 


flomenewB. 






reoeToir, 


to receive. 








cciii8ervM«voiifl| 
▼osflenrs, 


do joa keep, 
your flowery 






Hier. Quandpenses-tarecevoirdes 
nouvelles des Uennea? Com-: 
ment conservez-vous voe fleurs?; 


tOUtlllll^llMlt 


all aimplj. 






Tout simplement dans de Fean frai- . 


dans dft Teau, 


ter. 
in aomewa- 






che. Et votre sobup? EUe met' 
lea siennea dana notre aerre ; k ' 


Draiche, 


cold. 




. • • . • 


qui8ontceUea-ci?AmeafiIlea. Vrai- 


met^eUe, 


pots she. 






ment? Oni oelles-ci aont a eUea.' 


[rlTw7 
qaivientd'ar- 


gieen-hoiue. 

[arrived? 

who has just 






Votre onde eat id, oe n'eat pas le 
notre qui viMit d'aniver. Si, je 
vooa aaaure que if est la Totre. 


•!•• 


yea. 








JevoosaMim, 


I joaassQxe 








« Fwids afflmiAtite: Ilditqm 







XDVABO CHXTBOB'S. 8T8TBM. ^^^ II 




1 


POSSESSIVE FBONOUITS WHICH AGKES WITH HQUNB BXFBESBED. 11 


VOCABULART. 


DICTilE No. 5. 

FROM TABLR Na IB. FaoM 19S. 

A qui sontceB fruits? AnoiMi; 
Je YOiu dis qu'ils ne scmt paa a 
▼OIU. Aquiestceliyre? Amea 
cousins. H n'est pas a eaz. Si,c'est 
lelenr. AqniestoecahlerP k 
mes oonsmes. 11 n'est pas a elles. 
Si, c'est le leur. A qui est cette 
lettre? A nomi. Est^se la To^ 

notre. A qui est cette baUe? A 
mes fibres. Elie n'est pas a eux. 
Si, Vestlalenr. A qui est cette 
boite. A mea sorazs. BUen'est 
pas a eUea. Je tous assnre qae 
c^estlalenr. 


cahier, 
tMlle, 


[book. 
wd/tiag- 

ImIL 


•••••• 




-^-^ 







198 FRENCH SPOKEN. 


POSSESSIVE FBONOUNS WHICH AGREE WTTH NOUNS EXPRESSED. 


VOCABULARY. | 


^ ' 1 
DICT^E No. 6. 

FROM TABLE No. U. Paos 192. ; 


▼iCIUlCllty 


come. 






toiiflleB, 


every. 






Quand triennent VOS parents ? ; 


a pen pres, 


fortnight, 
pietly near. 






Lea notrea viennenttocis lesnuns. 
£t lea TOtrea 7 Jh viennent toos < 
lea quinze jours. Et ceux de vob 


nnefbls, 


onoe. 






anods? Lea leura jamais. Et 


par an, 
demenrent, 


by year, 
Uye, dwelL 






ceuxde vos couaines quand viennent- 
ils 7 Lea leura, h pen pr^ une 
fois par an. Fourquoi lea Totres 
▼iennent-Os si souvent ? Farce que 
lea XlOtX^a demeurent k trois milleB 
d*kL Fonrqaoi lea leura vien- ' 
nent-fls si rarement? Faroe que 


• • • ••• • 








lea leura demeurent k New York. . 
1 qui est ee jardin? H esta nova. 
Et odni^ n est a eUea. i 









®uilre 



so * 



FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE, 

REeULAR VERBS. 



200 



FBBNOH SPOKE K. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE. 



AffirmaUv^mmiL 

Je Rends. 

Ta *« g. 

Il,eUe « « 
Nous ^ ons. 
Youa ^ ez. 
IlB,eUe8" ent. 



NigativemenL 

Je ne rends pas. 

Ta ne rends paS. 
By eUe ne rend pas. 
Nous ne rendons pas. 
Yous ne rendez pas. 
Bs, elles ne rendent paS. 



LUerrogaHvmnenJL 

Est^ce qne je rends ? 
Rends-tU? 
Bend-U? 
Bendons-nons ? 
Bendez-vous 7 
Bendent-Us, elles 7 



JnterrogaUvement Sf Nigativ, 

est-ce que je ne rends pas? 
ne rends-ttt pas? 

ne rend-il pas7 

ne rendons-nous pas? 
ne rendez-YOUB pas? 

ne rendent-ils pas? 



IhfnUif. Fartieipe prStmit. Partic. passd. 




OondiUonnd. 



rais, 

rais, 

rait. 

rions, 

riez, 

raienL 



ImpenOif* 



ons, 



SuX^imcHf present 

1 Queje e, 

2 Quetu es, 
8 Qu'il e. 

1 Que nous ionS| 

2 QueTousieZf 

3 Qu'ils ent. 

Imparfaii du Sukjonddf* 

1 Isse, 

2 Isses, 

3 It. 

1 Issions, 

2 issiez, 

3 issent 



EDWARD CHUBCH'S 8T8TBM. 201 1 


CONJUGAT] 
AU the verbs of the fourth 


[ON OP THE REGULAR 


VERBS IN RE. 1 


ronjugation having the infinitive terminated in Indre or sondre. 1 


take S, 8, t, instead of ds, du, d, for the three persons singular of the present of the indicative : M 


Je peiruy tu peinsy %l peitU ; I paint, thou paintest, he paints. (Feindrey to paint) Je rUouSj tu || 


ruimiy il resaut ; 


I resolve, .thou resolvest, he resolves. (Edsaudrej to resolve.) 1 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 1. 




TO 






rendre, 


render. 


proYidence, 


providence. 


FBOMTHEGUIPEINJRJE:. FaosSOO. 


attendie. 


wait. 


cri8, 


cries. 


Je rends gr&ce k la providence. 


defendie, 


defend. 


impudence, 


impudence. 


Tu attendais ton pbre, est-il 


tondify 


shear. 


ce linge, 


this linen. 


venu? 
n defendit son pays. 


entendRi 


hear. 


ton traTail, 


thy work. 


Nous avons entendn des cris. 




shame. 


des larmes, 


some tears, 
[her tomb. 


VOUS . COnfondreZ son impu- 
dence. 


tordit, 


twist, wring, 
hang up, de- 


sur sa tombe, 


upon his or 


ns tordraient ce linge mieux 


sQspendre, 


unpeumoins, 


a little less. 


que VOUS. 


/ 








Suspends ton travail pour un 


repandre, 


spread, spill. 


voire temps. 


your time. 


moment. 


perdre, 


lose. 


Immedlatemnt 


immediately 


Bepandons des larmea sur sa 
tombe. 


▼endrt, 


sell. 




this child. 


Perdez un pen moins votro temps. 


rei>6ndif, 


answer. 






Que Je Tende mon cheval et ma 










voiture. 


nordr^i 


bite. 






Que tn rep<mdi8se8 immddl* 
atement 








j 






QnMl mordSt cet en&nt. 



26 



202 



rBSNOB 8POKXH. 



TO THM 

CONJUGATION OF THE IBREaTILAB YEBB8 IN 



1. 



LuKeoHf priienL 



1 Je fl, 

2 Ta s, 
8 B, eUe t* 

1 Nous onSf 

2 Yous ez, 
8 nsycUesent. 



Je b 



ImparfaiL 



ai>, 

al>, 

alt. 

Ions, 

lez. 



PrUMtdifim. 



1 • 

2 • 
8 . 

1 . 

2 . 

3 • 


1U, la, 
> urenty Iroiita 




Futur. 


1 • 

2 . 
8 • 


ralf 

rsflf 

ra. 


1 . 

2 . 
8 • 


roM, 

r6Zf 

ronta 




Janftfoiyi 



SuifimeUf prS$eiiL 

1 Qaeje e^ 

2 Qaeta 68, 
8 Qa'O e. 

1 QuenooslcMlJii 

2 QaeToiule^ 
8 Qo'ils enL 

jbyaiiyaiir liM SuJbjonei^. 



1 Qae j6 M, 

2 « IMM, 
8 « tLt 

1 " SlOIUi 

2 ^ siez, 
8 « 



ObfuUioiisML 



1 « 
a 

8 « 

1 « 

2 « 
8 « 



raifl, 

nit. 

rhnuif 

rlesB, 

ndent. 



• Wlwa the fint penon lingiilftr of tiie indieathre pmenl oidi in i(< tiw fldid pcnoo riognlar 
of a t. Thus, Je nrtmb^ iu prauk^ U prend. 
t Instead of adaing It to u, cbange u into It 



Oad; 



BDWABP CHUBCH'8 STfiTEM. 



(0jcplanati(m df ti)e (S^vabt 



ThM foOawinff TaNe eaMUu at cne view aU the JMmUive Tenses of this Om^ugaium. 

Im The flnt person singular of fbe IndicatlTe inresent makes: 

1. The three persons singdar of the indioalive present 

2. The second person smgolar of the imperatiTe. 

IL The present participle makes : 

1« The three persons plural of the indicative present. 

2. The imperfect of the indicatiye. 

9L The two persons plural of the imperatiYe. 

4 The present of the snbjunctivei in changing anA into the terminations of the Guide. 

III. The preterit definite makes : 

1. Its whole tense in changing is or ns into the terminations of the Guide. 

2. The imperfect of the subjunctare, in adding to the primitive tense the terminations of the 
Gnidep — except the third person of the singolar, which changes is or ns into it or nt. 

IV. The inflnitiTe mood makes: 

1. The future in changing re iaio the terminations of the Guide. 

2. The conditional in changing re into the terminations of the Guide. 

V. The past participle makes: 

An the compound tenses, with the help of one of the auxiliaries. 



204 




FRENCH 8POK£N. 








FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE.- 


IRREGULAR. 




Infinitif present. 


Participe present. 


Participe passi. 


IndicaHf prisenL \ 


alMoudro, 


to absolve. 


absolTanty 


absolving. 


abma-tey 


abM>lved. 


rmbm^m. 


labedte. 


battrei 


beat 


battanty 


beating. 


batto, 


beaten. 


Ja bata. 


Ibeat 


■HUTOf 


drink. 


bnyanty 


drinking. 


IKI. 


drunk. 


Ja boil, 


Idonk. 


bmlroi 


bray. 




mftVipg a 






Zlbrait, 


he brays. 


DmiFOf 


makeanoise 













dOTB, 


close. 






oloib 


cloMd. 


JacUMb 


Icloee. 


concliiroy 


conolndc. 


concliianty 


concluding. 


coneln, 


concluded. 


Ja oanclaa. 


I conclude, i 


eonfirOf 


preserra. 


COnflMUly 


preserving. 


ccnflt, 


preserved. 


Jeconflm 


I presenre* 


coodre, 


sew. 


COOMUlty 


sewing. 


coun. 


sewed. 


Ja coadfl, 


I sew. ; 


cnaadrof 


fear. 


cralgaaaty 


fearing. 


cmiBl, 


feand. 


Ja cffain% 


Ifear. 


croiF0i 


believe. 


croyaUfey 


believing. 


OTDf 


boUcved. 


Ja crote, 


I believe. ! 




grow. 


CMHBainy 


growing. 


A 

era, 


grown. 


Ja crote, 


I grow. 


direy 


say. 


dinaty 


saying. 


dit, 


said. 


Ja dli» 


I say. 

[SghL i 


eclore* 


cometolight 






i^Um, 


cometolight 


Zlaclot, 


he comes to < 




write. 


eoTiTant, 


writing. 


ocnt| 


written. 


J'icrim 


I write. 1 


eteiiidre, 


put out 


^Msaaaty 


putting out. 


•teiBt, 


put out. 


J'ateina, 


I put oat 




exclude. 


ozclnant 


excluding. 


AKcbl, 


excluded. 


J^ezclnfly 


I exclude. 


fidre. 


to make, do. 


fidnaty 




attt. 


made, done. 


Ja fiOi. 


I make. 


foindra, 


feign 


Mgnaat, 


feigning. 


M»t^ 


feigned. 


JalUafl, 


I feign. 


Jomdre, 


join. 


joignanty 


joining. 


Jotat, 


johied. 


JaJoiDi^ 


Ijoin. [ 


lire, 


read. 


lisaaty 


reading. 


ta. 


read. 


Ja 11% 


Iread. ! 


iDire, 


»hlne. 


Inisaaty 


shining. 


w, 


shone. 


Ja lai% 


Ishme. 1 


mandire, 


curse. 


maadiflBaaty 


cursing. 


HHMdlti 


cursed. 


Jemandis, 




rndttrei 


put 


mettaat, 


putUng. 


nOM, 


put 


Ja mats, 


I put 


moodrey 


grind. 


moolaaty 


grinding. 


moaln, 


ground. 


Jeinoad% 


I grind. 


naitrOf 


be bom. 


aaiflMmty 


being bom. 




been bom. 


Jenak, 




nnlref 


prejudice. 


aolMaty 


prejudicing. 


Did, 


prejudiced. 


Jenala. 


I prejudice. 


prendroy 


take. 


preaaaty 


taking. 


pri* 


taken. 


Jeprendfl, 


I take. 


peindroy 


paint. 


pelgaaaty 


painting. 


p^ 


painted. 


Jepeina, 


I paint 


resoodrey 


resolve. 


iMolTaaty 


resdlving. 


zU^timta, 


resolved. 


Ja>^miy 


I resolve. 


rirey 


laugh. 


riant, 


laughing. 


«* 


hinghed. 


Jari% 


Ilanghed. 


Fomproy 


break. 


rompant, 


breaking. 


roa^o, 


broken. 


Ja rompo^ 


I break. 


rafllTOy 


suffice. 


snllMuity 


sufficing. 


Mfl, 


sufficed. 


JasalBm 


I suffice. 


■Di¥!rOy 


follow. 


sohranty 


following, 
keeping si- 


■Ulf^ 


followed. 


Jamte, 


IfoDow. 
Ikeep^S?" 


telrey 


keep silence 


tateaaty 


tm 


kept silence. 


Ja talfl, 


▼ainczey 


vanquish. 


▼ainguaaty 


vanauishing 


▼aiaciv 


vanquished. 


JewaiBCfl» 


I vanquish. 


1 Thrrsy 


live. 


viv^nt. 


living. 


"^.. ,. 


lived. 


JaTte, 


lUve. 



EDWABD church's SYSTEM. 205 | 


FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE. — IRREGULAR. | 


PreterU 


difini. 


(S)b0erDatifln0. 

The word* prinled in italics are the exceptions to the preceding Guide. 


Jebatti% 


Ibeat. 


Jeboi. 


Idnmk. 


IiTDio. Pbks. Je bois, tu bois, fl boit, nous buvons, tous burez^tZt boiowtU, Subj. Puts. 
ftuj* bonf^ pn tu ioivMf qu'U bowe^ que nous buvions, que yous buviez, ^'iU bointtU, 


JeeoMte, 


Iconcladed. 




Je coolly. 


I preserved. 




Je confab 


I sowed. 




JeoalgBi., 


I feared. 


' 


Jeeraib 


IbeUeyed. 


• 


U^ 


I grew. 






I said. 

I wrote. 


IiiDic. Pus. Je dis, tu dis, U dit, noHs disona, wnu ditn, ils disent Didire, oontredire, 
interdire, mMire. predire, font : vous dMIsez, vous contredisez, vous interdisez, vous 
mMisez, vous predisez, les autres personnes et les autres temps se coi^uguent comme dire. 


Ir^Mgiifa, 


I put out 




{JVaOot, 


I excluded. 




Jeflib 


I made. 


Indic. Pse8. Je faia, tn fids, ilfidt, nous faisons, wmafaitM^ UsfmUL 


IjeMgnfa, 
Jejojesfa. 


I feigned. 
I joined. 


FuTUSs. Je ferai^ Im ftnu^ etc Subj. Pass. Qtt4 je faeee^que tu faeeea, etc. contre- 
faiie, dtfaire, refaire, tuiiUre et satisfatre so coiguguent de mme. 


Jelmb 


I read. 




Jemmndfab 


lontsed. 


- 


7«Bta» 


I put 




Jemoalai^ 


I ground. 




!j«Baqoii, 


Iwasbonh 




UvbU^ 


I prejudiced 




JepeigBli, 


I took. 
I ptttnted. 


Indic. Psbs. Je prends, tu prends, il prend, nous prenons, tous pranes, JZf prmnmu, 
Subj. Psxa. Que Jepreime, que tu preunea^ qu'il prennSf que nous prenions, que vous 


'j«i^olai, 


IresdlTed. 




J«iii^ 


Ilangjied. 




Jeranpii, 


I broke. 




'•■DOib 


I sufficed. 




'•to., 


IfoUowed. 
I keep^ 




JeTi|iiiqafa, 


lyanqniab- 


Inoic. Pbbs. J« TBincB, tu vdiios, U uaine^ nous yainqnoDS, yous Tainques, ill Tuinquent 


^•^•«*- 


[Myed. 





206 FBENOH. 8POKEK. 


CONJUGATION OF THE IBBEGULAB YEBBS IN RE. 

! 




INDICAIIYB PEBSENT. 




VOCABULARY. | 


DICTfeE No. 1. 




£gence. 


. 




sa negligence 


his negli- 

[whilat 
the iron 




long. . 


FBOMTHEGXTIDBINiiliE?. PAas20S. 


le fer tandls, 


la lampe, 


thehunp. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. ' 


qu'il est ohaiid, 


that it is hot 


lea artiatea, 


the artists. 


Tabaona cet homme de sa n^li- ! 


qae voiu avlez, 


that jou had. 


de la maslqiiay 


some music. 


gence. 
Jebatalefertandisqn^estchaad. ' 


tort, 


wrong. 


das ffMnancaSf 


some songs. 


Je boia fort peu de vin, mercL 


da matlOf 


from mom- 




charming. 


Tn doa d6ik ta lettre. 

n conclut que Yoos aviez tort 


an eolTf 


to night, 
[speak. 














EUe conflt tousles fruits dujardin. ! 


Inl en jMurler, 


to him to 

[not 
uiderstand 






Nona conaona du matin an soir. 


cempraioiis poB 






Vooa craignez de lui en parler. 










Da croient que nous ne compre- ' 


admliablemeiiti 


admirablj. 






nons pas. 


en retard, 


late. 






Ellea croiaaent admirablement 


eat-ce Trai? 


is it true? 




....*• 


Je dia que vous 6tes en retard, est- 
ce vrai? 










trop, 


too. 






Tn ecria tzop longuement 
n eteint toiyours la lampe. 










EUe ezdnt tons les artistes. 






Nona fidaona souvent de la mu- 






sique. 






Vona fidtea des romances char- 






mantes. 



EDWARD church's SYSTEM. 



207 



OONJnGAHON OP THE IBBEOXTLAIt VEBBS IN RE. 



mPBKFECT. 



VOCABULARY. 



paiesMBi (m.) 



[mienx, 
de mieiix en 

lie fen, 



etrangerSy 

[tiomh 
deft obserraF 

treft malade, 

leura prieres, 

anx miranes, 

allnsu, 

manalae 0IOII0 

bome vobnitoy 

le cafe, 



-lazy. 

[better, 
better and 

thefii^ 

trangers. 

[vations. 
some obser- 

very sick. 

their- piajon. 

to mine, 
[knowledge, 
without the 
[fate, 
onfortonato 

good win. 

the coffee. 



projetfl, 
Uberte, 
probleme. 



[designs, 
projects, or 

libertj. 

problan. 



DICXilE No. 2. 

FBOM THE GUIDE IN 12jE;. Paob202. 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Je diftais qu'il est paresseux. 

Tu ecrivaia de mieux en mieux. 

n eteignait le feu. 

Elle ezduait tons les Strangers. 

Notia ikiaiona des observations. 

Voua feignlez d'etre tr^ malade. 

na joignaient leurs prieres aux 
miennes. 

Ellea liaalent k Tinsn de lenrs 
parents. 

Je maadiaaaia ma mauvaise 
.^toile. 

Ta mettaia toute la bonne vo- 
lenti possible. 

n moulalt le cb£6. 

Nona nniaiona k leurs projets. 

Vona'preniez trop de liberty. 

na peignaient admlrablement 

Je reaolvaia un grand probldme. 



18^ 



208 FSEKCH BPOKBN. 


OONJUOAnON OF THE IBBEGULAS Y£BBS IN BE. 


FBBTBBIT DKHNITB. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTlfeB No. «. 
FROM THE QUIDS IN 12^. PAOsaos. ' 


en le Toyant, 


in him see- 


plaiaantei\ 


to joke. 


aveo enZf 
11 7 a nn an, 


withthem. 

[year, 
there is a 


Je plalimntitfaf, 
quila, 


I joked. 

that they. 

[back, 
would oome 


IRREGVLAB VESB& 
Je ria toujours en la Toyant 


nn mot, 


a word* 


lewlAiidnlMt, 


TarampiaaTeceux^ilyaimaa. . 


a la lettre, 


to the letter. 


lihisleniM^ 


many times. 


n anfllt qae vons ^criries mi mot 
EUe anirit tons mes avis k la 


la Terite, 

[points, 
anr tons lea 


the truth. 

[points, 
on all the 

modestly. 


tons lea fenx, 

[aiona, 

toateadiacas- 

poUtiqaea, 


an the fires, 
[sions. 
an discos- 


lettre. 

Nona tnmea la v^iitd. 

Vooa Talnqiutea sor tons les 
points. 


en retraite, 
en votie flnreinr, 


in retreat. 

in your favor 
[ing« 


da leor miaaz, 


of their best 


Ha Teonrent modestement ! 
EUea batUrent en retraite. 
Je condna en votre faveur. 


toate la ioinei 


all the even* 






Tn conala assidument toate la ; 


que Bon, 
ipere ne Tuit, 


that his. 
[come. 






soirdc. 
n craignlt que son pere ne vlnt 
EUe cmt que je plaisantais. 
Da dirent qu'ils reviendraient 










EUea eorlTlrent ploaiears fois. 






Nona etoignunea foos lea fanz. ! 












pditiques. 






Ha flrent de leor mieox. 

1 



XDWABD OHUBOH'8 8TBTXX. 209 


CONJUGATION OF THE ntBEGDLAB YEBBS IN BE. 




PBETEBTT IMDBFmiTE. 1 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICT^B No. 4. 








' 


trop^tte, 


too quick. 






FROM THE GUIDE IN ££;. Fags MS. 


cettaomme, 

[pagne, 
tettre la cam- 


this man. 

[sense. 
to talk nan* 

mjdog.. 




« 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


J'aibu. 
J'ai absoos. 


J'ai joint 
Tu as lu. 


nun pare, 


mjpaik. 






J'ai battu. 


naluL 


cette affidre, 


thisaffiiir. 






J'aidoB. 
J'ai condu. 
J'ai confit. 
J'ai cousn. 
J'ai crainL 
J'ai cru. 
J'ai crA. 
J'aidit. 
n est ^dos. 
J'ai<^t. 
J'ai ^teint 
J'ai exdu. 


Elle amandil. 
Nous aTons mis. 
Vous avez moulu. 
Us scmtn^ 
Elles ont nuL 
J'ai pris. 
Tu as point 
n a rtediiy vdsQUS. 
EUe an. 

Nous avons rompu. 
Vous avez wdEL 
Us ont suivi. 










J'ai &it. 


Elles ont tu. 






J'ai feint. 


Us ont vainooi riea. 















210 



FREKCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IBBEGULAB YEBBS IN RE. 



FUTURE. 



VOCABULARY. 



de ne point, 

leg coxmaitre, 

tes lessoarces, 

aux miennes, 

ces details, 

[nanz, 
dans les Jonr- 

plu8 d'eclat, 

funesiteB aria, 

ferez mieux, 

d'y aller, 

mainteiiant, 

tout en ordre, 

le ble. 



of not. 

[know, 
them to 

[aources. 
thy re- 

to mine. 

[ulars. 
these partic- 
[papers, 
in the news- 
[ness. 
more bright- 
fatal advices, 
will do better 
of there to go 
now. 

all in order. 
the wheat. 



a sea projets, 
bonne volcmte, 
lenaelgnemeBS, 
tels qn'ilB Mnt, 
ce proUeme, 
nous rirona, 

I son emlianaB 
le ailence, 
a men booheor, 
la meme nnite. 



[designs, 
to his or her 

goodwill 

inquiries. 

[are. 
such as thej 

this problem 
[laugh, 
we shall ' 
[trouble, 
of his or her 

the silence. 

[ness. 
to my happi- 

[way, 
the same 



DICTEE No. 5. 

FBOH THE GUIDE IN iZE. PAOsa02. 

IRREGULAR VEBB& 



Je feindrai de ne point les 

naitre. 
Tu Joindraa tea ressources aux 

miennes. 
n lira ces details dans les jour- 

naux. 
EUe Inira avec plus d'^dat 
Nona mandirona leurs funestes 

avis. 
Vona ferez mieux d'y aller main- 
tenant. 
na mettront tout en ordre. 
Eaiea mondront le bl^ 
Je nnirai k ses projets. 
Je mettrai toute ma bonne volont^. | 
Tn prendraa tous les renseigne- 

mens. 
n pelndra les hommes tela qu'ils 

sont 
Elle reaondra ce piobltoie. 
Nona rlrana de son embanas. 
Vona romprez le sUenoe. 
na anfflront k mon bonheur. 
Ellea anivront la mdme route. 



XDWABD CHUBOH's SYSTEM. 211 


CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 




CQBDinOKAIi. 




VOCABULARY. | 


DICtAe No. 6. 




[ance. 


▲ 




1 si le repentir, 


iftherepent- 


plutotit 

[vait, 


rather. * 
[could. 


FROM THE GUIDE IN /2£. PaobSOS. 


etait KiiiceTei 


was sincere. 

r 


•i elle le poa- 


if $he it 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


j^ 


[rare. 








Ifcn siiifl tnnuCf 


I of it am 


Qn incendle, 


a great fire. 


JPabSOUdrais si le repentir ^tait 


cet aflOroiity 


this disgrace 


tnmpbmaoL 
[pagBle, 


promptly. 


sincere. 








Ta battrais en retraite, j'en sols 


anmeteFean, 


as the water. 


toate oom- 

[sible, 
tout leur pos- 


ail company, 
all their pos- 


sfir. 


saboache. 


his moath. 


n bolrait oet afirontyoommederean. 


par un inoty 


[riage. 


d'itio maladea, 


of to be sick. 


inie Oloraitsaboacheparimmot. 
NoiU condurioiui ce manage. 


cemailaffe, 


this mar- 

[she. 
as well as 






Voiu ooodriez aassi bien qu'elle. 






lis cralndraient d'etre dteoa- 


/ 








verts. 


decoayerts, 


discovered. 






Je croirals manqner k mon de- 


nuuk^uerf 


to&iL 






voir. 


% 








Ta dirais que ta n'as pas ea le 


anumdeTDir, 


to my doty. 






temps. 


plus tot,* 


sooner. 






n edorait quinze jours plus t6t. i 
late ecrlrait si elle le pouvait 


* PKvt tdt refen to time. 


t PlMfdlr msiks a prafacnoe. 






Nous eteindriona un incendie 






promptement 






Voua exduriez toute compagnie. 






na feraient tout leur possible. 






EUea feindraient d'etre malades. 



212 FRENOH SPOKEN. 


CONJUGATION OP THE IRREGULAl 


& VERBS IN RE. 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTilE No. 7. 
FROM THE GUIDE IN iJE. Paob202. 


[daUon, 
sa recomman- 


[meadation. 
his jrecom- 
[ment 


qu'QQO h6iii6| 


but one hour. 


son testamont, 


his testa- 






IRREGULAR VERBS. 


Yos prleres, 
a tea parenta, 
tea devolra, 


yoor prayers, 
[rents. 
to thy pa^ 

thy duties. 


...... 




lia sa recommandation. 
liaona son testament. 
liaez vos prieres. 
ecria k tes parents. 


ezactement, 


punctually. 








moinB de brolt, 
a ce qae, 


less noise, 
to what. 




«••«•■ 


ecilvez-lui k pp&ent 

fida tes devoirs ezactement ' 

fidaona moins de bruit. 


patience, 


patience. 






fidtea attention h ce que je dis. 


courage, 
precantiona, 


ooorage. 
precautions. 






prenda patience, courage. 
prenona toutcs nos precautions. 
prenez garde, Toici des vaches. 


yachea, 


00W8. 






dia-lfd doncde venir toot de suite. 


tout de aidte. 


immediately 






diaona-leur de rester. 
ditea-lfd qu'il n'a qn'une heure. 



EDWARD church's SYSTEM. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IBREGULAB VERBS IN RE. 



213 



SUBJXJNCnVB PRESENT. 



VOCABULARY. 



n&at, 

n Tent, 
n desire, 
Je venz, 
n ezige, 
n craini (ne), 
Je ne veiiz pas, 
i croyez-Totui, 
Jeoepensepas, 
nimporte, 
n est a propos, 
n est atUe, 



[sary. 
it is neces- 



! 



de mieuz 
en mieuxy 
cette tisane, 
tn^ Qiaut, 
c'est mal, 
paisiblement, 
rten savoir, 
lumieres, 
moeiirs, (f.p.) 
avec eux, 
firanchement, 
ces Jonmanz, 



better 

and 

better. 

this herb tea. 

too load. 

it is bad. 

peaoeiiUj. 

[know, 
nothing to 

lights. 

manners. 

with them* 

frankly. 

[papers, 
these newB- 



DIGTifeE No. 8. 

FROM THE GUIDE m il£:. PAOBa02. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

que je dise ce que j'ai rn. 
que tn fassea de mieux en mieoz. 
qa'il prenne patience. 
qu'elle boive cette tisane. 
que notis liions trop hant 
que TOOS liiez ainsi, c'est maL 
qu'ils Tiveiit paisiblement. 
qu'elles taisent la v^rite. 
que Je suive ses aris. 
que tu feignes de ne ricn sayour. 
qu'il eteigne toutes les Imni^res. 
qu'elle couse toute la semaine. 

que nous i>eignions lean 

moeurs. 

que vous rompiez avec eux. 
qu'ils ecrivent franchement. 
qu'elles lisent ces joumaux. 



2U 



FRENCH 8POKBN. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IRBE6ULAB VERBS IN RE. 



IMFEIIE'ECT OIT THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



VOCABULARY. 



n flradralt, 
n Toadralt, 
n deair^rait, 
Je ToiiclraUi^ 
n e;dgerait, 
n Qraindrait, 



Je ne voi 

[tnispas, 
Je ne pennet- 
[pas, 
Je ne penaaia 

nnecioyaltpaB 



n etalt a piOpOS it was proper 



netaitvUle, 
ce qae. 



[neoeasary. 
it would be 
riike. 
he would 

[desire, 
he would 

Ishouldlike. 
[quire, 
he would re- 
[fear, 
he would 

[like. 
I should not 
[permit 
I should not 
[think. 
I did not 
Jbelieve 
he did not 



not lea 



it was useful 
[or what 
that which. 



entendOf 

ecrit, 

d'eox, 

prepare, 

reteniie,(8ubB.) 

avtant ta'eoz, 

ai ^aut, 

comiaitret 
lea galerlea, 

cea detalla, 

[ineme, 
ai^tiraliiii- 



heard. 

wntten. 

of them. 

prepared. 

moderation, 
[they, 
as much as 

so loud. 

[know. 
them to 

thegaUeries. 

these details. 

this yery day 



DICT^E No. 9. 

FBOH THE GUIDE IN JZ£L PAOiatt. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, 

i 
qae Je diaae ce que j*ai entendo. 

que ta flaaea ce que tn as Ml \ 

qa*Q pnt soin d'eux. 

qa'elle bat ce qu*il a pr^par^ 

que noiia riaalona sans retenoe. 

que Tooa riaalez antant qu'eux. 

qalla rlaaent si 4mnt 

qu'eUea vecuaaent si heureoses. 

qae je toaae I'aveu qu*il m'a fah. 

qoe ta aolTiaaea oette r^e de 
conduite. 

qa*Il felgmt de ne point les con- 

nattre. 
qa'elle cooait antant 

qae noaa pelgnlaatona les gal- 
cries. 

qae vooa romplaaies toute re- 
lation avec eux. 

qalla ecriviaaent aqjoord'hoi* 
mtoie. 

qa'ellea laaaent tow ces d^tuls. 



216 



FKKNCH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 14 



PBONOUNS OF TH£ THIBD PERSON. 



THEY ABB BOTH BEFLECTBD AND BECIPBOCAL, AND ALWAYS OBJECT. , 




rZiVBAZi. 


HASOin.INB OB FEMININE. 


1£A8GI7UNE OB FBIONINE. 


Soi 18 placed after a 


preposition or a verb. 


Se precedes a verb. 


■Olf lui-m6me; 


to hifludlf; hendf, one's self! 


se, eux«m(mes; 


to themselves. 


B0I9 elle-in6me; 


to himself « « 


se, eUes-mdmes; 


to themselves. 


ae, lui-mdme, elle-m6me 


to himself « « 


se, run^tFautre; 


to one another. 


OF THE lELATIVli PKONOI 


INORPREPOanONjeM* 


HF THE KEUTITB PRONOUN Ot ISTESB Z< 


EN, 


in, of it, or from it . 


Y, 


there, to it^ or of it 


en Tenez-YOiui? 


from %t come you? 


yallez-Tons? 


there go you ? 


J'en yiens, 


I from it come. 


ypensez-Tons? 


o/fV think you? 


en pension, 


in school 


7 oomprenez-Tons? 


to it do you understand? 


fen ai. 


I of it have. 


y xetounimez-voiis ? 


there will return you ? 


Toxm en mangez, 


70U of it eat 


yayez-Tonsete? 


there have you been? 


Yoos en parlez, 


you of it speak. 


ya^t-U? 


therehasii? (is there?) 


m*en donner, 


me of it to give. 


y Toyez-y ons ? 


there Bee you? 


fen anis snr, 


lof itBm sure. 


ypasserez-yoos? 


there will you pass? 



* En tad y ai« always placed before the Tcxb, except in the impcratiTe affirmatiTe: (dUx^^ aUa-vouM en. 



j EDWARD church's 8T8TSH. 217 I 


OF THE PERSONAL PBONODNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. 


Soi (one'a self) is 


placed after a preposition, — 


sometimes after a verb.* 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^B No. 1. 










'daaslesaffiJzea 


in business. 


ooreet henrenzi 


one is happj 


FROM TABLE Na 14. Paos S16. 


«i ii*a pas, 


one has not 


de rentrer. 


of to return, 
[ness. 


Dans Ics affaires on n'a pas un 


■va inatant, 


an instant. 


quelbonheur, 


what happi- 


instant, a B0I9 n'e^t-ce pas vrai? 


n'est-eepasvnl 
! [TalUe, 


is it not time. 


d'arolr. 


of to have. 


C*e8t parce que chaeun tiavaille 


[works. 






pour aoi, qu'on ne penae qu'a. 


ichaoim tea-. 

' . . Cvi'a, 


each one 

[tMnksbut 


one haMtatkm, 


a habitation. 


aoi, et par celk m6me les trois 


(pl'OQ no p61IS8 


that one 


en parlant, 


m speaking. 


quarts du temps on a Tair de ne pas 


1 par cda meme, 


by that even, 
[quarters. 


jenne honunei 


joongman. 


6tre a aoL Apres un long voyage 
on est heureux de rentxer chez 


ks trols qnartSi 


the three 


Jeunea gena, 


yotXDf^ men* 


80L Quel bonhenr d'avoir nne ha- 


;dii teiiip% 


ofthetimel 


parlalt poor, 


didspedcfbr 


bitadon a aoi! En parlant pour 


on a Fair, 


[air^ look, 
one has the 


aol, 


himself. 


son fr^re ee jeune homme pariait 


A 








pour BoL 


; dene pas etie, 


of not to be. 








apresun. 


after a. 








long voyage, 


longjoumej 








* TlMTB is onlj one case where 






m is placed before a verb; it if in 






this: mMimmi, ttyling himself — 












telfadoctor. 


« 





28 



218 


FRENCH SPOKEN. 




OF T 


HE PEESC 


)NAL PRONOUNS OF T 


EIE THIRD PERSON. 

17. 


The same rule as page 2] 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICTfeE No. 2. 
FROM TABUe Ka 14. Paos 916. 


besoin dhm, 


[of one. 
want, need 


meconteat, 


displeased. 


pbu petit qoe, 


smaller than 


Mbleue, 


weakness. 


On a sonvent besom dHm plus 


on fiiit, 


one makes. 


content, 


pleased. 


petit que soL On fait de gxandes 


de gnaidea, 
fimtes, 
auonne xeflez- 
regourte. 


of great. 

faults, 
[meditation, 
no reflection, 

the egotist 


eitiiiieaotllie, 
de qniaFt-on, 
qoaad ftit-on, 
loreqae Ton* 


isafoUj. 

[one. 
of whom has 

[one. 
when makes 

when one. 


fautes quand on ne fidt ancune re- 
flexion sur 8oL LMgoiste aime 
mienx dire du mal de sot que de 
n'en point parler. £tre tn^ m^oon- 
tent de soi est une £ublesse; 6tre 
trop content de 80i est une sottise. 


aime miciuci 
dire da mal. 


loves better, 
speak eyiL 


ne fldt aiieii]i0| 
alme-t-ilv 


makes no. 
loves he. 




QUESTIONS. 


qaede, 


than of. 

[not 


Vi'ert-ceqideit 


what is. 


De qui a^-t-on aonrent be- 


n'en point, 


of himself 






BOin? D'un plus petit qoe sml 


parler, 


to speak. 

[much, 
to be too 






Qnand fidt-on de grandes 
fhutes? Lorsqne Ton ne fait an- 
cune r^exion sur sot. De qui 
Fegmste aime-t-il mienz dire 














du mal? Qu^eatFce qai est 








unefidblesse? Qu'estFceqai 


lb. 






est une sottise? 



EDWABD CHURCH'S 8T8TEH. 



219 



OF THB PERSONAL PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON, 



Se (one's self) is always placed before a verb. 



VOCABULARY. 



trop d'esprity 
poor on avoiri 
a te perd, 
constammeiit 
digreuions, 



flue peat plnii 
iQrtlry 



s^aime-t-elley 
s^admlre-t-elle, 
se croii-elle, 
die se trompe, 



[wit. 
too much of 

[have, 
for of it to 

[loses. 
be himBelf 

constantly. 

digressions. 

from which, 
[any more, 
he cannot 

go out 

yomig lady. 

[she love, 
herself does 

[sfaeadinfac. 
herself does 

{shfl beliere. 
herself does 

[deceives, 
she herself 



c'est la finite, 
de see peients, 
ile se font, 
de lni repetefi 
sane cesae, 



quelle IbUe! 
llsse pnpeiwti 
Mea da chegriai 



it is the fault 

[ents. 

of her par- 

[selyes make. 

they them- 

[repeat 

of to her to 

[sation. 

without ces- 

[ions. 

her compan-j|8'admire-t-elle i 

what My I 
(selTet mepaie 
they tnem- 
[row. 
much 01 sor- 



DiCTfeE No. 8. 

FROM TABLE Na 14. Paob S16. 

II se croit trop d*esprit pour en 
avoir beaucoup. 11 se perd con- 
stamment dans des digressioiiSi des* 
quelles 11 ne peut plus sortir. Cette 
jeune personne s'aune-t-elle assezi 
assez I Se croit-elle 
assez bellel Oui, mais elle ae 
trompe. Cest la &ute de ses pa- 
rentSyils se font un bonhenr de lui 
rdp^ter sans cessci qn'elle est la plus 
jolie de ses compagnes. QneUe 
folic! lis se pr^parent bien dn 
chagrin! 



19' 



220 



FRENCH 8POK~EJ7. 



OF EN, FBONOITN, OB USED AS A PBEPOSITION. 



When m means of it, from tlf| it 13 a pronoun; when it meana tn, it is a preposxkion. See p. 216. 



VOCABULARY. 



d'on Tient, 

A 



rinatant 

[done, 
donnez^mol 



[rlen, 
Us ne Talent 



V0II8 oniiiaiigM 
Tonsalmes 
dono bien, 
de la nunmalei 



t 



▼onsen arez, 
fen ml. s^, 



whence comes, 
[itself, 
the instant 

give me then 

some ones. 

[worth nothing 
they are 

[eat. 
you of uem 

you love 

then very 

much. 

some change. 

[have, 
you of it 

[sure. 
I of it am 



DICTjfeE No. 4. 

FROM TABLE Ko. 14. Paob SIS. 

D'oh vient cette voiture? De 
New York. En Tenez-yooa? 
Odi fen Tiena k rinstant mfime. 
Oh est votxe fille? En penaion. 
Ave»-vous des enfans? Oui, JTen 
aitrois. I>onnes-moi4(me«]nelqpie8 
uns de ces fruits. Us ne ralent riea; 
mais Tdna en mangez. Vous 
aimez done hien oeite ville? ponr- 
qaai? YOXm en paxtes tOQJoon. 
Avez-vons de la monnaie? OoL 
Youlez-vouB m'en dmmer? Voos 
en avez J'en anla aor. 



EDWABD OHUBOH'8 8TSTEM. 



221 



OF T, FBONOUN, OB USED AS AN ADYBBB. 



Whenjf means of tit; to tit; it 10 a pronoun; when it means lAera, it is an adyerb. See p. 216. 



VOCABULARY. 



Je pan, 

[jpagne, 
pour la cam- 



catto aflhiray 

pas grand' dioie 

qaalqua dune, 

Qua Ibiaf 

il y a qdeltQes 
[vons? 
y latouniai^x- 

peni-etray 

y aTai^vaos ataj 

7 a-t-il, 

longwtempa, 



I start. 

forthecomi- 

whatsajyoa 

HiisaiBdr. 

not much. 

something. 

once. 

a few days 
[yon return, 
there will 

perhaps. 

[you been? 
there have 

is there. 

a long time. 



▼oyez-Tonay 
moyaiif 
d*y atabUr, 
notra monlliiy 
a papiar, 
qaasd y, 



OK, ^riBMP flMH0 are spelt witfaoot so 
e flAer gnmd; tfie qKMtrophs taka 
tfaepisoBof it 



do you see* 

the means. 

[establish, 
of there to 

our milL 

to paper. 

when there. 

will jou pass 



DICtAe No. 6. 

FROM TiiBLS Na 14. Paob 91S. 

Je pars bientdt pour la campagne, 
quand y alle^TOOa? Quedites* 
Tous de cette afftiire? Fas grand' 
chose; y paiiae2s-TOiia7 T coibf 
pKanaz-VOIUiquelque chose? Ayez- 
▼ous Yu la maison et le jardin? 
Only une foi^ il y a quelques jotirs. 
T ratoimiaraas-ToaaT Feut- 
§tre. Et h Boston y aTea-TOU 
7 OuL TaFt*!l long temps? 
La semaine demi^re. Voyes-vous 
moyen d^ ^tablir notre moulitf k 

pi^er? Quand ypaMvn-vaasf' 

Je ne sais pas. 



222 



FRENCH SrOKEK. 



TABLE No. 15. 



OF THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The Reladye Pzonouns are thoAe which relate to a preceding noun. Qui refers to the 8ii1:ject ; 
que^ to the object The Interrogative Pronouns are those used to ask questions. Qut^ d qui, de 
quif qui eUt-ce qut^ for persons ; Quef h quaif d$ quaij qu^ei^e que, or qui, for things. 



a qui, 


to ^om. 


lesqnellM, (£p.) 


which. 


qui, (subjecL) 


who, which. 


duqael, (^ (ot s.) 


of which. 


que, (object) 


whom, which. 


de laquelle, (f. s.) 


of which. 


dont, 


of whomi of which, whose 


desqueli, (m. p.) 


of which. 


de qui. 


U tt u 


desquellee, (£ p.) 


of which. 


quoi, 


what, which. 


anquel, (nu s.) 


to which. 


a qnoi, 


to what, to which. 


a laqueUe, (f. s.) 


to which. 


leqnel, (m.) 


which. 


auxquele, (m. p.) 


to which. 


laqaeUe, (f.) 


which. 


auzquelles, (f. p.) 


to which. 


lesqaeli, (m. p.) 


which. 







ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 



The Absolute Pronouns have no relation to an antecedent Qui is employed for persmis only ; 
que and quoi are employed for things. Quel, (m.) queUe, (f.) etc always agree in gender and numr 
ber with the noun they precede. Lequd, dn^fud, auquei, mm a distinction between several things. 




who, whom, 
what 



quel, 

leqnel, 

laquelle, 



what 

which* 

which* 



XDWABD CHUBCH'8 STSTEIC. 223 


OF THE BELATIVB AND DnTEBBOGATIVE FBONOUNS. 

• 


See Hw praoediog taUe. 




VOCABULARY. | 


DICTtE No. 1. 










a qoi eat,* 


whose iBe 


embraaae^ 


kissed. 


FROM TABLE Ka 15. Paob SSS. 


' cekte caisM? 


this box. 


mon neyen, 


my nephew. 


A qui eat cette caisse^ Elle 


\ 




\ 




acette dame, 
letoettemaUcf 


to thiA lady, 
[trnnk. 
and this 


a qui eat, 
lea robana, 


whose is. 
the ribands.^ 


est k cette dame. Et cette maUe? 
AceHonoeur. Cest le cocher qoi 


aca mouiaiir, 


[tleman. 

to this gcn- 

[driver. 


aont roaea, 


are pink. 


Fa mise Ik Le sac qae tous royez 
sur oe banc, est k moi. Le Mon- 


Pa mlae la, 


it is the 

[there. 
it has put 


o'eat le xnien, 


it is mine. 


sieur a qoi TOUS parliez est mon 
onde, et la dame qui est. dans le 
bureau de la diligence est ma tante. 


le aao. 


the bag. 
[bench. 






L'enfant qae vous avez embrass^ 


mat 06 tMoio, 


upon this 






est mon neveu. A qoi eat to 


est a moi, 


is mine. 






chapean ckmt les mbans sont roses ? 
Cest le mien. 


Tons parliez. 


you spoke. 








daat le Irdmh, 


in the office. 

[coach. 

ofthestage- 








deladlliseDoe^ 








• Wben ioirf is followed by the 












ao mtonogiliTe praoora. bATiiig the 







224 FRENCH 


SPOKEH. 

1 


OP THE RELATIVE AND INTEBROGATIVE PBONOTJNS. j 




See page 222 for the rale. 


VOCABULARY, 


DICT^E No. 2. 




[ry. 






fituMl, 


isitnecessa- 


celle-clf 


this one. 


FROM TABLE No. 15. Faqi 322. 


que foavre, 


that I open, 
[then. 


aoulien. 


shoes. 


Dequiparlez-vous? Avecqiioi 


Vim aves done, 


you have 


cboLdsseK-voiu, 


choose you. 


fiiut-il que j'ouvre cette boite? Vous 


perdu, 
la cle, * 
Je I'al onbliM, 


lost. 

the key. 

[gotten. 
I it have for- 


ceux-cl, 
cea placea, 
praferez^TOiiSi 


these' ones. 

these places. 

[fer. 

do you pre- 


avez done perdu la d^? N<», je 
I'ai oubH^e. A qaoi pensez-yoos 
done? Vous oubliez tout! Yoici 
deux cadenas, leqael est le T^tre? i 


YOiis onbliez, 


you forget. 


cellea-ci, 


theseones. 


Celui-ci. Laqaelle de ces d^, 
ouvre votrecaisse? CeUe-cL Les- 


cadenaSy 


padlocks. 


▼oyageura, 


travellers. 


qaela de ces souliers choisissez- 


aqaol, 


towhaL 


de celid, 


of the one. 


Tous? Osnz-cL I«eaqaeBe8 de 


est le Yotre, 


is yours. 


le coin, 


the comer. 


ces places pr^ff rez-vous ? Cellea-cL 
11 y a trois voyageurs daqael par- 1 


celui-clf 


this one. 


a droite, 


on the right 


lez-vous? De celui qoi est dans' 


ces dea, 


these keys. 






le coin k droit 


OQTre, 


opens. 




• 





EDWABD church's SYSTEM. 



OF THE BELATIVE AND INTEBBOGATIVE FBONOUNS. 



225 



See page 822 for the rule. 



VOCABULARY. 



vou clisigsz- 

pendant, 

le Toyage, 
I 
ila cadette, 

' C68 BMdeiin, 

ylennent^ils? 

L 

de cenzy 
^ ont dine, 

alliotel, 

prenez g^arde, 
, d'abixner, 

nous ont 
I donneea, 



t 



[the charge, 
do you take 

during. 

the voyage. 

the jouoger. 
[men. 
these gentle- 

oome they? 

of those. 

have dined. 

at the hoteL 

take care* 

of to spoil 

to us have 
given. 



qneUesdames? 
▼0118 ne vomi) 
soQvenes pas, ) 
OQt^ellea, 
ete offerteiy 



whatladUes? 



you do not 
remember. 



have they, 
beenoitered* 



DICTfjE No. 8. 

FROM TABLE No. 16. Paob SSS. 

J'ai trois fiHes, de laqueUe vous 
chazgez-vous pendant le voyage? 
De k. cadette* Ces Messieurs vien- 
nent-ils avec nous? Desqnela 
parlez-vous? De oeoz qoi ont 
din^ avec nous k llioteL Pkenea 
garde d'abimer les fleors que ces 
dames nous ont donn^; qneUes 
dames? Yous ne vous souvgdcs 
pas? Non, desqneUea voules- 
vous parler ? Anquel de nous les 
fleurs ont-eDes 6t6 offertes? 



■ ■ ■■ • ■ ... 

226 FBSKCH SPOKElir, 


OF THE BELAHVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 


* 


See page 222 for the rule. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 4. 
FROM TABIJ& Ka 16. Pa^b S22. 


fen ai parle, 


[spoken. 
I of it have 


an orayon. 


withpendL 


a celle, 


to the one. 


entendn. 


heard. 


J'ea ai parl4 ^ une de oes deux 


la baa, 
prea de, 


yonder, 
near of. 


las ioniano68| 
api>orteea, 


the songs, 
brought. 


dames; & laquelle? A oelle qui 
estUibas^pite de oette ooibeine de 
fleurs. Ayez-vous jon^ ces moroeanx 


oette eorMDa, 


thatbadcet 


a cellea, 


to those. 

[Paget, 
of Louisa 


demusique? Oui; auxqneladon- 


de fleura, 
Joue, 


of flowers, 
pkjed. 


de Loua Poget, 


nez-Tous hi prff^Srenee ? A oeox snr 
leaqaela j'ai fait une marque an 
crajon. Atoi-tous entendu chanter 


cas movcaaaZf 


these pieces. 






les romances que j'ai apportto de 


de mnaique, 
la preference) 


of music. 

[ence. 
the pmev- 






Paris? Oui; anzqneUea donnez- 

Toua hi prSfi^rence? A celles de 
Loba Pnget 


a oenz, 


to those. 








faiildt, 


Ihavemade. 








unemarqae, 


a mark. 












* 







SDWABP CBUBOH'B SYSTBIC. 



227 



OF THE belatxve; intsbbogative» and absolute PBONOima 



See page 822 for the nde. 



VOCABULARY. 



le ptaifly 
an iMkooABf 
saTez-TonSv 
dj6 Mliqpli 



deTine juste. 



the most 

in the world. 

know you. 

[who. 
if I know 

certainly. 

[right 



id dlAcae, 
YOiui a ecrlt^ 
je Be vow 
dim pai| 
Je ittdxe savoir, 
me le dire, 



1 



me fok. 

80 difficult 

[written, 
to you has 

I shall not 
tell you. 

[know. 
I desire to 

me it to teU. 



he Uen! 

▼oils verrez, 

Je ferai, 

Qoeftrei^voiis? 

Je na aala qaoly 

fiichee, 

de ce quey 

voua fidtea, 

[terns, 
depolB ftnelvie 

ilya, 

[aire, 
d'extaraordin- 

[daite, 
dans votia eoa- 



weni 

you will see. 

I will do. 

[yon do? 
what will 
[know what 
I do not 

sorry. 

of what 

you do. 

[while, 
since a little 

there is. 

[dinary. 
of eztraor- 
[duct 
in your con 



DICTl^E No. 5. 

FBOH TABLE No, 1& Faob tti. 

La personne qui tous aime le 
plus an monde^ sayez-Toui qui? 
Si je sais qoi 7 Certainementy c^est 
roahonne m^re. Yousavez devin^ 
Juste. Ce qae vons me demandez 
est si difficile! Qui tous a ^crit 
ce matin? Je ne tous dind pas qui. 
Je desire savoir qoL Voulez-vous 
me le dire? Non. H^ hien ! vous 
verrezoe qae je fend. Quefer^ 
TOUS ? Je ne sais qnol, mais tous 
serez fach^e de oe que tous faites ; 
depuis quelfue temps, il y a je ne 
sais qnoi d'extraorduudre dans T<4re 
condnite. 



• Os^HC means cAol wUcA, or wftaf. 



228 FBBNCH 


SPOKEK. 




OF THE BELATTYE, INTRRR06ATIVE, ANI 


^ ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

0. 




See page 222 for the nil 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 6. 
FBOM TABLE Ka 16. Paob SSa. 


me decider, 

[die, 
qiiel parti pron- 

quelle craeUei 


[myself. 
to decide 
[tion totake. 
what resolu- 

whatacraeL 


pereonne. 


nobody. 


pnle-Je, 
en i|iiol, 


may L 
ixiwhat 


Je ne sais a qnol me d^der. 
Qnel parti prendre? Qnelle cm- 


Incertitude, 


uncertain^. 


▼one etre. 


you to be. 


elle incertitude I Void * le premier 


le premier, 
moyen, 


the first, 
means. 


ntile, 
a rlen, 


usefiiL 
to nothing. 


moyeti: partes cesoir; oofnenaOes 
k la fezme huit jours: Yoitk le se- 
cond $ leqnel pr^f^res-TOus des 


le second. 


the second. 


alors. 


then. 


deux? Qnellebeneid^Tousayes 


bdle Idee, 
▼one avez la, 
que ▼onlez- Yens 


fine idea. 

[there, 
you have 

[you. 
what wish 


conenltez, 

[drez, 
cjcil^one ▼on- 

on Uen, 


consult. 

[please, 
whom you 

orehw. 


Ukl Al<»rs qne Toules-Toui rtow- 
dre? Je ne sais reellement quo! 
faire. Qnl consulterez-vous? Per- 
Sonne. Pouxqum? Enqwdpuis- 


reeondre. 


to resolve. 






je Tous tee utile. X rien. Alon 
consultes qui tous youdres. 


reellement, 

[▼one, 
conenltere2S- 


reaUy. 

[suit, 
will you con- 












#Foietn)ftntoiHiiitlbl]oiii{ FU^ to 



230 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



TABLE No. 16. 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS- 
They refer to the objects spi^en oil 



celnl, 


(m.) 


that 


ceUe-la, 


(^.) 


that one. 


celvi-ol, 


(m.) 


this one. . 


oeQZ, 


(m. p.) 


these, those. 


celni-la, 


(m.) 


that one. 


cenx-clf 


(nup.) 


these ones. 


cecl, 


(m.) 


this. 


ceoz-la, 


(m.p.) 


those ones* 


oela, 


("»•) 


that. 


oelles, 


(£>) 


these, those. 


celle, 


if-) 


this, that 


ceUes-cl, 


(f.p.) 


these ones. 


ceUe-ci, 


(«) 


this one. ' - 


celles-la, 


(f,p.) 


those ones. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
These Pn>noiins are of a vague and indeterminate nature. 



on, 

quelquHuij 

qoicoiiqiie, 

chacmiy 

antral, 

p6r0Ollll6, 

lien. 



they, one, people, 
somebody, some one. 
whoever, whosoever, 
each, everyone, 
others, other people, 
nobody, no one. 
nothings any thing. 



quelque, 

chaque, 

quelconqae, 

ceiialiif 

mi, 

nni, 

pas nn, 



some. 

each, every* 
whatever, whoever, 
certain, some, 
a, an* 
no^ none. 
no^ not (me. 



EDWARD church's SYSTEM. 



OF DEMONSTRATiyE PBONOUKS. 



231 



The proDonoB c«bi, eefl^ eeux, eeOeSf wbcn followed by a rekdve pronoun, are expressed in 
En^iah bj the personal pronouns h$f she^ tksyy or bj that vfhieh, thate^hu^ tuck aSf etc 



VOCABULARY. 



ce Milt, 
T08 parenta, 

cpd d0lT6Iltf 

n0ui ayertir, 
et no] 
qui cralty 
en Dieiif 

sanproohaln, 

[mais, 

^ii0|ri0BAJa' 

craieiiUilay 

qa'flyeDattmi, 



these are. 

your parents 

who ought 

ustoforeteU. 

and not. 

whobelieyes 

in God. 

do not hale. 

no. 

his neighbor, 
[pray, 
who never 

believe they, 
[one. 
thai there is 



quelle le^^on, 
▼oua aptKMiy 
donnee, 
marqseey 
qaellea acKnty 
pliimea^ 
popltrey 
Be pranaapefli 
lea Totreay 
laqaellei 
le mieuxi 
eat abbnee^ 



what lesson, 
[they. 
to yon have 

given* 

maffcad. 

what are. 

pens. 

desk. 

donotlalEe. 

yours. 

which. • 

thebestb 

is spoiled. 



DICXiJE No. 1. 

FROM TABLE No. IS. Pagb 880. 

Ce sent vos parents qui doivent 
nous avertir et non pas vous. Ce- 
lui qui croit en Dieu ne liait point 
son prochain. Ceux qui ne prient 
jamais, croient-ils qu'il y en ait tin ? 
Quelle le^on vous Srt-on donn^? 
Celle qui est marqu^ Quelles 
sont vos plumes? Cellea qui sent 
sur mon pupitre. Ne prenez pas ce 
Uvre. CSellll«<d est k moiy ceQZ- 
ot sont les vdtres. liaqueUe des 
deux plumes aimez-vous le mieux? 
OeUe-cl, collegia est abim^e. 



232 FEENCH SPOKEN. 


OF DEMONSTRATIVE AND INDEFINITE PBONODNS. 


OekiiM marikfl the nearest, e6hd4h the remotest, when opposed to each other. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT&E No. S. 

FBOM TABLE Ha IS. Paob INl 

Gomment tronves-voiis ess Mies- 
sieon? Je trouTe cetni-oi plus 


troiiTez-TOiis, 

qiidqa' andeB, 

de rexammi, 
[Bonnes, 


do you find, 
[dent 
though an* 

of the exam- 


enoonrra, 
one snendef 
prisonf 


waiinemr. 

[fine. 
apeoafiyf 


Jeunes pe]> 


young ladies 


en cemondev 


inthiswoiU. 


aimaUe que cehd-la. Ced est 


recite, 


redied. 


k^ 


looneTs iel£ 


bonqudqa'aadens eoiy.naisj'flime 


fort mal, 


Teiybad. 




.;.... 


mienx eeuu Que pensez-Toos de 
Pexamen de ees jeunea penonnes? 


qoant anxy 


as for. 






OeHes-oi out trta bien rMt4; 


JennM gens, 
fortbien, 
molns Uen, 


young men. 
veiy welL 

less welly 






oeUes-lk Ibrt maL Qunt anz 
jeunes gens, oeox-ol fort bien, 
cenx-la mdns Uen. J'ai qnel- 
qil\m en vue pour oette affiure. 


en Tue, 
obassera, 


insist, 
win hunt 






({olooniiae cfaassera tor eette pio- 

pxi^t^ encourra une amende, ef la 
prison. Chaomi peose k soi en 06 


oette propiete, 








ipftndflt 




m 





EDWABD CHUBCH'S BT8TEM. 



OP INDEFINITE FBONOUNS. 



283 



AiOnd means other penonsy oiker people. Penonne means nobody, Quelquee means Wfm; it is 
written in three different ways.* 



VOCABULARY. 



aoohalter, 
pint de ma], 
qn^ aol, 
aide, 
qa'aYM-TOiuiy 



UmHiiqportey 

iaipaitaai-Je, 

dHmmyety 

ne ponrray 

ptiler, 

aapTMlable, 

One peaty 



to wish. 

moreeviL 

[self, 
than to one's 

helped. 

[matter, 
what is the 

jon ask. 

[brings, 
he to me 

[I speak. 
to him shall 

of a subject 
[able, 
will not be 

to speak. 

previously. 

he cannot 



* (^9iie is written m two woidfl, 
pneodiogaTCib; and, fuel being an 
adjectiTv, it takes the gender and 
number of the rabatanttTe : QueSo 
T^KKMit vof t w p mi wfli i dfl fi owt* 

QMlgwi, preceding a snbstantiTe, 
ii wntlon in one wiml, but takes the 
pfantl nnnber. 

C^ngiKi praceding an adiectiTe or 
■a adrinb, k hiTariaUe, being an 

idTOk 



comprendrei 
yetaient-Us? 
n'a remporte, 
le priz, 
prls, 



[stand, 
to under- 

[they? 
there were 

hasobtainedl 

the prise* 

taken. 



DICTfeE No. 8. 

FROM TABLE Na 16. Paob asa 

n ne fiiut pas souhaiter k avtml 
plus de mal qu'ii soL Qui tous 
a aid4? Penomie. Qn^aves- 
vous?t Rlen. Qnelqnea per- 
sonnes tous demaadent ClUUIlie 
jour, il m'apporte des fleurs. De 
quoiluip|Bxlerai-je? N'importe, d'un 

snjet qaelconqae. Certain m- 
diyidu ddsire vous parler. Hxl ne 
pourra parler n an pr^alable £1 ne 
pent oomprendre. Tous oes Mes* 
sieursy^taient-ils? Faa US. Au- 
cun des Aleves n'a remporte Id prix. 
n m'a, sans doute, pris pour un 
autre. 



t Q iooiM vom ^ in diis phru^ i 
tfCAeaotfer. 



idktf 



234 



FRENCH 8P0KEN* 



TABLE No. 17. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



aucmi,* 
autre,* 

A 

nieiney 
tel, 

j plnsleim, 
tout, 



no, none. 






cjcii que. 


other. 






quol que, 


same. 






quel que. 


such, like. 






tel que. 


several, manj. 




quelque, 


all, every, 


every 


thing. 


tout laid que. 



whoever, 
whatever. 

whoever, whatever, 
such as. 

whatever, however, 
however ugly that. 



REFLECTED PRONOUNS. 



nioi*nienie. 


myself. 


noui-memee, 


ourselves. 




toi-meme, 


thyself. 


YOUB-memee, 


yourselves. 




lui-meme, 


himself, itself. 


euz-memee, 


themselves. 




elle-meme. 


herself, itself. 


elles-memee, 


themselves. 





^Aiam and avtn are indaded at the end of the dictation, page S88. 



EDWABD church's ststbx. 235 1 




OF INDEPINrrE PBONOUNS. 1 


Ia mimej (m.) i 


b mlnif , (f.) mean the fame. ' 


rhe plural is les mimes. 


1 VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 1. 








[right 


Sleety 


subject 


drolty 


a daim,a. 


FROM TABLE Na 17. Paob SM. 


MTend, 


to remit 

[der. 
tohmi ren- 


a ma ptUe, 
qa*ll eat, 


to my pity, 
dmtheis. 


Ybici le meme homme qui est 
▼enu cc matm. Dites4ai que je ne 


jjBrtloe, 


justice. 


ma Tie, 


mjm. 


re^ois pas un tel sujet tTu pbi^ 


▼ooa 0oyezj 
nuMpltaUte, 


you may be. 

the hospital- 

[say. 

that he may 

theyfindhim 

chamuDg. 


pulasanta, 


powerfiiL 
that they 


aieura lettres k vous remettre. 
Tout le monde lui rend justice. 
Qni ^pte Tous Boyea je tous offi^ 


qaHOte, 
on le tnmre, 
channaat, 


pimiNnii ami J 
flsna ) 
itoninmtpas) 


maybe. 

theyshaU 
not sncooed. 


iliospitalit^. Quoi qa'U dis^, on 
le trouve charmaat Quela qoe 
soient ces gens, s'ils sont malheureuz 
ils ont dnnt it ma piti^. Tel qaH 


cesgens, 


these people, 
if they are. 


burtrnit. 


learned. 


estjeTaimeplusquemaTie. Quel- 
qae paissants qu'ils puissent 6tre 
ils ne r^usshront pas. Tout In- 


ntaDicsiiKiUf 








Btruit qull est je no Taime pas. 


ilsrat, 


they have. 




• «.»■•• 











236 


FBSNCH SPOKEN. | 






1 

OP BEFLECTED PRONOUNS. 

1 


JUM-mlm^ myseUl See page 


i 284. 


VOCABULABT. 


DICTi:E No. 2. 






1 




tn ftras in1gn¥> 


I there go. 

[better. 

thoawilt do 

[not? 


baroe qpi'aDefl, 
J ont eta, 


because they 
[been, 
there have 


FROM TABLE Na 17. Paab 234. i 
j»y vais moi-meme. Tn feras 


]|'yva-^apas? 


there ^es he 
[have, 
she should 






mienx de le loi dire toi-meme. . 


•De aualtl^ 






Ponrquoi n'y vartril pas loi-meme. ; 


solgner, 


to take care. 






Elle aurait dd aoigner son en&nt 
eUe-meme. Nonsveilleronsktoat 


▼eUlerons, 


shall watdL 






tunuh-meinea. Je voos oonseine 


V01I8 OOBSOillOi 


you advise. 






de le faire TOIia-llieaM. Sib! 


de le fidre, 


of it to da 






avaient soivi mon avis ils aoiaient 
termini oette affaire eazpmemes. 


nMf 


fidlowed. 






Mes soenn sont pins pradenfes qae 


man avis, 


my advice. 






ces MessienrSy elles n'ont rien peida 


lis anraient^ 


[have, 
they wotdd 






paioe qa'elles j ooi M ellea- 

A 


termine, 


termhiatod. 








rien perdOf 


nothing lost 








■ n' 

















f 



€ahlt 3^9, tS. 



238 


FRENCH SPOKSK. 






TABLE No. 18. 




PBEPOSITIONS. 


The PrepoBitum u placed before nouns and pronoiuu which it gorerns; it is also placed before 
some Terba. It is used to connect words with one another, and to show the relation between thenL 


avanty 


before, (order of time.) 


adoDy 


according to. 


ohes, 


at home. 


ooDtray • 


against 


daaflt 


in. 


malgra* , 


in spite of. 


davant, 


before, (order of place.) 


H0iiol)gffiitifj 


notwithstanding. 


denlerei 


behind. 


aana. 


without 


parml, 


among^ amongst, amidst 


ezoepta, 


1 
except 1 

1 


aoii% 


under. 


hora. 


save* 1 


SUV 


ODy upon. 


hoiulav 


except 1 


▼arsp 


towards. 


enTara, 


towards, to. , 


aprea, 


after. 


tonohant, 


req>ecting. 


entraf 


between. 


poor. 


1 
for. j 


depnla, 


since. 


par, 


by. 


d^ 


from, as soon as. 


moyannant, 


bj means of. 


avaoy 


with. 


attendQ, 


1 
on account 


durantp 


during. 




to^ at 


pandaat, 


whilst, during^ in. 


da, 


0^ uNxnu 


ootraf 


besides. 


an, 


in. ' 


aulTaiity 


according to. 


an llaa da, 


instMdoC 



BDWABD OHUROH'S BT8TBX. 



OF PBEPOSinONa 



239 



The ibUowing denote place: tAeg, dam, devmU, derriirej parmi, taus, mr, versj etc 
Some pT^K>BitioD8 mark order: avmU, i^i$, eniny depms, di$^ eta. 



VOCABULARY, 



vnv fou mt- 
ieft-ce jaste? 
' la foide, 
aperQQe, 
auritol, 
perdue, 
de Toe, 
le voyex-Tona? 
'OTient, 
I'etrerepoM, 
QparUt, 
MBS dan dlie, 
placee, (f.) 



[youraelf- 
jou put 

is it right? 

the crowd. 

percdTed. 

as aobiu 

lost 

of sight 

[see? 
him do you 

he comes. 

[rested. 
himself to be 

he set off. 
[faiganjtldnc^. 
without saj' 

placed. 



deux, 
son arriTMy 
Je n'al pii| 
Ivldira, 
nnmot, 



US two. 

his arrivaL 

[been able. 
I have not 

tohimtotelL 

a word. 



IT 



DICTiJE Ko. 1. 

FROM TABI^E Ko. 18. Paob S88. 

Je suis arriv^ ayant^vous, et 
vons vous mettez d^Tantfmoi^estpce 
juste? Je suis all^ chez tous, 
vous n'j ^tiez pas. J'^tais dans le 
jordin, derriere le ch&teau. Vous 
dtiez parmi la foule, je vous ai 
aper^ue et aussi-t6t perdue de vue. 
Oil est mon livr^ Sous la table. 
Et le voire? SUT te pupltre. Le 
vojez^vous? H yient reri nous. 
Apres s'^tre repos^ quelques in- 
stants, il partit sans rien dire. Oil 
^tait-elleplacde? Entre nous deux. 
Depaia. son arriv^e je n'ai pu lui 
dire un mot 



^Aoant, order of time, 
t JkvatO, order of place. 



240 



FRENCH 8POKBN. 



OF PREPOSITIONS. 



The feUowing denote union: arec, dutandy pendanij mUM^ iuivimt, febn. 
These mark opposition: amtrej maigri, lumobiianL 



VOCABULARY. 



P hiverp*(m.) 
rete, (m.) 
le printempsy 
I'aatoiime,(m) 
force, 
que TOiui, 
ecrirez, 
et Je revieiui, 
elle ixMsede, 
natnrel, 
▼OS desira, 
Je partlrai, 
demain, 



the winter. 

the summer. 

the spring. 

the autumn. 

forced. 

that joQ* 

will write. 

[back, 
and I come 



natural, 
jonr desires. 
I shall start, 
to-morrow. 



• Sound the r. 



qoalite, 
▼omi partes, 
c'estfiMTtmal, 



aacnne, 



no. 

qnalitj. 
you start. 
itiavezylMid 



DICTilE No. 2. 

FROM TABLE Na 18. Paob SSS. 

Des le matin il commence k 
chanter. Aveo qui partez-rous? • 
Darant Fhiver je snis fbrc^ de 
garder la chambre. Pendant que 
▼ous dcrirez cette lettre, je yais faire 
une petite yisite et je reviens aussi- 
tdt Outre ses talentSi elle possede 
le meilleur natureL SulTant tos 
d^irs, je partirai demain. Selcm 
xoaSj je h*ai aucune quality Je suis 
en col^ contre toqb. Pomqaoi? 
Paroe que tous partes molgre 
moi, nonobatant tout ce que je 
▼oosudit CTest fort mail 



EDWARD OHUBCH'S S T 8 T E U. 



OF PREPOsrnoijs. 



241 



To express pxivadon or separation, as : sans^ excepie^ horSy harmis. 

To denote the object, as : enven, touehant^ mayennanty aUendUf jHmr, en.* 



VOCABULARY. 



pranez coniagB] 
me serait, 
impoMible, 
d*eii aToir, 
elle fle, 
parte Uen, 
lemal delete, 
finequentf 
qui la ibroe, 
a garder, 
le Ut, 

qaelqaefQie, 
qa'a-t-U dit, 



take courage 

me would be. 

impossible. 

of it to have. 

she herself. 

carries well. 

the headache 

frequent. 

[forces, 
whidi her 

to keep. 

the bed. 

sometimes. 

[said, 
what ha3 he 



*En has a yagne meaning, whilst 
dbnt has a piedse meaning: Aller 
<K SVanco en Italie. £tre en Angle- 
tent, £tre en bonne santd. 



IloBtifaif lanUe; n est en yille. 
II est en prison; H est dbu k prison. 



bpn sens, 
ditee-leorf 
de venir, 
{a est impoU, 
par im eolat,. 
que Tons, 
de V08 avis, 
m'en passer, 



good sense. 

tell them. 

of to ccMne. 

[lite; 
he is impo- 

bj a noise* 

that you. 

[vices, 
of your ad- 

me of Uiem 
to go with 
out 



DICTEE No. 8. 

FfiOM TABLE Ko. 18. Paob 238. 

Prenez courage. SCUOS vous il 
me s^tut impossible d'en avoir. 
£Ue se jporte bien ezcepte le mal 
de tdte frequent qui la force k garder 
le lit quelquefois. Qu'a-t-il dit.^ 
Beaucoup de choses hors dubon 
sens. Dites-leur de venir, hormis 
leur fr^re. U est impoli envers 
tout le monde. Jo desire vous par- 
lor toachant cette aflfaire. Je fin- 
irai par im ^clat, moyennailt que 
voiis m'aiderez de vos avis, attendu 
que je ne puis m'en passer. Au 
lieu de partir demain, je partirai 
de cette ville aujourd*hui k cinq 
heures, pour aller en France. 



31 



242 



rBBNCH SPOKBir* 



ADJECnVES WHICH CHANGE THEIR MEANING, BEING PLACED BEFORE 

OR AFTER THE SUBSTANTIVE. 



Habit only, or the reading of good anthoiBi will goide in the lue of these adjedxres. 



nn brave bommey 
nn lunmete lumima 
an pauTre homme, 
an grand lionimey 
an galant homme, 



a good, benevolent man. 
an honest man. 
a silly man. 
agreatman. 
an honest man. 



nn homme braTe, 
on homme honnete 
on homme paavre, 
onbonmie g^rand, 
on homme galant, 



a coonigeoas man. 

a polite man. 

[tone, 
a poor man, without for- 



atall] 

a polite man. 



VERBS FOLLOWED BY PREPOSITIONS. 



The foUowing yerbs take after 
them the preposition a* 

aimer ^ 
autoriser d, 
aider a, 
balancer a, 
s'entendre d, 
consentir a;, 
decider ^ 
d^pprendre ^ 
encourager d, 
ezhorter d, 
habitaer d^ 
h^ter d, 
s'obstiner h, 
penser it, 
persister d, 
renonoer », 
r^pogner a. 



These take after them de. 

apprdhender de, 
craindre de, 
d^daigner de, 
ddfier cfe, 
se d^pdeher de 
se desesp^rer de, 
d&irer <&,* 
d^toster de,* 
difilirer de, 
discontinuer de, 
espdrer de,* 
gager de, 
xegretter de, 
sonhaiter <b, 
soopoonner de. 



e Thsio Tvrtw nuqr drop tibe pnpo- 



These take a or de. It is 
the ear which goides. 

contbner h ca de, 
contraindre it aa de, 
determiner d oa de, 
s'empresser & aa de, 
engager i oa de, 
essajer it oa de, 
ftillir it oa de, 
fercer it oa de^ 
obliger h oa de, 
r^soudre h oa de, 
sollidter h c^ de, 
sonffiir h oa de, 
tarder h oa de* 

After the following Torbs, the 
infinitiTe takes no prepositbm: 

Aimer mieox, compter, (to 
expect,) croire, dddaigner, d^ 
Toir, entendre, fiure, i^imac^ner, 
oser, poQToir, pr^tendre, Twiloir, 
savoir, etc 



EDWARD CHURCH 8 SYSTEM. 



243 



GUIDE FOB USING THE NEGATIVES NE, NE PAS, NE POINT. 



Kb is tbe least of the negatirea ; no p^ is 1 
I fear a little ; je n'osepturi fear more ; je n*os4 
di erainU que, and the verb rnnpMur que. alwa; 



the medium^ or stands in the middle; ne point is the strongest : j« n*osef 
'osepointf I fear much. The conjunctive phrases & moins que^ de jfew que, 
qus, and the verb empSeher qw^ alwa>-s take lu after them : finU a nun$u qu*il nepleuv^; je reste id de peur 
fH^U ne vietme ; fieria St present de eraitUe qu*eUe ne wit inquUte; Je veux bieity maze ma ma&resse de pension empiekera 
;«»;« i»*y aHUn 

This nue having exceptions which make it rather difficult to commit to memory, I will try to render it easier by the 
foQcwiDg table, in which the pupil will bo able to see them at one glance. 



Ne is used after 



de pear ^pBf 
decniBte qaop 



No exception for these four phniei. 



avtn^ 



aToir poiD| 

tramU«ri 

•I 



n est tout mure qu'il f»*«tait. 
n afi^t mOnmmU qu*il f»*dorit 
n est phu humain qu'Q ne le pandit 
II est mieux qu*il n*dtait. 
n gagne mains qu*il ne le pense. 
Je ctains qu*il ne le sache.* 
J'ai peur qu'il ne vienne.* 
Je tremlte qu*il ne la lise.* 
•• J*applrihende qu'il n'arrive.4^ 



EXCEPTIONS. 



When the first proposition is n^pitiTe, nm is dropped in 
the seconds 



n w'est paa antre qu*il dtait 

n n'agit paa autrement qu*il dcrit. 

n n'est pae si humain qu*il le pezait. 

n f»*est iKM mie«x qn*U ^t 

D ne gagne pas moins qu*il le pense. 

Je ne crains pas qu'il le saohe. 

Je it'ai pas peur qu'E "^enne. 

Je ne tremble pas quMl la Use. 

Je n'appr^ende pas qu'il anive. 



Ne is used after these verbs only when they are cooju- 
gated negatively: 
ideTf Je ne nie pas que ce ne soit vraL 

Je ns d^spftre pas qu'il ne vienne. 

Je ne disconviens pas qu'il n'ait raison. 

Je ne donte pas qu'il n'ait tort 



When these verbs are coi^jugated affisnatively, they have 
no negative: 
Je nie que ce soit vrai. 
Je d4sesp6re qu'il vienne. 
Je discOn'^ens qu'il ait xaison. 
Je doute qu'il ait tort 



Ne is not used after 

Habillez aoant qu^H vienne. 
Sans que votre femme-de-chambie soit Ik. 
qp0^ Je dlfinds qu'elle monte sans me le dhe. 



Fa 
sition 



te 

lUlIf 



We paa, no poisly before an infinitive, 
aa pm le voiTf • In order not to see him* 
Be aa paa la voiTy • . • Not to see him. 



* When ptts is at the end of iuch phrases, it expresses the dosiie 
dot i1m dnng of wbieh yon speak should happen. Thos. Jt cmhu 
9«'il M k jodU jNU, means, iy&arA« loiZf not MOW «<. ifyondrop 
the void ^of, ii means, />fair Ae loiS ibioio tl. 

21» 



riaop 

i*(wl 



a and point are not used when there is hi the propo- 
one of the following negative expressions i 

. Ce garfon ne asdt jamais sa lefon. 

n 9M salt guire ce qu'il fait 

n n'a nul droit de se plaindre. 

Je n^ai nuUement envie de le lui donner. 

n n'a aueun gofit pour la musfque. 

IL ne faut rien faire sans r^fi^ohir. 

Je na vols paraonne qui ne I'aime. 

hen repeated,) Elle n'a m beauts m qualitds. 

n ne eonnait que ses chiiTres. Mean 
ing on/y — (to, in English.) 



246 


FBENCH 


8 P K E K. 


1 


CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTIVE VERBS. 


The reflective verbs are those which are conjugated with two pronouns 
first being the subject of the verb, and the second the object, as foUows : 


of the same person ; the * 


Indicatif present. 


Imparfaxt. 


Preterit defini. 


Fuiur. 


Je me conche, 
Tu te couches, 
11 se couche, 
Nous nous couchons, 
Yous vous oouchez, 
lis se couchent. 


Je me couchais, 
Tu te couchais, 
II se couchait, 
Nous nous couchions, 
Vous vous couchies. 
Us se coiichaient 


Je me couchai, 
Tu te couchas, 
n se coucha, 
Nous nous couch&mes, 
Yous vous couch&tes. 
Us se couch^rent 


Je me concherai, 
Tu te concheras, 
11 se couchera, 
Nous nous ooucherons, 
Vous vous coucherez, 
Us se ooucheronL 


fl'en aller, 


to go awaj. 


86 dorloter, 


to pamper one's self. 


. s'alarmer, 


to be alarmed. 


s'enrhumer, 


to catch cold. 


s'abstenir, 


to abstain. 


s'emiiiyeri 


to be wearied. 


s'aperceYoir, 


to perceive. 


ii'6|iorgii6lllir, 


to grow proud. | 


s'assoapir, 


to fall asleep, drowsy. 


a'endormir, 


to lull asleep. i 


s'asseoir, 


to sit down.. 


s'evanonir 


to faint awaj. 


s^arroger, 


to attribute to one's self. 


8'6iitr'aider, 


to help one another. 


8'applaadir, 


to applaud. 


8'ey6Ttii6r, 


to exert <»ie'8 8e]£ 


s'attribiur, 
86 blesser. 


to attribute to one*s self. 

[self, to be offended. 

to wound or hurt one's 


8'enqaerir> 
8'6ntr*oaTrir, 


to inquire. 

to open half way. 


86 coacher, 
86 conduin, 


to go to bed, to lie down. 

to behave. 

^ [conoeal 
to constrain, disguise. 


8'6iiroiur, 
8'6mfara88er, 


to grow hoarse. 

[in one's anns. 
to kiss one another, fold 


86 contraindn. 


s'emanciper. 


to take too mudi liberty, 
[ther., 
to visit, or see on« ano- 


86dep6cli6r, 


to hasten. 


8'6ntr6yoir, 


86 defendn, 


to defend one's setf. 


8'6inbarra8Mr, 


to be puzzled, perplexed. 


86 dir6, 


to tell to one's self. 


uetSichtst, 


to be angry. j 


' Je ne me concho pmrn, 
1 tu BO te coaches paib 
il nese couche paib 
Dons ne noos *< paib 
voua noToaa " paib 
ib nese ** paib 


me couchais ~Je? 


ae me conchai-je pas? 


Je iM me ooocherai ptm^ ! 

i 





EDWARD church's SYSTEM. 


247 1 


CONJUGATION OP THE REFLECTIVE VEBBS. | 


1 The leflectiTe veTbs alwap take the aiixiliar|r 
ncu couehi au couchee; Je me suU en idU au aue 


verb to he to form their compound tenses: •/& iim 1 
e. These verbs never use the auxiliary to have, 1 


GotUuHonneL 
1 Je me coucheraisy 
j Ta te coodieraiB, 
j 11 ae coacheraity 

Nous nous ooucherions, 
1 Yous Yoas coQcherieSy 
1 Ss se coucheraient. 


Couche-toi, 
«••• •••• 

CoachoDS-nooSy 
Couchez-voos. 


Subjonctif prStent. 
Que je me ooqche. 
Que tu te couches. 
Qu'ii se oouche. 
Que nous nous oouchions 
Que YOUS YOUS couchiez, 
Qu'ils se couchent 


ImparfaU du Suhfonctif. 
Queje me oouchasse, 
Que tu te couchasses, 
Qu'il se oouchftt, 
Qne nous nons conduusions, 
One Tona Tons oonchMii«s 
Qu'ils se couchassent 


MfixmialiMr^ 


to take offence. 


se preyaloiff 


to take advantage of. 


•liabllto, 


to dress one's self. 


seperdn, 


to lose one's self. 


Mbater, 


to hasten, make haste- 


•epresorln, 


to prescribe to one's self. 


1 sliaUtner, 


to accustom one's self* 




to feed one's self! 


1 flfngenler. 


to get oat of patiaioe. 

to unmortalize one's self. 

rceeding in a bnsiiiess. 

to find the means of sao- 


sereMentir, 

serendn, 

serejonir, 


to feel, resent 

[one*s weapons. 
to yield, or lay down 

to rejoice at 


selever, 


to rise, get up. 


serepoMTi 


to rest, repose. 


M morfimdn, 


to wait in rain. 


86 rapetisMr, 


to get smaller. 


\wemelksif 


to mistnisty suspect 




to reconcile. 


. WB moGoniiutnf 
' seoantir, 


not to know one's self, 
to secnre one's seIC 


se receirillir, 

86 rendn compte, 


to recollect one's self. 

Tconnt of. 
to give one's self an ac- 


. 8'<nientar» 


to consider where one is. 


86 8oaT6iiir, 


to remember, recollect 


8'oblipr. 


ko bind one's self to. 


8e8erTlrf 
86 8aToir gre, 


to use. 

[self: 
to be pleased with one's 


1 96 procmtry 


06 promeiiBrf 


one's self to walk. 


86Tl8iter, 


to visit one another. 


m» ooiiolMnd*-J« ? 


B0te coache peuL 
no nous oonohons pas. 
iia Tons oonchos pub 







248 FBEirCHSPOKEN. 




CONJUGATION OP THE REFLECTIVE VERB& 








VOCABULARY. 


DICtIiE No. 1. 

VBOMTKB 

TABLE OF REFLECnVE VEBBS, 
Paob 246. 

Je m'enTais parce que j'ailt faire. 

Ta t'alarmes trop fadlement 


j'ai a fldre, 

tzop&dlement, 

diflcmiflions, 


[I am busy. 
1 have to do. 

too easily. 


tcmt de suite, 
nnpeatrop. 


inunediately 
[mucL 
a little too 


conduite, 








n s'alMtient de toutes discussions. 


mon <niTrag6f 
ftlxe de la mo- 
demarches, 
succea, 


my work, 
[some moral, 
to make 

[scolding, 
advanoesi 

success. 






Elle s'aper^Oit de votre oondoite. 

Nous nous assoapissons far 1 

dlement. 

Voas Tons asseyes ma man , 

ouTrage. 

ns s'arrogent le droit de faire de i 


de boime henrBf 


joke, 
early. 






la morale. | 
Elless'applaadissent de leus 

d-marches. 


aageaae, 


wisdom. 






Je m'attribue tout le socc^ de 
cette affaire. 


adreaae, 
noble. 


skilL 
noble. 






Tu te blesses k la mpindre plai- 
santerie. 

11 se coache de bonne heure. j 

Elle se conduit avec sagesse. i 










Nous nous contraignoiia de 

▼ant elle^ 






Vous Toiis depechez trop. 






n se defendent avec adresse. 






EUes se disent nobles. 










Je me dorlote un peu trop. 



EDWARD church's bzstem. 249 




CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTIVE VERBS. 




DIFESFECT. 




' VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 2. 


\ 




/ 


[answer. 




;ala mort, 


to the death. 


d'y repondre, 


oftoitto 


VBOM THB 

TABLE OF REFLECTIVE VEBBS. 


' de sa naiflsaxice, 


of her birth. 






Faob 246. 


plusleiirB fols 


many times. 






n s'ennnyait h la mort 

Elle s'enorgneillisflait de sa 


dans la nnit, 


in the night 








,[meiit, 


[edness. 








dealnteresfle- 


disinterest- 






dant qu'il parlait 


< reputation, 


reputation. 






Vou8 VOU8 eYanoniasiez plu- 

sieurs fois dans la nuit 


i UBdoml-lioiupOi 


half an hour. 




. • . • • 


Us s'entr'aidalent avec d^in- 


[temps. 


[time. 






t<§ressement. 


i de tempa en 


from time to 
[necessary. 






Elles fl'evertnaient h proinrer le 
contraire. 


< qn*il ne fid- 


than it was 






/ 


/ 








Je m'enqueraia de leur reputation 


1 etroitement, 

j 


narrowly* 
[seldom. 






Tu t'enrouals en parlant une 
demi-heure. 


rarement, 


scarcely, 






n s^entr^onvrait de temps en 


. manlsras Ubres, 


free manners 






temps. 


% A 








Elle 8'emancipait plus qu'il ne 


lalali^te, 


hastily. 






fallait 
Nona i^Qwy embraaaiona Etroi- 
tement. 










Vona Tona entrevoylez rare- 






ment 






Da a'embarrassaient dans cette 






affidre. 






EUea ae ftchaient pour on mot 






Je me fbrmaliaaia de leurs ma- 






ni^res lihres. 






iTntliablllaialtlahftte. 






n ae hatalt d*y r^pondre. 






32 







250 PBBHOH SPOKEN. 




CONJUGATION OF THE BEFLECTIVE VERBS. 




FRSTBRIT DEFIKITE. 




VOCABULARY. | 


DICT]feE No. 8. 

VBOM TKB 

TABLE OF BEFLBCrnVE TSSBa 
Faob M6. 


cinujaetes, 
nnmoyen, 


oonquests. 
a means. 


implaiiy 
de oondntteii 


apian, 
of conduct 


d^embarras, 
en meme tamps, 
d'enx, 
sans dontei 


of trouble. 

[time, 
in the same 

of them. 

[doubt 
without 






Je mliabltlial k ses manl^res. 
Ta tlmpatlentaa sans raison. 

n almmortaliaa par ses con- 

quotes. 

EUe a'ingeiila un mojen poor 

Bortir d^embarras. 


ieptke, 
lea Interetai 


I lend. 

the interests. 






Noua noQa leTamea en mdme 

temps. 

Voua vona morfonditea k sa 


d'advance, 
lea titraa, 
Toa premiera, 
anooea, 
oiaenx, 


in advance. 
Ihe tides, 
your ftret* 
success, 
idle. 






porte. 

Da ae meflerent d'enz. 

Ellea ae meconniireiit sans 
doute. 

Je me nantla toujours en lui pr6- 

tant 
Ta t'orientaa parfaitement 

n a'obligea k payer ies mt^rSts 
d'avance. 

Nona noua promenamea pr^ 

d'une heure. 










Voua Toaa preyalntea de vos 

premiers suc^. 






Da ae perdirent en d^taiboiseoz. 

EUea ae preacriTirent m plan 
de conduite. 



EDWARD CHUBCH's STSTEH. 251 


•- 


00NJU6ATION OF THK BEFLEOnTE TEBB8. 




FBETEBIT INDKROarrR 




VOCABULABT. 


DICT^E No. 4. 

mOKTHB 


j chute, (f.) 


feU. 






f 


[arriTaL 






TABLE OP REFLECTIVB VEBBS. 


de 8011 aiilvee, 


of his or her 






Paob 246. 


[tonies, 


[toholdalL 








Iponr 7 tenir 


in order in it 






Je me ania reaaenti de cette 
chute. 


le Icndein&iiiy 


the next day. 
[judge, 
before of to 






Ta t'ea rendu & mes raisons. 


avast de Jager, 






n a'eat rejoni de son arriy^. 


{doaDDens, 


[wiitteb proofs 
docoments, 


' 




EUe a'eat repoaee plnsleiizB 

heure9. 


desa prodaace, 


[dence. 

of his prti- 

[tion. 

her modera- 






Noua noua aommea rapetla- 


sa moderattoni 


• 




aeea pour 7 tenir tootea. 

A / / 










Voua Toua etea reconcilleea 


troptot, 


tOOSOOD. 

[son. 






le lendemain. 
Ha ae aoAt recaelUla avant de 


aana ralaon, 


without rea- 
tions. 


.. 




juger. 


toate vaflfliloiiy 


aU idleo. 




•••••• 


Ellea ae aont rendu oompte des 
documens. 

Je me ania aouyenn de yous. 

Tn t*ea aerrl de mes titres. 

n a'eat an gre de sa prudence. 










EUe a'eat an gre de sa moderation 


• 




Nona nona aommea Tlaltea 






plusieurs fois. 






Vona Tona etea en allea txop- 






tot 
Da ae aont allarmM sans laison. 

toate reflexion. 



!» 



252 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



CONJUOATION OF THE BEPLECTIVE YESB& 



JfUTUtCfi. 



VOCABULARY. 



changementy 
[stalls, 
quelques In- 

le droit, 

clrcoDipectioii. 

souspeiiy 

tons lea torts, 

molns yltei 

enarrivant, 

[dolTent, 
comme lis le 

rnlenz qua Yoiu 



dumge. 

[stants. 
a few in- 



the right 

[tion. 
drcumspec- 

under little, 
[wrongs, 
all the 

less quick. 

in arriving, 
[ought 
as ihe J it 

[you, 
better than 



DICT^E No. 5. 

TROK TBB 

TABUS OF KBFLBCnVE VEBBa 
Paob 84S. 

Je m'aperceyral bien du change- 
ment 

Ta t'aaaouplraa moina souveat 

n a'asslera un moment 

Elle a'aaalera quelques instants. 

Nous nous aasierons ehezToos. 

Vous voos aaslerez dbez eDe. 

lis s^aasleront chez eux. 

Elles s'assleront chez leur oncle. 

Je na'arrogaral le droit de le 
leur dire. 

Tn fapplaadirofl de %& oonduite. 

n s'awlandlra de sadroonspection 

EDe s'attrlbaaiay sous peu, toos 

Ics torts. 

Nous nous blesseroos moins 

vite que vous. 
Vous vous concherez en ar- 

rivant 
Us se condulroiit oomme ils le 

doivent 

Elles se ooatraindront mieox 

que vous. 



EDWARD GHUBCB'S BTSTBM. 



253 



CONJUGATION OP THE REPLECnVE VERBS. 



CONDITIOKAL. 



VOCABULARY. 



do'etait 
necessaiie, 
don 
t^tteqiMdty 

liabitndes 



! 



poriBteltQiiqp 
n'yallez 
done IMS, 



i 



anpmoteohoo 

jhM long tWPJB- 



if it was 
necessaiy. 



if they thee 
attracted. 

[against, 
that it is 

his habits. 

sH the day. 
weather, 
by such a 

there go 
noithea. 

finepiomiaes 
[blow, shock 
atthefii9t 

longer. 



aaoiusoitfar 
d'aflUiOi 
resaouroeo 
dn pays, 
sans mil doiito, 
Jelesahh 
an molndraf 
tendrement 



to get oar- 
selves out of 
trouble. 

resources of 
the country. 

[least doubt 
without the 

I it know. 

at the least 

tenderiy. 



DICT^E No. 6. 

ntOK TBB 

TABIC bl* BEFLEOrnnB VERBS. 
Faob 246. 

Je me depecfaeraia si.c'^tatt 

necessaire. 

TCn te deftndrala si on Tattaquait. 
U ae dirait que c'est contre ses 

habitudes. 
EUe ae dorloteFalt toute la 

journ^. 

Nona nona enrhnmerioiia par 

un tel temps. 

Vona Tona emnderies, n*y allez 

done pas. 

Ha a'enorgnellHralent plus que 

vous. 

EUea a'endormlraleni sur ces 

belles promesses. 

Je m'eyanoairaia au premier 
choc 

Tu revertaeraia k nous sortir 

d'afiaire. 
n a'enquerrait des resources dn 

pays, 
Elle a^emtmetait si elle parlait 

plus long temps. 
Nona noua entr'alderioiia sans 

nul doute. 
Voua Tona entr*alderleaB anasi, 

je le sals. 
Ila a'entr'oaTriraleiit an mom- 

drechoc 

EUea a'embraaaeralent tendre- 
ment 



254 




FBKNCH SrOKSN. 










C»NJUGATION OF THE EBFLEC 


HVE YEKBS. 

! 

1 




IMFEBAnys. 


VOCABULARY. 


DIOTfeE No. 7. 

nOK THB 

TABLE OF RBELBCnVB VEBBS. 


gi tu venx, ' 


[wishes, 
if thou 


Ueattard, 


itiaJato. 


cela m'est egal, 

[tcois. 

vlto, .nous par- 

avec enx, 


I do not care 
[start 
quicky we 

with th<»n. 


dene plus 7^ 
penaer, ) 
en oolere. 


ofnomoreto 
think of it 

angry. 


Paob M6. 

Fache-tol si tu venXj celk m'est . 

^gaL 
i^hona-nooB aveo en; 


avec elles, 


with them. 


demaavaUe ") 


in bad 


Faohez-Youa avec eUes. 


la clochei 


thebelL 


hnmenri ) 


humour. 


Habille-toi vite, nous part<ms. 
Levona-noaa j'entends la doche. 




I hear. 

[fast, 
they break- 

genlleineiL 






Levez-Tooa doncMesdeiBofaeflts, 


on dejeuie, 
Meuieoray 






on d^jeiine. 
Aflsieda-toi ici Emelie. 
Aaaeyez-voua id MesaieoiB. 


Hesdames, 


70U2ig ladies 
ladies. 






Aaaeyona-nona pr^ de ces 

dames. | 
Ck>nche-toi aprte le th^ ! 


ces dames, 


these ladies. 






Ck>aGhona-noua ^ dix hemraf. 


lethe, 


the tea. 


; 




Conchez-YOUa ^ onze hemes et 
demie. 






Depeche-toiilesttaid. 






Diaona-lni de la porter k prfaent. 
Dltea-lenr de ne plus y penaer. 
Ne leur dia pas <}ne je sob en 
colore. 






Ne lenr dltea paa qi^dle est de 
manTaase humeur. 



XDVABD ohubch's b t s t ■ m. 25d 11 




E EEFLEC 




OONJUQj 


ILHON OF TH] 


nVE VEBBS. 




BUBJUNCnVE PRESENT. 1 


VOCABULABY. [ 


DICXilE No. 8. 

ntOK TB> 

TABUS OF REFLECTIYB YEBBa 


flfimt, 


It IS necesaa- 


deremplol, 


[ploy, 
of the em- 


11 CQBKVionty 

flMt utile, 

ilMtapropM 

penMas-Toas? 


it is proper, 
it is useful, 
it is proper, 
do JOU think 


parte, (f.) 
aoft,(m.) 
damafkaneldaa 
mal, 


loss. 
sofa. 

of my mink- 
bad, eviL 


Paob S4S. 

Que Je m'oriente k I'instant. 

Que fcu te rendea compte de 

Temploi de raigent 

Quil a'en aille dans quelques 
jours. 


TOideaB-Toiui? 


will you? 


deTant eiuc, 


before them. 


Qu'elle a'apergoive de cette 

perte. 


venknUila? 


wmthey? 


davantage, 


more. 


Que noua ncma aaaeylona snr 

lesofiu 

Que Toua Tooa aaaejriez dans 

le salon ? 
Qu*ila a'aaaeient un moment iei. 
Qu*ellea ae' bleaaent de ma 


Temc-ta? 
ipenses-ta? 
firat-U? 


wilt thou? 

[thou? 
thinkest 

[saiy? 
isitneces- 


leaarmea, 
qalla nou, 
cUmnent, 


the weapons. 

[us. 

that&ey to 

give. 


{JaMveupas, 
Inn'ert pas utile 


I will not 

[fuL 
it is not use- 






franchise* 
Que Je me couche k present 
Que tu te condniaea maL 


al^istaut, 


at the instant 






Quil ae contralgne devant eux. 








Qu'elle ae depeche davantage* 








Que noua noua deftndicma 

avec les armes qu'ils nous donnent 








Que Toua Toua enrhumlez 








encore. 








Quila a'ennuient ici. 


r • 






Qu'ellea a'endorment mieux 

maintenant 



22< 



266 



FRENCH BPOKBN. 



CONJUGATION OP THE BEFLECTTVE VEEB& 



IMFEHFECT OF THE SUBJUI^CTiyE. 



VOCABULARY. 



fitndrailra? 
fl no fidlaltpas, 
etait-UnUle? 
pensie^-vons? 
exigeait-U 7 
▼oulalt-elle 7 
sappoBlez-voiifl, 
etait-ilanropos 
na seralt-U pas 
llsuflarait, 
Gro;lez-voii87 
da8irlez-voa8 7 
poor si pen, 



It was not 

[ful? 
was it use< 

[think? 
didjou 

[quire ? 
did he re- 
did ahe wish? 

9 



would it be 



did you sup 
[per? 
was it pro- 

[be useful ? 

would it not 

[su£Elcient 

[it would be 

[lieve ? 

did you be- 

[wish? 
did you 

for 80 little. 



Bitot, 

a ce olimaty 

[heure, 
de si bonne 

si matin, 

sitendrement 

constamment 

destdte, 

la date, 

ces papiws, 

vos signes, 

a tout payer 



so soon* 

[mate, 
to this cU- 

80 early. 

80 early. 

so tenderly. 

eonstantly. 

immediately 

the date* 

these papers 

your signs. 

to all pay. 



DICTflE No. 9. 

FROMTHB 

TABUS OF BEFLECTIVE VERBS, 
FAaB846. 

Que je me formalisasse pour 
si peu. 

Que tu fhabillasses si t5t. 

Qu'll se hatat de partir. 

Qu'elle sliabitoat h ce climat 

Que nous nous lerasstons de 

si bonne heure. 

Que Tous Tous levassiez si 

matin. 

Qu'ils s'embrassassent si 

tendremenl. 

Qu'elles se dorlotassent con- 
stamment 

Que Je m'oiientasse de sniia. 

Que tu to souvinsses de kdate. 

Qu'il se rejouit h cette uouvelle. 

Qu'elle se promenat si long- 
temps. 

Que je me procurasse oes pa- 

papiers. 

Que tu t'obligeasses k tout 
payer. 

Qui! se meflat de lui. 

Qu*elle sliabillat k trois heures. 

Qu*ll s'aper^t de yos signes. 

Qu^elle s^assit pr^ d'elle. 



BDWABD chuboh's b t b t e m. 257 



OF THE PAST PABTICIPLE.* 



The past participle, employed wiihoot an auziliaxy, agrees in gender and nnmber with the word 
to whidi it rcfersy as the adjective with sabstantiyes : jSiu livra /ta, des leUres icrites, etc 

Da Snjet.-^ The nominative, or snbject, connected with to he^ (Stre^) agrees yriih the past 
participle : Les dames toni arriviSes. Connected with to havsj it does not agree : Le$ dameM owl 
defeune. When the subject is placed after the past participle, the agreement takes place as if it 
were before : etant arrivies ea dcunes t^hdbiUirenL 

Da regime direct. — The objectiye, or regimen direct, connected with to have^ agrees with 
the past participle, when the ol]jective is placed before it. When it is after the participle, there is 
no agreement between them. Thns : void lei iMree que fed rentes. None avone repu les lettres. 
In the first sentence the pa$t participle agrees with its regimen, que^ a relative pronoun (meaning 
letirei) being placed before the participle. In the second sentence the past participle, repti, does not 
varj, its regimen, U$ letires^ being placed afler it 

Da regime indirect. — The neuter verbs, which take the auxiliary, to have^ for their com- 
pound tenses, have always the past participle invariable, these verbs having no direct regimen : 
Lee deux heures que fen riflichi^ que fed perue, que fed dorrniy que fed rive; les vingt ans qiieSLe a 
vScu^ etc The que which precedes d^e past participle has the i^pearance cf a direct regimen, but 
it means during which, A preposition, expressed or understood, always points out the indirect 
regimen. 

Des Verbes reflechls. — In reflective verbs, the auxiliary to Se is employed, instead of the 
auxiliary to have ; however, the rule i^ the same When the regimen is placed before the past 
participle, the participle varies ; when placed after, the participle does not vary. When there is no 
direct regimen, the partidplo does not vary ; when the regimen is indirect it does not vary. Thus : 
Les Uvres qv^ils se soni adresses ; ils se les sont montris ; ils se sorU quereQes^ etc. The verbs 
a/dresser^ monirery et quereUery being active verbs, and preceded by their direct regimens, que, 
les, et se, their past participle agrees with them. But write without agreement: Ils se sont adressi 
les Uvres ; ils se sont mtmJbri hs lOlres, because the active verbs adressi and montri have their 
direct regimen after them : les Uvres, les UUres. Write also without agreement: Ils se sont ecrit; 
ils se sont succidi ; ils se sont jdu; Us se sont pcarle ; ils se sont convenu, etc., these verbs being 
neuter. 

Se douter, se privaloir, ^ichmper, s^aistenir, se repentir, t^emparer, have always their second 
pronoun for direct regimen : its se sont doutts, prhmus, ichappis, abstenus, repentis, emparis, 
although they are neuter verbs. 

S^arroger, although naturally reflective, has never its second pronoun for regimen direct. Us se 
sont arrogi des droits. But if you write les droits quails se sont arrogis, the past participle varies 
because que is the regimen, and precedes the past participle. 



* The present perticmle hoe always a leghnen, whilst Ae adieetiYes in ant have a complete sense : Dei enfimU 
dMt^Maaad leur nuatre ; An tnfixnU dAcMtaants, 'Ae present participle never takes the mark of the ploraL 

33 ssssss^ 



260 


rBENCH 


SrOKEH. 


^ — =1 




TABLE 


No. 19. 




ADVERBS. 


Adveibs aooompany vexbi) adjectiyoSy and other adverbsy to ezpresB their maimer or circmnBCanoeB. 1 


modestement, 


modestly. 


COllllOll]10IB0Iu« 


commonly. 


polimeiit, 


politely. 


conftaMiiMntf 


confusedly. 


ingenoment, 


ingennoiialy. 


dUhiMiiioiiti 


diffuaedly. 


tmpimeiiieiity. 


with impmiifcy. 




expressly. 


traitreasemelit, 


traitorously. 


Importimeiiienty 


importnnalefy. 


aveuglement, 


blindly. 


obscuremeiit, 


obscnrdy. 


commodemeiit, 


commodiously. 


preoiMment, 


precisely. 


incommodement, 


moommodtoosly. 


profimdement, 


deeply. 


confomenieiity 
eDonnenieDty 


conformably. 


oommeilty 

IflDftMflinftHtf 


how. 

[soon, 
incessantly, cootimially, 


opinlatrement, 


obstinately. 


notamment, 


espedaUy. 


follement, 


foolishly. 


proftasement, 


laTisUy. 


moUement, 


^iBBmiinawftiyt 


naitammeiity 


by night 


bellement, (peannt^.) 


sofUj. 


sciemment, 


knowingly. 


nonTenemeiit, 


newly. 


^ftW^MJUWWl^^^T- 


constantly. 


grmidoinnirtf 


pt$aj. 


eloqnmnmant, . 


eloquently. 


fkvncliemeiity 


fruUj. 


hi^nti^iyiCTiti 


dowly. 


•• 
muLTenieiity 


ardenly. 




pieaendy. 


geOXUDXfDXf 


pwttfly. 







EDWABD church's STBTBX. 261 || 




ADVEBBS.* 




When the adjectire ends with avowel in the masculine, add meni and the adrerh will be fi>rmed: 


VOCABULARY. 


DICXiJE No. 1. 










diflBerencey 


difference^ 


an de la. 


beyond. 


raOM TABLE Ho. 19. Txam SSa 


aonaenlMiiMit, 


not only. 


de toQtey 


of all 


Elle fait tout modeatement, 


iiii.yii ^iw^ftiit- 


boldly. 


expreaaion, 


expressaon* 


poUment, et Uigeinimeiit. 


aagi, 
drconstaace, 


has acted. 

[stance, 
caseycircum- 





• 


Quelle difference avec cette per- 
son^e I Elle fait tout non seulement 
hardiment, mais impimeinent ! 


« ndrlf 


followed. 






Je crois que son cousin a agi trai- 


Bern aTls, 
on ne pent plus, 


his counsels, 
[will be. 
you there 

[more, 
one cannot 






treuaement en cette drconstance. 
Vous avez suivi ayenglraieiit 
tons ses avis. Yenez chea moi tous 
y serez tres oommodemeiit. M 


a Toa deaira, 
paaaer rete. 


[sires. 

to your de- 

[summer. 

to pass the 

[monds. 

these dia- 






Yous dtes on ne pent plus inoom- 
modraient. Jlrai conforme- 
ment k vos d^sirs, passer VM chez 


cea diamana, 






vous, . Ooxnment trouyez-vous ces 


datoutebaaatoi 


of all beauty 






diamans? De toute beant4. Eteelui- 
d ? itaormement beau, au de Ui 
de toute expression. 


* There tan adjectiTet which are 
1 loiiictimos used as adrerbs: jutted 
1 f<mx, ekuTf and ban. 

EUe cfaante/Mtfc; the sin;^ right 

Elle ehante Jaux; sho siaga out 
of tone 

Elle ne volt pas etair; she does 
not see. 

Cette rote sent ban; this rose 
smells good, or, has a good smeU. 





262 



FBENOH SPOKEN. 



ADVERBS. 



The foDowing take « dose before tnerU; eonfbrmemeniy aveugliment^ enarmSment^ eammodSmemif etc. 



VOCABULARY. 



4u deux, 

courant, 

Je vow nvolo, 

les soieries, 

qae TO0, 

maithiuidlflei, 

voosearapport- 

anx contea, 

qaeyonafont, 

[nalres, 

les commlssion- 

fidra obsarvari 

que le coura, 

voQS est connai 



[on<L 
of the sec- 

uxstant. 

I yon send. 

the silk stuffs 

that joar. 

goods. 

[faith, 
you have 

to the tales, 
[make. 
which to you 

the brokers, 
[obsenre. 
to make to 
[rent price, 
that the cur- 
[known. 
to you is 



DonTeaiix, 
magaalna, 
ohangaiiiaiiti 
nuiaible, 



new. 
stores, 
change, 
hurtful. 



DICXfeE No. 2. 
PROM TABLE No. 19. Faob 26a 

Conformemeiit k yotie lettre 
du deux courant, je yous envoie les 
soieries que tous desirez. Je trouve 
que YO8 marehandises sent enorme- 
ment chores. H ne finit pas yous 
en rapporter aveuglement aux 
contes que yous font les commission- j 
naires. H est bon, q^el^efois, de 
leur £ure observq^y tr^ poUment, 
que le cours yous est connu. Quand 
pensez-Yous nous Yisiter? Nous 
sommes tres cammodanieilt dans 
nos nouveaux magasins. Nous es- 
p^rons que Yotre cfaangement ne 
YOUS a pas M nuisible. 



EDWARD church's SYSTEM. 268 1 




ADVERBS. 




BxTLB. The acyective being terminated with a consonant in the mascnline, the adverb is formed 
finom the feminine termination in adding men^. Thxa^ p'ondemerU, franchement, naivement* MoUe- 
mentf foUemerUy nouveOemeniy are considered as coming from the adjectives mol^ fol^ nauvely and 
follow this rule. 


VOCABULARY. | 


DICT^E No. 8. 
FROM TABLE No. 19. Faob 260. 

Le premier fait tout opiniatre- 
ment, le second moUement, et le 


d^avoir plus, 

d'ordre, ^ 

[niere, 
de tonte ma^ 


[more, 
of to have 

of order. 

of all man- 
ner, mean- 








ing, by all 






titiisieme fidlement. Aves-voos 


-.;... 


means. 


... •.• • 
• • • . •.• 




re9a des lettres nonvellement? 
Get homme agit grandement et 
franchement. SafiUere9oittoat 
le monde avec grace, elle fiiit tout 
gentiment, et r^pond k tout 
naivement. Commtinement 
vous les trouverez pluidt le soir que 
le matin. Je n'aime pas votre ma- 
ni^re de placer tout conftuement, 
d'expliquer tout dlfftiaement ; si 
vous d<$sirez rester chez moi, je 
vous recommande expreMement, 
d'avoir plus d'ordre de toute mani^rc. 


* The following are excoptions : 















264 


FBSNCH 


SPOKEN. II 


These six adyexbs are not 


ADVERBS. 




derived firom adjectiyes: Oommenif ineesMommenif nolammeni, pro- 1 


jVMBtMnJt^ nuitoHMMntf $ci€$fwt€ni» 


1 


VOCABULABT. 


DICTifcE No. 4. 










entameKf 


begin. 


rien, 


notfaiiig. 


FROM TABLE Na 19. Vjm MO. 


les^et, 


the point 


ne aoit, 


may not be. 




debuter, 


tobe^ 


enleye. 


taken away. 
[wBiehonses. 


n yient ici Importonemenft 

troisoaqnatrefoisparsemaine. Ne 


ezpUqaez, 


explain* 


detnagadBiv 


from the 


parlezpassiobscnrODient Pr^ 


les actes, 


the acts. 






ds^ment yoilk notre homme Ik baa. 


fonds, 


funds. 






Entamez le sajet profbndemenL 








Comment £isuit-il debuter? Ex- 


employes, 


employed. 






pliquez qu^lncessamment, nous 


la mine, 


the ruin. 

[ened. 






anitmslesactes: notammenft ce- 

lui qui est I'objet de la discussion. 


qui menace, 


that threat- 
[ment 






n faut aussi parler des fonds em- 


retabllssement, 


theestablish- 

[essary. 

itwillbenec- 






ploy^ proftaaraient, et expHqner 


a fitudra, 






aoiemment la luine qui menace 










rdtablissement H £uidra mdt- 


velller, 


to watch. 






amment yeiUer k ce que rien ne 


a ce que, 


to what 




. f • • . • 


soit enlev^ des magamni; et k jour, 
dtre ^k conatamment. 









KDWA-BD CHUBOH'8 8T8TBM. 



ADYEBB& 



265 



Adjectives ending in irt; fiMfm tfaeir adTeribe by ciumging ni into mm m U : aa coprtMi^ cong toim i iifi l ; 
dloqaeiU^ &oqpemmeHi; except ImU and prUenif whidi make ktUtmmU and prUeiUemenL 



VOCABULARY. 



•'en tlrer, 
ncnis bater. 



eloqaentlj. 

to get out 

[selves. 
batten our- 



rlen, 

11 fimt ftlre, 
taxwDtatrBf 

[dlMB, 

des marclian- 

ek usteiurilfl, 

tank, 

a Fecurley 

qua O011Z9 



an patnragay 
[querona, 
noaa eouTO- 



let na not do 
anything too 
mnch in ajaOM 
bony. 



[xytoda 
it is 



intentory. 
of tbe goods, 
and utensils. 

welL 
in tbe stable, 
astboii^ 



aiada 



on etafty 

ezaoky 

telaporitlM, 

lea aflhiraaf 



[ture. 
in tbe pas- 
[voke. 
weabiul 



meeting. 

[give, 
in order to 
[tlemen. 
to those gen- 

anaooount 

enct« 

of the state. 

where are. 

theaflhin. 



DICT^JE No. 5. 

FROM TABLE Na 19. Paob S60. 

Yous VOU8 en dtes tir6 ^oquem- 
ment Maintenant, il fant nonslift- 
ter lentement. Ne bmaquons 
rien. Preaentementyilfiuitfaire 

un inventaire de toutes les marcban- 
disesetnstensils de la fisibriqne. B 
feat anaal compter les animanx, 
tant k r^corie d'id, que cenx qni 
sont an patnrage. Enaultey nons 
convoqueions une assemble pour ce 
soir, afin de donner k ces Messieurs 
on ^tat exact de la position oh se 
tronvent les afiaires. 



84 



266 


VBXMOH SPOKSK. 






TABLE No. 20, 




ADYEBBS. — CoNTiNirED. 


aasfll, 


88, also. 


ne point. 


no, not 


plus, 


more* 




firstly. 


moins, 


less. 


d*abord, 


atfiist 


fort, 


Tery. 


eiunilte, 


afterwards. 


Men, 


welL 


apvM, 


after, afterwards. 


le phu, 


the more, most 


SdqparaTsnt, 


before, (order of timft.) 


mal, 


bad. 


00, 


where. 


pen, 


fitde. 


ioi, 


here. 


mieuz, 


better. 


1^ 


there. 


Pl^ 


worse. 


d-^ 


on this ode. 


le ndeaz, 


the best 


delS^ 


on thai side. 


lepta, 


the worst 


partont. 


OTery where. 


le moins. 


the least. 


pres. 


near. 


certalneinent, 


certainlj. 


proche. 


nigh. 


certea, 


certainly. 


loin, 


far. 


oni, fll. 


yes. 


maintenant, 


now. 


soit, 


be it so. 


a present. 


at present 


▼olontiers. 


willingly. 




actoaUy, this moment 


peut-etre. 


perlu^. 


Uer, 


yesterday. 


non, 


no^ not 


aTani-liier, 


thedaybeforeyesterday. | 


ne, ne pas, 


no, not 


antrefols, 


formerly. 



EDWABO CHUBCH'B 8<T8TEM. 



267 



ADVERBS. 



Jum iofifM quef 

JPbu ifutmiie gWf 

Zephu heauy 

Mnns ainuMey 

Le mains, la nunm amahU,* 



•M good as, 

• more learned than,* 

•the flnesty 

•less amiable, kind,- 
•the least andable, • • 



•comparadye of eqoalitj. 
•eomparatiTe of soperioritj. 
• snperlatiYe degree. 
•eomparatiTe of inferkvily. 
^Bupcriadve « « 



VOCABULARY. 


DICTIsE No. 1. 










deMliis,(m.) 


drawings. 






FROM TABLE Ko. iO. Paob M6. 


1 desslner, 


to draw. 






Elle est ansal bonne que jolie. 


elle destliie, 


she draws. 






Sa scBur est plus instmite qu'elle. 


ll«ldl,(a<«.) 
drogneTf 


bold. 

to physic. . 






maia beanooap mollUS aimaUe. 
Cost Trai, Fatn^ est fort pen agrd- 
able* ATes-YOos yu ses dessins? 


Fainee, 


the eldest 






Oui, lis flonttrte beanx; elle dessiae 
tr^ blen. Cdni-d est le plQS 
bean. Celm-Uin'estpasmaL Cest 
▼rai mus il est nn peu moins hardL 
Je le tronye ndeax que Tantre. 
Commeot est la sant^ de rotre fils? 
Elle est pire qnliier. Le ndeax 
de toQt est dene pas trop ledrogaer. 
Le pis est qnll a d^jli M trop 
drogn^ 









^s^ 



268 FBENGH SPOKEN. 1 




ADVERBS. 




Cht homme eti U moina tdtnahU; this man is the least amiaMe. To mark affirmation: certaiM' 


tnentj eerte$f oui^ n. To mark consent: soitf vohniien.* 


VOCABULARY. 


DICT^E No. 2. 




[plaisant. 






complaisanty 


kind, com- 


avengle, 


blind. 






[her. 




[weU. 


FROM TABLE No. 20. Paob 266. i 


8'U raime, 


if he loves 


oe sont Uen, 


these are. 


^ 


/ A 








Get homme est le moilia com- 


interet, 


interest. 


sea noma, 


her names, 
[names. 


plaisant qu'on puisse rencontrer. 


n'a rien, 


has nothing. 


prenomay 


Christiaa 


Certainementy je voas telnii 


qnelqne chose, 


something. 






souvent. S'il I'aime, ce n'est cep- 1 










tea pas par int^r^t, car elle n'a , 


MS titreB, 


her titles. 






rien. Je vous dis qn'elle a quelqae 


proprietCi 


I them have 






chose. Je suis sib qne HOD. Je i 


Je les al tennsi 






voos assure que aL Avez-vous vu ' 










ses titres de propria? Old, je lea . 


vnm 


seen. 






ai tenus, vns ec lus. Alorb die est 


Iw, 


read. 






riche;aalt, je vous cnoia YOhnk^ 


elle est xlclie, 


she is rich. 


- 




Uera, mais pent-etre vous vous 1 
6tes tromp^. • Non, mille fois Hon, | 


trampey 


deceived. 

[times no. 
a thousand 






je ne suis paa avengle, cef sent 


mflle fols lunif 






bien ses noms et pr^noms. 


* To niAik donbt: peat-^n. To 




t The Tob to k, preceded bj ee, tikes the 


denj: non, im^ im poM^ m potaL See 




plural when followed bj a tiuid penon 


page 849. 




plural: Ob mmt ma. Ck mmt !m kUrm qm 
vemaumdet. 













KDWA&D CHUBOH'S 8T8TSM. 269 | 


• 


ADYEBB8. 




To madk order or' rank : d 
mark place or distance: oi. 




€nif &ntfiU6f cjjprwi ttuponwoKtm ±o 


ici,3f. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICtIsE No. 8. 

FROM TABLE Na 20. Pagb 306. 

Je ne veux pQlnt vous faire de 
chagrin. D'abord, il &at que je 


■ 
expliqiiery 

ftoctd'gntf 

de gronder, 


to explain, 
accident 
of to scold. 


. 




a MtbODf 

de sMnfbrmer, 
on Tiendroas- 


itjagood. 

[to inform, 
of one's self 

[yon cone, 
where will 






vons ezpliqae poarquoi je n'ai pas 
dcrit phistdt Premlerementf 
ma sant^ a ^t^ maavaise, ensidtey 
je n'ai voolu reus parler de Paoei- 


iiMii^oiniie, 
naiifl qidttonSy 
none toiui y, 


OS to meet 
we leave, 
weyontbere 






dent de votro flla qu'epres sa ga^ 
risen ; avant de gronder il est bon 
de s'infonnery mais vons tous miettes 
tonjonrs de manvaise htunenr ftii?- 


irtteiiAnoiuif 


Shan wait 






paraTant. Oiiviendres-voiunoaa 
rejomdre? Nous qnittons dloi poor 


• 







270 



FRENCH BPOKKV. 



ADYEBBS. 



To.mark place or distance: Zi^de-fo, deUt, audsUt^ partaut, pri$f pnKk$^ Mn. To maik the 
present: MaiifUmwmtj a prSsentj aeiueUemenL 



VOCABULARY. 



▼Oils I'fr-t-on, 
dit, 

da tout, 
de la 'hale, 
et le ooipsy 
du nuiUioiixtiu^ 
d'arme, 
monoholr. 



06 gant, 
le rapporty 
le malre, 



[they, 
to you it have 

told. 

notaiaU. 

of the hedge. 

and the body 
[tonate. 
of the iinfor- 

any weapon. 

[chief, 
handker- 

[then 
a Httle for- 

thisglore; 

theaooomit 

the mayor. 



• .^. . • « 



DICT&E No. 4. 
FROM TABLE Na iO. Faob 166. 

Je suis la depds ime heure, yoimb 
Ta-t-on dit? Da tout. La rmtore 
^tait en de-ga de la %ai^ et le 
corps da malheureox au de la. 
J'ai regard^ partouty je n'ai point 
vn d'arme. Prea de la Toitare ^tait 
cette lettn^ et ee moacboir prodie 
da oofpesnn pea plus krin, ce 
gant Halnteiianty je vais toire 
le rapport Non, a present, re- 
nez avee md chez Monsiear le 
Maire. Jene le pais actualle- 
menti PoorqpioiP AUes devant, 
je 



11 272 FBKKOH 8POKBN. 


- 


. 


TABLE No. 21. 






A TVVF VJIIft ■bCV 




jajirvr^AJDO.- 




demttliif 


to-xnoirow. 


tard, 


late. 


apres demaln, 


the day after to-morrow. 


bicntotf 


soon. 


souTent, 


often. 


aaaez, 


enough. 


d'ordinaire, 


generally. 


tropi 


too, too much. 


qaelqnefols, 


sometimes. 


beanooapv 


mnch, yery much. 


iwmfl^^ 


early. 


tant, 


so much. 


meme, ansal, 


even, aba 


avtant, 


W much. 


t^t, 


soon. 


gaera^ 


hot much, not many. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 




Ca^onctions «ie nsed to connect words or pbnaes. 1 


ol, 


^n^~ 


a mollis qua, 


unless, tin. 


Hi, 
oa, 


neitheri nor. 
or, either. 


mala, 
oependantp 


bat 

fever, 
yet, neyerthdesB, how- 


•olt que, 


whether. 


naamnolna, 




taatot, 


sometimes. 


poortaiitf 




•inoiif 


bnti except 


Unitefbia, 


ahhongh. 


qnoiqiie, 




•I. 


i£ 


encore que) 


thonghy <iltfMwigh- 


atDon qaai 


except that 


blen qney 




pommi QQai, 


proTided that 



BDWABD CHUBOH'B 


SYSTEM. 273 II 


Tomari^ the past: Bier, t 
time: Demainy aprli demain. 


ADVERBS. 






sauvenij d'ordtncdre, qadquefois, tdty hwUoty tard. 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTIsE No. 1. 


• \ 










anddi, 


at noon. 




• . . • . 




EBC»£ TABLES Koa. 80 ud 81. 


j'y serai, 


[be. 

I there will 

[be absent. 








Paoss 866, 878. 

Hier, je sols venue ; aTsnt-hier 


' de m'alweiiter, 


of myself to 








aussL Antrefida, je vous trouvais 


Ijnsqa'a, 


untiL 








tonjours k midi, maintenant jamais. 


onze henrea, 


eleven o'docL 
[soon. 








Venez demaln, on aprea de- 
main, j'y send. Je snifl aonrent 


ni trop tot, 


neither too 








oblige de m'absenter. D'ordin- 


Hi trop tard, 
quitter, 


nor too late* 
toleaye. 








alre, vous me trouyerez de nenf k 
dix heures du matin,* quelqne- 
foia jusqa'k onze heures. B ne 


elolgnea. 


far. 








faut Tenir ni trop tot,ni trop tard. 


Una font paa, 

1 / 


[easary. 
It IS not nee- 








Bientot, je vais quitter la viUe, 
alors nous serous aaaez ^loign^ ; 


negUger, 


to neglect 








il ne faut pas n^g^ger de nous Toir 


1 encore icl, 


still here. 








pendant que je suis encore id. 






• When iwtftn is employed aa in the fol- 
lowing phraaea, it means mdy: Vmm Uott- 
vottg matinf Bo yon rise eailyf Om^ de' 
bm matin. Tea, yeiy eaiij. 



35 



274 FRENCH SPOKEN. || 




ADVERBS. 




To mark quanti^ : IVopf heaiucoup) tcant^peu^ aste*, ^rvini. 


To maik comparison : jpbct, moingf 


atmij (nUani. 11 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTfeE No- 2, 




[fuse. 






mereftisery 


to me to re- 

[vice. 
this little ser- 


..*•.. 




FROM TABLE Na SI. Paob 273. 


M petit MTvloe, 


••.•*• 




• 


de charge, * 


of burden. 






Yous 6te6 trop bon poor me re- 


una dend-paa-' 








fuser ce petit service. JTanrais 


half a dollar. 






beauccmp de plaisir k vous obli- 


paarime, 


for a. 






ger, mais je ne le puis. Je n*ai pas 


aonacriptioii, 


subscription. 


...... 


.....: 


tantde fortune que vous, e( aou- 
vent je donne avec meilleuie grace. 


de cette, 


of this. 








Importanoey 


importance. 






que j'en ai, vons feries comme moL 


qae voiis ^ 


that yon do 
love. 






guere, une demi-piastre pour une 


n'aimiez, . ) 






souscription de cette importance! 


nnpeutropi 


[much, 
a little too 






mon cousin, mon bien aimtf cousin. 


/ 


[taL 






je crains bien que vous n'aimies un 


le vU metal, 


the vile me- 






peu trop le vil m^taL 













BBi 



EDWARP CHUBCH'S SYSTEM. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



275 



To unite two wards under the same nffirmitfoni €i is used; and m' fer the negation. SvU 91M 
(whether), tantdt (sometunes), au (either, or) ; these denote altematiTe. Sinon (bat, except), 
qmique (though, although), h moint que (tuiless, till) ; these restrict an idea. 



VOCABULARY. 



qui AgirlonSf 

soitqae 
Je parte, 
tout de flnltei 
datouty 

arreter, ^ 



t 



rap^rienTy 



meftflslesy 
garantir, 



! 



[act. 
who wwild 
[body, 
that som^ 

[go- 
there should 

whether I 

may start 

inunediately 

atalL 

L joumakej 

to arrest 

superior. 

that 70U me 
should make 

to secure. 



06 que Tomaf 
me deTeky 
pronday 



de yoQa payer of you to pay 

[time, 
to anspoch. 



a one q;K>qiie9 
echne. 



whatyoo. 
to me owe. 
promised. 



expired. 



DICTfeE No. 8. 

FROM TABLE Ko. 21. Paos S7S. 

Yous et moi nous irons les ^eir. 
Ce n'est ni Tous ni moi qui agirioni 
ainsi. Yous OU moi, il fiftut que 
quelqu'un y aille, aoit que je parte 
domain matin, ou youSyrapr^ midl. 
TaBtoty j'ai rid6e de partir tout de 
suite ; tantot de ne pas y aller du 
tout Payez-moi, ainon je yous 
fais arrdter, qaolqae voos soyez 
mon sup^rieur ; a HUrina que tous: 
ne me fassiez garantir ce que tous 
me devez. Cependant, je tous ai 
promis de tous payar k une epoque 
qui n*est pas ^chue. 



276 



PBEKOH 8POKSK. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

O^fendami (iievertlieleM), maU (but), j^oureon/, UmUfaUi these coigtinctions express oppontioii. 
Sinon que (except that), n, h condition que (on oondition that) ; these ej^[»res8 conditioiis. 



VOCABULARY. 



[mentezy 
YOiisine Umr- 

manqae, 

a ma parole, 

[ezlgez, 

oe que Tovm 

[blen, 

Yonia yaadrez 

acceder, 

a la reduction 

einployey 

a mon profit, 

Je le paierala, 

qh fort gfdant, 

homme, 

aalarler. 



[trouble, 
yoame 

fiuled. 

to my word. 

[qoire, 

what you re- 

you will. 

accede. 

[tion. 
to the redno- 

employed. 

to 1117 profit 

[pay- 

I it would 
[est 
a very hon- 



paresM, 
▼ouaafldt, 
perdre, 
•iTOiuin'etea, 
pliis inaolent, 
de suite, 



to pay. 



to lose. 

if you are. 

[pudent 
no more 



inunediatelT 



[made, 
to you has 



jni. Toadrez 1 



DICTilE No. 4. 
FBOH TABLE Ka SI. Paob STt. 

NeamnollUl tous me tourmentez 
antant que si j'avais manqoi ^ ma 
parole. Poartant je vab faire oe 
que Toos exiges : toutefoil tous 
bien acc^der h la rMoctioa 
que j'ai £ute. Si toiis aviez em- 
ploy^ k mon profitytont le temps 
que TOOS me comptez, je le paierais 
ayee plaisir; tous Hm mi fiart ga- 
lant horomei allioil que toos tou- 
lea me fidre salarier tout le temps 
que Totreparesse tous a fidt perdre. 
Je TOUS paieraide suite si tous n'dtos 
plus insolent 



278 v&XNOH spoxKir. || 




TABLE No. 22. 






CONJUNCTIONS. 


apropos, 


now I think of it. 


parce qae. 


becaose. 


a condition, 


on condition that 


puis qae. 


since. 


a la y^te, 


indeed, it is troe that 


poor qae. 


that, in order that 

[etode.) 
now, (to resume^ to con- 


a la bonne heure, 


Tery welL 


pr. 


savotr. 


namely, viz. 


done, 


then. 


. c'est a dire, 


that is to say. 


par oonaeqaent, 


conseqaently. 


oomnie, 




c'eat poorqaol. 


therefore. 


ainal, 
de meme, 


thus, 00. 
as, just as. 


qoandf ^ 
loraqoe. 


when. 


ainai que, 
antant que. 


as. 

as much as. 


tandia qae, "k 
pendant qae, ) 


wbil<^ whilst 


d'alUeura, 


besides, moreover. 


tant qae. 


as bng as. 


outre qoe. 


besides that 


depala qae, 


ever since. 


deplna, 


besides. 


avant que. 


before. 


au anrptoa, 

an molns, 1 


fbrthermore* 


dea qae, 1 
aoaaitot qae, ) 


as soon as. 


du moine, 


at least 


a peine, 


hardly, scarcely. 


poor le molnfl, J 




apreaqae. 


after that 

[dude, 
in fine, finally, to con- 


oar. 


fiir. 


enfln. 


an reate. 


besides, otherwise. 


eneUM, 


in effect, in fiust^ indeed. 1 


apres toot. 


after aO. 







XDWARD CHUROH's 8T8IBM. 



279 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

A prppoiy means now I think of it; a fa vMf^ h la htmm kaure, indeed, yeiy well, express 
consent Savoir; c'esi i^ dire ; (ws.) ihat Is to baj ; coflMM (as), are employed for explanataon. 



VOCABULAET. 



cettetoUe, 
colon dedans, 
ci-Jolnt, 
troifl coaple, 
deperdilz^ 
lonqpe TOOM9 
chaMerez, 



this linen. 

cotton in it 
[ed. 
here annex- 
[pies, 
three con- 

of partridges 

when yon. 

will go shoot- 

iwomised. 



L 



DICTE^J No. !• 
FROM TABUS No. 22. Faab 978. 

A propoSy avez-vous pens^ k 
dcrire k oe Marchand, qn'il pouvait 
m'enyoyer cette toile, a condition 
qu'elle ne oouterait qae qnatre 
francs et demi Taone ? Je la trouve 
mi peu ch^re. A la Teritey elle 
est tr^ fine, et il n'y a pas de coton 
dedans. A la bonne hewe. Je 
TonsenToie ci-joint SaTOlr: trois 
coaples de perdrix, c'eat a dire, 
one demi-dou2aine, comme je Tons 
Tai promise. Ainsi toos ne me feres 
pins de reproches. J'esp^ qne 
vons ferez de meme k inon dgard 
brsque vooa chasseres. 



280 



FREKCH SPOKEK. 



OONJUNCnONS. 

To ezproBS relatkm or puitjr: Mmi quBj tnOcmL To exprpaa angiMitaixm: J /aiU mt n, 
quBy de pluij au turpka. Obr is used for explanation ; ait moiii^ du nUntUf expreaa dhnintition. 



VOCABULAEY. 



conrentiflf 

glbier, 

tont-fUfaity 

unpanler, 

c'eattresmal, 

d'aglr, 

oomme oelay 

on ne Tons 

voitJamalSy 



! 



agreed- 
game, 
quite, 
a basket 
itisyezybad 
of to act 
Uiis. 

we never see 
you. 



DICTilE No. 2. 
FBOM TABLE Kaaa. Paob 978. 
^1^*f^ <|1I6 nooB en aoniini 
venosi je vons envoie aatOt de 
gibier que yens m'en ayes envojitf. 
Bftes-yons satisfait? D'alDean 
je ne pbnrrais pas finre phis aoh* 
joordliniy cmtn qpM je laiase oes 
dames ^en priyer. An mtrphim 
pour que vous soyea content tout4- 
Cutf youa tnmyeres dans Yeunif «a 
panier de douse ^normes p6ehi^ que 
ma femme yons offire. Si yous les 
trouyes bonnes,il fiwt an motaui 
yous dmmer la peine de yenir, en 
chercher une plus grande quantity 
oar o'est trte mal d'agir comme 
oelk; on ne yous yoit jamais. 



EDWARD CHUBCH'8 STSTHM. 281 




ooNJDiJcnoNa 

TWaprewatMuitbii: Au ntte^ apre$ Umt. To expresa the caiue of a thing : JPlarc§^fU,piii 
quefpourqug. To draw a conclusion : Or, 




VaCABULARY. 


-■— ■ - ■ - t 

DICTJ&E No. 8. 

FROM TABLE Na sa pAoaSTa 

1>epaifl tnns mois, point de lettre 
de vous I An reste, je deTais 
m'y attendre, c'est Totre habitude. 
Aprea tout, si tous n'avez pas le 
d^sir 4e receymr de mes non^eOesy 
▼ous avez raison d'agir ainsi, parce 
qae cette lettre sera la demi&re, si 
vous n'y r^pondez courrier pa^ comr- 
rier. Pnlaqae je romps le siknee 
poor qae vous suiyiez mon ex- 
emple>tftchez de ne pas y manquer. 
Or, cher ami) une longue, Uen km- 
gue lettre qui ne le sera jamais pour 
Yotre amie, qui brule de la reoeydr. 
Adieu. 




Je40Tais, 
n^ afttendre, 

votrelialiitade, 
ft'iriepoiidezi 

couitteri } 

leiAeiloe, 

fdftM, > 
mon McnplOy 
tachez, 
qui brQl6| 


longht. 

[eicpect. 
myself to it 

your habit. 

to it answer. 

courier by 
oomier. 

I break. 

ihesiloDoe. 

in order that 

yonmayfbi^ 

low. 

myexAinple. 

try.. 

who bums. 


manqiuf^ ) 
lareoeTolry 


nottoit£uL 
ittofwttre. 
















86 









282 



FBENCH 8P0ICBN. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

T> draw a oondnsion : Or, dume, par eoniSquenij ifeH pourquoi. To tixpnm a 
Quandf lorsque^ tandU que. 



VOCABULARY. 



grondeiiaey grumbler. 

qae Tons etes, that 70a are. 

[done, 
TOIU Toulez 



} 



m'attrilmer, 

tons lea torta, 

Jiurtiller(ae), 

quejeme 

JvfUfle, 

flraeasmri 

fraeaMei 

latete, 

entombanty 

deebeTal, 



70a will then 
[tribute* 
to myself at- 

aU the wrong 
[one's self, 
to justifj 

that I should 
myself jus- 
tify, 
[pieces, 
to break in 

[pieces, 
broken in 

the head. 

infiolling. 

[back, 
from horse- 



[sed. 
myself aoou- 
[genoe. 
of n^i- 



m'aeeiialez, 

denegligenoe 

entre la Tie, [between life. 

etlamort, 

aifidble, 

quelqu'iiii, 

me sovUenty 

chexiraly 

tantqae 

uon cc0iir] 

battra, 

tant, las long as* 



,.\ 



and death. 

[weaL 
80 feebioy 

now. 

somebody. 

me holds. 

[cherish, 
shall loTOi 

as long as 
my heart. 

[beat 
will, or shall. 



DICTflE No. 4. 

FBOM TABLE Ka 22. FAoyf^a 

Grondeuse que tous fttes. Yous 
Toulea done toujouiB m'attribuer 
tous les torts; par conseqaent 
il fiut que je me justafie; 0*001 
pomtjuol J6 me tioaye foni de 
TOUS diroy bonne petite tante, que je 
me suis presque fracass^ la tdte en 
tombant de cheyaL Loraqoe Tona 
m'aocuaiea de negligence, j*tei8 entre 
la vie et la mort Je suki si falble 
maintenant que tandla que j'^cris, 
quelqu*un me soutient la ttte. Je 
n'ai plus de force poor oootmner, 
except^ celle de toos dire que je 
▼ons didrini tant que nxm ccBur 
battra. 



SDWABD CHUBOH'S 8T8TEX. 283 j| 


' CONJDNCaiONa 




To express a GucamBtanoe: I}qmi$ que^ dh qm^ aooiU quSf d peinef mjm, m efei. 1 


VOCABULARY. , | 


DICTEi: No. 5. 
FROM TABLE No. 22. Paqb 278. 


4110 J6 ooonaii, 


that I know. 


enroate, 


OQ the road. 


laoaQM, 


the cause. 


acellOi 


to her. 


Depnia qae je connab la cause 


d6TOti0ill«iioe, 


[lenoe. 

of your si- 

[to myself. 


qi»lV».h«», 


something 


yiyement de tous ayoir ^crit avant 


Jemnpiootei 


I zepxtrach 


emmaunfllfi 


asasoB. 


d'avoir i^pris votre accident. Dea 


▼iTement, 


stnmgly. 






qae j'ens lu Totre lettre, je fis mon- 


monter, 


to get up. 






ter Germam h cheyal, pour aller 
Tous porter ses soins. Depnia 


Germain, 
acheTal, 


G^rmam, 
on horseback 






qa'il estltnotre service, il'nousa^t^ 

d^TOU^. 


memmOuBf 


his cares. 

[Tice. 






k peine lui ai-je propose d'aUer 


aiMrtmiervloe, 


to our ser- 






quelqnes instants Bipr^ il ^tait en 


devoae, 


deyoted. 






route. Pauvre CharlesI en eflRst, 
Totre tante est un pea grondeuse ; 


propoM, 


proposed. 






enfln, il fant passer qudque chose h 


dlapam. 


disappeared. 






celle qui tous aime oomme un fils. 









286 


FBBICGH SPOKSN. 


g^ 




CONJUGATION OP THE IMPEBSONAL VEBBS. 




The imperMmal verbe are those which are conjugated only in the third person singolar. 
subject is unknown ; il has no^ relation to a substantive. 


Its 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTiSE No. 1. 
n flrat que je m'en aille. 




fiOloIr, 
y aToIr, 


[sary. 
to be neces- 
[mesniiigtobe 
there to hare 


wofflre, 


[dent 
tobesuffi- 

to be proper. 


J^eVFOlTy 


torain« 
to snow 


etre apropos, 
a'en raivre. 


to be proper, 
to follow. 


n 7 a long temps. 
n pleat k Terse, 
n neige k flooons. 




greler, 


tohaiL 


▼enter, 


to blow. 


ngreie 




tonner, 
«clairer, 


tolhnnder^ 
to lighten. 






n tonne 

Ugelle 

ndegelle 




aflocona. 


bj flakes. 


geler, 

degeler, 

anlTer, 


freeze. 

thaw. 

happen. 


ayenie, 


bj torrents. 


narrlYe 

nimporte 

Ilaemble . 

neclaire 




Importer, 
sembler, 


to matter. 
to seem. 






nparait 

n anfflt •...,... 
noonTlent •• 




paraitre, 


to appear. 






neatapropoa 

na'enanit 
















nyente 





aaifa 



EDWABD OHUBOH'S B T B T B M. 



287 



dasjjjGAtios OF the impbksonal verbs. 



VOCABULARY. 



Ini en parler, 
beancoTip 
de numde, 
a seanz, 



:i 



afloooiiflf 

[ment, 
eponvaataUa* 

a. pl6iT0 ftnivBi 

tantd'accidents 

ipiBmnM 

fluaiez, 

qa'Uf&t 

fon, 

qa'U eat tort, 






[hertoi^>eak 
to luin or to 



many people 

by torrents. 

by flakes. 

dreadfully. 

[stone 

to break a 

[ddeiitB. 

so many ac- 

thatyon ^ 

shoald be ^ 
there. 

that he 
should be 

[wrong, 
that he was 



qa'Uslgiiat 

Tacte, 

qpmvoxm 

huifliez, 

qu'on les 

avprtity 

da desordre, 



lie I 

! 



that he 

should sign 

the act 

that yon 

shoald .read 

it. 

that they 
should fore- 
tell them. 
der. 
some disor- 



DICXfeE No. 2. 
INDICATIYB MOOD. 



n filllalt lui en parler. ' '• < 
n 7 avalt beaocoup de meodet . : 
n pleavait k seauz. 
n nelgeait k floebns; 
n greSlait tant que je ne pti»«9nfn 
II tonoatt ^pouvan^blement. . . . 
n gelait k pierre fendre. 
n degelait trop poor se promener. 
n arriTait tant d'aoddeiiB. ; - 
n Importalt que vous y fbssiez. 
n aemblait qu'il ffit fou. 
II eclairait constamment. 
n iiaralMait qn'U edt tort, 
n sofllaait qn'il sign&t Tacte. 
n convenait que tods le lussiez. 
n etait a proiXM qu'on les ayerttt. 
n a'en ralvait toigourB da de- 
sordre. 
n Yentalt trap fort 



^^^^^MUM 



Ub 



888 



VSBirOB S.POKBV. 



gONJUGATION OF THB DIPEBSOllAL VSKB& 



VOCABULABT. 



jtiBmi 



\ 



to tondomftliif 
tojavflutfaiit, 



qiidqiieiJoiiiB 
tosemaine 

de grands 
malheanf 
queToiui 



! 
'! 



thereto go. 

all the day. 

in the eveor 

the next day 
[d«7. 
the foUo wing 

daring a few 
di^ 



thefoDovHng 
week. 



great nuflfin^ 
tunes. 

that you 

there siioald 

go- 



[time, 
in the same 



DICTJ§!£ No. 8. 

FBETEBrr DKnsaxs. 

In lUlllt y alkr. 
n y eat beaaeoup de monde. 
n plot tonte la joQxn^ 
n nelgea dans la 8oir6e. 
n grala le lendemain. 
n tomia le jour stnyant 
n eolatFa, en mdme tempa. 
n gelm peadant quelqiiea joaiB< 
n degela la semaine soivante. 
n arrlTa de grands malhenrs. 
n Importa que toub y i 
naemUa 
npamt 

n Buflu 

nccmTliift 

n flit a propoa • • 

Ha'ansiiMt 



■ DWARD OHVBOH'S STSTItlf. 289 


oonjugahon of thb imfissonal yvasa. 


VOCABULABT. 1 


DICXiiE No. 4. 


1»Mei|ilvMr, 


lier to explain 
fttohimorto 






bCSQOOIQI ) 









n a fUhl le Ini ezpBqoer. 


depertes, ) 


manyloMeB. 






n 7 a ea beancoap de perlea. 
n a phi toute la aaiaon. 


plus foe Faimee 


[theyeaar. 
more than 






n a nalge pi^a de deux mois. 
n a gr&e preaqae loui lea jonra. 


pnccdontef 


preceding, 
[send. 






n a toniie an moia de fS^vrier. 
n a edatre toute la aoir^ 


dPy €Uf0fWf 


of there to 






n a gale pltia qoe I'ann^ prd- 


tout de mite, 


immediately 






oMente. 
n a degele mi pen ce matin. 
n earifc arrlre mi grand malheor. 
n a Importe d'y envoyer toot de 

aoite. 

naaemble 

pi a IMtfQ • • • • • . • 

naanfll 






neatoonTena 






naeteapropoa 






n a'aicwt aiilTl 






87 







290 VRBNGH BPOKSH. 


OONJtfOATroN OP ¥HB DtPBBSONAIi YBBBft 


VOCABULARY 




DICTJ^E No. 5* 


peat^tre, 

dubeninfloe, 

royez le del, 

avantimalieiird 

da&sUiiiiiity 

beaucotqp ^ 

d'aooldents,) 


perhaps. 

aooiepvoat 

see the Aj. 
[hour, 
before aa 

iatheniji^ 

many of 
acddents. 




•... 


••••••,• 


« 


^ • • • • 

k • • • • 

1 • • • • 
■ • •,• • 
I • t.« • 

* * * ^ •* 1 

t *...• < 

• • • . • .4 
• • • • .1 


jrUTUiiK. 

n flmdra m'^crire aoiimiA. . 
n 7 aura pent-dtrei da bdn^oe. . 
n plenvra peat4tre moios de- 

maia. 
n ndgera dans k joani^ 
n grelera demaia je pease. 
n tonnera oe scnr, vcjtz le deL 
n eclairera ayant me hetm^ 
n gellera dans la noit. 
n degeUera ayant hoit joon. 

nimportera 

n semUera 

nparaitra 

Ilaiiflbra 

n cxniTleiidra 






Ila'enaiiiTra 

IlT0iitera 

















XDWABD OHVBOH'S 8T8TXX. 291 


CONJUGATION OF THE IMPBBSONAL VERBS. 


VOCABULABT* 


DICT^E No. 8. 
OOKDrnOKAL. 


ftimlilMi ) 


pay much 


• 


-8 ■ 


ttttentloii, ) 


attfmtifim. 






n ftmdnit fidre bien altopflon. 


dehiperte, 


Bomelosa. 






D 7 mmll de> p«rl«. 


dnslafNOA 


faHhebttii. 


• •»••.• 




n iMlgOTatt dans la Toitaie. 
ngr^mdtdtttlagnawB. 

ntomimdt 

nedbdrentt 

ngdtanit 

Dttnlfvraljl 

nimportenit 

nMmbtanit 

Dpuannit •••••••• 

11 oonrteudrut 
nifleraitapropM •••••••• 

n fl'en rai^rait 

DTOitaralt 







»• 



FBBNOH BPQKSV« 



OQNJUOATION OF THE DCFEBSONAL YBBSa 



VOCABULARY 



qael maUieiir, 
qael enimlf 
qnal dommage, 
quelle 
contrailetei 
bone, 



i^i 



[fortune, 
what a mis- 
[ation. 
what a Yax- 

what a pity. 

wjhat a .T»- 

ation* 



mad. 



DICTjSe No. 7* 
STTBJUNCnVB PBIBflBfT. 

Qa'U fidtne toub qmttevv 
Qall 7 ait tant de boue I 
QnllpletiTetantl 
Qa'lliiiilgen«iirll 

QaHlgrele 

QaVtonne 

QnVeclalre 

QnVgelle 

QaVdegelle : 

QaVanlTe 

Qnll Impoite 

QaVsemble [ 

Qa^poratMei 

QaHlraflbe 

Qall ccmTleiiiie 

Qallfloitaixro^ 

Qa'Q a'en miiy e 

QallTente 



mmm 



msmmmsmm 



I BDWABD OHUBOH'B 8T8TBX. 


298 1 


OONJUGATION OF TBDB DfPBBSONAL TRKBB. 


VOCABULABT. | 


DICT^B No. 8. 

SUJUUMCriVJB iSOOD. 
mnBiBOx^ 

QaV ftllat le punir. 
QaV y rat mdns de monde. 
QnU plat rnoins fort 
QaU ndgeat un pen moins. 




Jematolfiche, 
JedMlrerais, 
JeTomdrals, 
vmidilox-was 7 


[eony. 
I should be 

Ishonldlike 

I should like 

would 70a? 
rftvUiAtbef 
siouldyou 

/ 

• • t • • • 






f%nNl ♦^itintft ■ • • ■ • • • 


^^u u iviiimw • • • • • • • 


OnMI oralci^ • • • • • • • 


^^U u gvuw ••••••• 


^^U U UC||CMl« •*••••• 


^^nfl 4wiv%#vfl*#A^ • • • . « A • 


%^u^i imporHW • • • • • • • 

CH1MI MAmMM ••••••• 


Onll nuwut • • A • • • • 


OnMI aiiflP^w ■•••••• 










Onll ■111 IF it, •••••■■ 










t^U U VUlTlw ••••••• 

QnllT^nuit 



296 



FKXKOH B^OKBK. 



TABLE Na S8. 



INTEBJECII0N8. 
LiteijectxHiB expreas the sudden emotiom of the iooL 



Hal 


Astonidmieiit* 


HolA! 


n.intig- 


Ahlaiel ' 


PaiiL 


HeUenl 


IhteRogataoii* 


HelM! 


GMeC 


Oare! hem! 


Waming^ 


Oh! ah! 


Admiraftioii. 


Couragel 


EoLCOoncpuigi 


Fl! 11 donol 


DiagOBt. 


Bmrol TlTatl 


Applauding. 


Faixl ohut! 


SOenoe. 


Blsl UsI 


BwoffP"g- 



EBW4.KD GHITKOH'S 8T8TSK. 



S97 



IMTEBJECrnONS. 



VOCABULAET. 



aasecoim, 



e'i 



murder. 

fiiU speed. 

fnL 
it is delifl^t- 



DICT£e No. 1. 

FBOM TABLE Na S8. Faob S96. 

Ha ! vT«imentI ale ! Yoos me 
Ifaites mall Ah! quel malhenrl 
Helaa! qui ponvut le pr^voir. 
Oh I quelle admirable peinturel 
Ah I la chaimante vue ! Fldonol 
ponvez-vous bieu parler ainsi I Fl! 
▼ous devries 6tre 'bonteuxl Pttlz! 
Ohut ! j'entends quelqu'uu. Holai 
hola! venez yite, au seeoursl au 
secoursl he Uen! qu'j a^t-il 
done? Gare! Oare! hem! 
hem I prenes garde, void des che- 
▼anx h bride abattue. Coutagel 
courage ! vous 7 dtes. n le 
tientl Bravo! Tlvat! Cest 
ravissant. Bla! blal 



^r 



298 



FBENCH SPOKKH. 



0. 

1. 
M 2- 

et 3- 
et 4. 
et 5- 
et 6* 
et 7. 
et 8* 
et 9* 
et 10- 
et 11- 
et 12. 
et IS* 
et 14. 
et 15. 
et 16- 
et 17. 
et 18- 
et 19. 
et 20. 



.zero. 



•nn 



.deux---- 
'trois •••• 
.qaaiare .-< 

-cinq 

-six 

• ncpl 

huit 

-neuf. 

•dfac ... .. 
'Onze • — 
'douze ... 
.treize .•• 

quatorze 
. QXiiiize . * ' 
•seize 

diz-eept. 
.diz-buit. 
.diz-neuf. 
.yingt — 



.font 
.font 
.font 
.font 
.font 
.font 

• font 
.font 
•font 

• font 
•font 
•font 

• font 
.font 
.font 
.font 
.font 
.font 

• font 



. 8 

- 6 
. 10 
. 15 
. 21 
. 28 
• 86 
. 45 

- 55 
. 66 
. 78 
> 91 

■ 106 
120 

.186 
153 
^71 
.190 

■ 210 



21 Tingt et mif 

30-*--««*..trente, 

81 trehte et miy 

40 qnarante, 

41 qnarttnte et utif 

50 ctnqaante, 

51..... — clnqaante et mi, 

60 eolzante, 

61.... eolzante et nn, 

70 sotatante-dlz, 

71 soizanie-oxize, 

80 qaatre-Tiqgt, 

81 qaatre-yliigt-iiii, 

90 — qaatre-Ylngt-diz, 

91 quatre-Tingt-onze, 

100 cent, 

101 cent-un, 

200 deux cents, 

1,000 mUle, 

10,000 dizmUle, 

1,000,000 million. 









EDWABD CHUBCH'B SYSTEM. 






299 1 


MV&TIPftZOATIOX TA8SB. 


1 


a 


3 


4 


6 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


A 


4' 


6 


8 


10 


la 


14 


16 


18 


ao 


3 


6 


9 


la 


16 


18 


ai 


a4 


a7 


30 


4 


8 


la 


16 


ao 


a4 


ao 


3a 


36 


40 


6 


10 


16 


ao 


a6 


30 


36 


40 


46 


60 


6 


ia 


18 


a4 


30 


36 


42 


48 


64 


60 


7 


14 


ai 


ao 


36 


42 


49 


66 


63 


70 


8 


16 


a4 


3a 


40 


48 


66 


64 


7a 


80 


9 


18 


27 


36 


46 


64 


63 


7a 


81 


90 


10 


20 


30 


40 


60 


60 


70 


80 


90 


100 


^"^^D 





















300 



FRENCH SPOKEN. 



MULTIPLICATION. 



Application of the preceding Table. 



VOCABULARY. 



deux fois deux 
font qnatn. 
deux fois troii 
font fix. 
deux fois qoatn 
font Iinit 
denx fois cinq 
fontdix. 
deufvissix 
font donxe. 
denx foil npt 
font qnatone. 



2 times two 

make four. 

2timestliree 

make six. 

2 times four 

make eight 

2 times five 

make ten. 

2 times six 

make twelve 

2 times seven 
[teen, 
makerour- 



denx foil hnit 
font leixe. 
denxlbiiBenf 
fontdix-hntt 
denx foil dli 
fontYlngL 



2 times eight| 
* [teen, 
make six* 

2 times nine 
[teen, 
makA eigli- 

.9 

2 times ten 
make twenty 



DICT^E 

FROM PAGE 299. 

2 fois 2 font 4, 2 fois 3 font 6, 2 
fois 4 font 8, 2 fois 5 font 10, 2 fois 
6 font 12, 2 fois 7 font 14, 2 fois 8 
font 16, 2 fois 9 font 18, 2 fob 10 
font 20. 

8 fois 2 font 6, 8 fois 8 font 9, 8 
foia 4 font 12, 8 fois 5 font 15, 3 fois 
6 font 18, 8 fois 7 font 21, 8 fois 8 
font 24^ 8 fois 9 font 27, 8 fois 10 
Ifont 80. 

4 fois 2 font 8, 4 fois 8 font 12, 4 
fois 4 font 16, 4 fois 5 font 20, 4 fois 
6 font 24, 4 fois 7 font 28, 4 fois 8 
font 82, 4 fois 9 font 86, 4 fob 10 
fixit40. 

5 fois 2 font 10, 5 fois 8 font 15, 5 
fois 4 font 20, 5 fois 5 font 25, 5 fm 
6 font 80, 5 fois 7 font 85, 5 fois 8 
font 40, 5 fois 9 font 45, 5 fois 10 
font 50. 

6 fois 2 font 12, 6 fois 8 fopt 18, 6 fois 4 font 24, 6 fois 5 font 80, 6fois 6 font 86, 6 fois 7font 42, 

6 fois 8 font 48, 6 fois 9 font 54^ 6 fois 10 font 60. 

7 fois 2 font 14, 7 fois 8 font 21, 7 fois 4 font 28, 7 fois 5 font 85, 7 fois 6 font 42, 7 fois 7 font 
49, 7 fois 8 font 56, 7 fois 9 font 68, 7 fois 10 font 70. 

'8 fois 2font 16, 8 fois 8 font 24, 8 fois 4 font 82, 8 fois 5 font 40, 8fois 6 font 48, 8 fois 7 font 
56, 8 fois 8 font 64, 8 fois 9 font 72, 8 fois 10 font 80. 

9 fois 2 font 18, 9 fois 8 font 27, 9 fois 4 fmit 36, 9 fins 5 font 45, 9 fois 6 font 54, 9 fois 7 font 
68, 9 fois 8 font 72, 9 fois 9 font 81, 9 fois 10 font 90. 

10 fois 2 font 20, 10 fois 8 font 80, 10 fois 4 font 40, 10 fois 5 font 50, 10 fob 6 font 60, 10 fois 

7 font 70, 10 fois 8 font 80, 10 fois 9 font 90, 10 fois 10 font 100. 



EDWABD CHUBCH's 8TSTBK. 801 j 




MDLTIPI 
Mnltipliec 128 par 45 


:jcation. 

123 


45 






615 
492 

5585 


VOCABULARY. 


DICTJfeE 
FROM PAGE 299. 
Cinq fois trois fimt qnimse; je 


nmltipllei 
eentTingttnii 


multiplj 

[twenW-thrae 
a hundred 


einqfoisim 
font einq, et 


5 times one 
make 5, and 


par foinuitB dkq. 

dnfftriiMi 

fontqiiilue; 


by forty-five. 
5 times three 
make fifteen. 


nn de ittenv 
Mt dx; 
la pmiix. 


1 kept back 
make six; 
Isetsix. 


pose dnq et je retiens im. Cinq 
fins deux font diz, et m de letenn 
font onze ; je pose nn et je retiens 
on. Cinq fois nn fimt dnq, et nn 


Jepmdnqi 

etjeivtfmui. 

dBiftriidenx 


I set fire 

and hold one. 

5 times two 
[and one 
make ten, 

[make 
kept back 


qnatrebiiMi 

bHtdoua; 

Jepmdenxi 


4timesthiee 
maketwdre 
I set two, 


de retenu font nx; je pose six. 
Qnatre fois trois foot donae; je pose 
denxy et je retiens nn. Qnatre fois 
deux font hnit, et nn de retenn font 


bfttdb^etni 
dentambHt 


etjoiettenini. 
qnatnfoiideiixbiit 


andlholdl. 

[make 

4 times two 


neuf ; je pose nenf. Qnatre fois nn 
font qnatre; je pose qnatre. 


onn; Je 

pmniet 

jeRtbumi. 


eleyen; I 
set one and 
I hold one. 


hnit^etiiide 

ntanftntMif; 

jepmnent 


eight and one 
[make nine; 
kept back 

I set nine. 


ADDXTlOir. 

Cinq est dnq. TTn et deux font 
trois. Six et neuf font quinze; je 
pose dnq, et je retiens nn. Qnatre 
et nn font dnq ; je pose dnq. 


















TOTAL. 






• 




Cinq miUe, dnq cent, trente dnq. 



This book should be retximed to 
the Library on or before the last date 
stamped below. 

A fine of five cents a day is incurred 
by retaining it beyond the specified 
time. 

Please return promptly. 



